■ill
''^ii^f'Mo
Iiitek il
CHARDENAL'S
COMPLETE
FRENCH COURSE
l^etD (lEtiition
REVISED AND REWRITTEN BY
MARO S. BROOKS
HEAD OF THE MODERN LANGUAGE DEPARTMENT IN THE
HIGH SCHOOL, BROOKLINE, MASSACHUSETTS
ALLYN AND BACON
i5o&ton anb €l)ica00
COPYRIGHT, 1907, BY
ALLYN AND BACON
PREFACE
For many years Chardenars Complete French Course has
been the most popular and the most successful of the
many text-books for elementary instruction in French.
Its success is owing largely to its simplicity and its
thoroughness. In revising the book for a new edition
the editor has endeavored to retain both these excellent
qualities, and to make the book still more acceptable by
the following changes.
The order of presentation has been altered so as to
secure from the outset greater variety in the exercises.
Among many other changes may be mentioned the early
introduction of verbs and their presentation by tenses
instead of by conjugations ; the treatment of verbs in -oir
as regular verbs of the third conjugation and those in -re as
regular verbs of ^he fourth ; the early introduction of per-
sonal pronouns, together with the rule for the agreement
of the past participle used with the verb avoir.
The practical value of the vocabulary has been increased
by the insertion of' many words and phrases of frequent
occurrence in ordinary conversation.
The sentences for translation have been made lively
and colloquial. To many of the lessons there have been
added whole exercises consisting of questions only. These
questions are intended as a basis for conversational work
in the classroom, and may all be answered from the
%^c^
iy Preface
material furnished by the preceding lessons. To stimu-
late conversation still further, a list of expressions for
classroom use has been prepared.
While as a rule one topic at a time has been presented,
every subject will be found completely summarized in a
single lesson.
The editor's thanks are due to Professor Charles H.
Grandgent, of Harvard University, and to many others,
for valuable criticisms and suggestions.
Decembeb, 1907«
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION p^^^
The Alphabet 1
Orthographic Signs 1
Pronunciation 3
Division of Syllables 12
Words for Practice 12
The Linking of Words (Liaison) 14
Capital Letters .15
Marks of Punctuation 16
Expressions for Classroom Use 17
EXERCISES
1. The Article 21
2. Avoir : Present Indicative, Affirmative .... 22
3. Avoir : Present Indicative, Interrogative .... 23
4. Etre : Present Indicative, Affirmative 24
A
5. Etre : Present Indicative, Interrogative .... 25
6. Plural of Nouns 26
Avoir : Present Indicative, Negative 26
7. Possessive Adjectives 27
Avoir: Present Indicative, Negative Interrogative . 28
8. Agreement of Adjectives 29
English Possessive 29
A
Etre : Present Indicative, Negative 29
9. Agreement of Adjectives (continued ) 30
A
Etre : Present Indicative, Negative Interrogative . 30
vi Contents
Page
10. The Past Indefinite Tense 31
11. Numeral Adjectives 33
12. Ordinal Nunibers 34
13. Contraction of the Preposition a 35
14. Contraction of the Preposition de 37
15. Possessive Pronouns 39
16. Comparison of Adjectives 41
17. Relative Pronouns 42 "
18. Demonstrative Adjectives 43
19. Demonstrative Pronouns 45
20. Demonstrative Pronouns {continued) 46
21. Cardinal Numbers 48
22. Cardinal Numbers {continued) 50
23. Ordinal Numbers and Fractions 51
24. Names of Days and Months 52
25. Past Participles with dtre 54
26. Personal Pronouns with Prepositions . . • . . 56
27. The Adjective tout 58
28. The First Conjugation 59
29. Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects 62
30. Past Participle with avoir 65
31. Plural of Nouns and Adjectives 67
32. The Second Conjugation 69
33. Nouns Used in a General Sense 71
34. Nouns of Quantity 72
35. The Third Conjugation 74
36. Adverbs of Quantity 76
37. The Pronoun en 78
38. Partitive Article and Pronoun . ." 80
39. The Fourth Conjugation 82
40. The Partitive after a Negative 85
Contents vii
Pa OK
41. The Partitive with Adjectives 87
42. The Imperfect Indicative 80-
43. Position of Adjectives 92
44. Comparison of Adjectives 94
45. C'est and ce sont 9^
46. Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 99
47. The Future Tense 102
48. The Future Tense {continned) 104
49. Interrogative Adjectives 107
50. Time of Day. Dates 10&
Conjugation of aller 110
51. The Seasons . 112
Conjugation of faire 112
52. Ages. Dimensions 114
' Conjugation of savoir 115
53. The Interrogative Pronoun lequel 116
Conjugation of dire 116
54. The Relative Pronouns lequel and dont . . . 119
Conjugation of voir 120'
55. Ce qui, ce que, and Other Relatives .... 122
56. Feminine of Adjectives 125-
57. Feminine of Adjectives (continued) 128
58. Position of Adverbs 130"
59. Idioms with avoir 133
60. Conditional Mode 136
61. Interrogative Adverbs 140
62. Personal Pronouns 142
63. Order of the Pronouns 146
64. Personal Pronouns (continued) 148
65. Pronominal Verbs: Reflexive Use 151
66. Pronominal Verbs : Reciprocal Use 155
viii Contents
Page
67. Compound Tenses 157
68. The Pronouns en and y 160
69. Personal Pronouns: Sumnaary 163
70. The Definite Article: Summary of its Use . . . 166
71. The Definite Article (continued) 169
The Indefinite Article 171
72. Duration of Time 174
73. The Past Definite Tense 177
74. Peculiarities of the First Conjugation . . . . ISO
75. Verbs Ending in -yer, -cer, or -ger 184
76. The Subjunctive Mood 188
With Impersonal Verbs 189
77. Formation of the Present Subjunctive .... 191
78. The Subjunctive after Negative or Interrogative
Verbs t 194
Conjugation of croire 195
79. Subjunctive after Verbs Expressing Emotion . . 197
Conjugation of vouloir 197
80. The Subjunctive with ne after Certain Verbs . . 200
Conjugation of craindre 200
81. Subjunctive in Adjective Clauses 202
Conjugation of connaitre 202
82. Subjunctive in Adverbial Clauses 204
83. Summary of the Uses of the Subjunctive . . . 206
84. Sequence of Tenses of the Subjunctive .... 209
The Imperfect Subjunctive 210
85. Further Drill on the Subjunctive 212
Conjugation of falloir and pleuvoir 212
86. Subjunctive in Independent Clauses ..... 214
87. The Subjunctive with que 217
Conjugation of venir 217
Contents ix
Page
88. The Infinitive 219
Conjugation of pouvoir 220
89. The Infinitive with the Preposition de .... 222
Conjugation of mettre 223
90. The Infinitive with the Preposition k 225
Conjugation of ecrire 226
91. The Subjunctive and the Infinitive Moods Com-
pared 227
Conjugation of courir and mourir 229
92. Present Participle 230
Conjugation of lire 231
Conjugation of rire 232
93. The Past Participle 233
Collective Nouns 234
94: AUer, devoir, and faire 237
95. Formation of Tenses 242
96. Summary of Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 247
97. Position of Adjectives 251
98. Negation 256
99. The Use of de 260
100. The Use of 4 *. 264
101. The Prepositions en and dans 268
Review Exercises 272
Sentences Selected from College Entrance Examinations 279
Selections for Reading 286
APPENDIX OF FORMS AND RULES
, The Definite Article 299
The Noun :
Rule for Gender 299
X Contents
Page
Formation of the Feminine 300
Formation of the Plural • . . 303
The Adjective :
Formation of the Feminine 305
Possessive Adjective 306
Demonstrative Adjective 306
The Pronoun 307
The Verb :
Avoir 308
Etre '. 314
Terminations of Regular Verbs 320
The Four Conjugations 322
The Passive Verb 330
Conjugation of a Reflexive Verb 331
Conjugation of a Reciprocal Verb 332
Irregular Verbs 334
Verbs Followed by the Infinitive without a Prepo-
sition 348
Verbs Requiring de before an Infinitiye .... 348
Verbs Requiring k before an Infinitive .... 350
Adjectives which Change their Meaning with their
Position 351
The Adverb 353
Official Modifications in Syntax 354
VOCABULARY 359
INDEX c . . 421
INTRODUCTION
THE ALPHABET
a
b
C
d e
f
ff
h
i
a
he
ce
(/e e ^ (
#^
y^'
ache
i
J
k
1
m n
p
q
r
>*
ka
elle
e?7i??ie enne
jye
ku
erre
8
t
n
V w
X
y
z
esse
te
u
ve double
ve
iks
i fl'?'ec
i^eci?
ORTHOGRAPHIC SIGNS
Accents. — Apostrophe. — Hyphen. — Cedilla. —
Diaeresis.
Three orthographic marks are called accents, — the
acute (^), the grave (^), and the circumflex (^).
The acute accent, accent aigu, is used only over the
vowel e (6), which then has the sound of a in late. As
^t^, v^rit^.
The grave accent, accent grave, is used chiefly over
the vowel e (&), which then has nearly the sound of e in
met. As pr^s, p^re. It is used over a and u merely to
distinguish certain words which are otherwise spelled
alike, and does not alter the pronunciation. As k (to)
from a (has) ; \k (there) from la (the or her) \ oti (where)
from ou (or),
1 In repeating the alphabet, e is usually pronounced like ^; in spelling a
word, an unaccented e is given the sound of e in le. See page 8.
2 Introduction
The circumflex accent, accent circonflexe, is used on
any vowel, which is then long. As ^ge^ t§te, ile, ddme,
bache. It frequently indicates that a letter has been
dropped, as in ile, isle ; ^me (Latin, anima), soul.
It distinguishes dii {owed) from du (of the) sur, {sure) from sur
(upon)j mur {ripe) from mur [wall).
These accents do not imply any stress of voice on the syllable where
they occur.
The apostrophe. Tapes trophe, ('), indicates that one of
the vowels, a, e, or i has been dropped before a word
beginning with a vowel or h mute,
a is elided only in the article or pronoun la ; as Pfime for la fime.
e is elided in le, je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que (but when je, ce, le,
and la come directly after tlie verb, either as subjects or objects, no
elision takes place) ; in jusque and lorsque ; in puisque and quoique
before il, ils, elle, elles, on, un, une ; in quelque before un, une ; and
in entre in compound words.
i is elided only in si before il or ils.
No elision occurs before onze, onzidme, oui, huit, huiti^me.
The hyphen, le trait d'union, (-), marks the connection
between two or more words or parts of a word.
The hyphen is used between the verb and the pro-
nouns je, moi, nous, tu, toi, vous, il, ils, elle, elles, le, la,
les, lui, leur, y, en, ce, on, when they are placed after a
verb of which they are subjects or objects. The other
cases of its use will be noticed as they occur.
The cedilla, la c^dille, (5), is put under c when it has
the sound of s before a, o, or u. As frangais, gargon,
regu.
The diaeresis, le tr^ma, ( " ), is placed over the second
of two vowels to show that it begins a new syllable. As
naif (na-if), noel (no-el).
Pronunciation
PRONUNCIATION
Most French sounds have no English equivalents. In
the following pages on pronunciation, intended only to
supplement the work of the teacher by furnishing ex-
amples for the use of both teacher and pupil, the word
like means somewhat like, when French and English
sounds are compared.
Simple Vowels
a (short) has a sound between the a of bar and the a
in mat. As la, the; quatre, /bi^r / table, table; a, has;
^ to ; Canada.
a (long) or d. has the sound of a in father. The mouth
should be opened wide. As ame, sotil ; bitir, to build ;
sale, dirty; iahle, fable ; pas, stejy ; claBse, class ; espace,
space; nation, nation : tentation, temptation.
a is sileDt in ao^t, Curacao, toast, Saone.
6 has the sound of a in late} As 6t4, summer;
v^rit^, truth; c6d6, yielded; r^p^t^, o^epeated ; d^g^n^r^,
degenerate.
^ and % vary in sound between the e of met and the ei
of their. As pr^s, near ; p&re, father ; m^re, mother /
t6te, head ; m^me, same.
e without an accent has a souqd similar to that of e in
the before a consonant: the door, the boy, etc. As de,
1 "When we pronounce an English vowel slowly, we really produce two
sounds, a slight finish or vanishing sound being beard. A French vowel
has only one sound. Practise the various vowel and nasal sounds, first
placing the mouth in position, and then uttering the sound without mov-
ing lips, tongue, or jaws. Practise prolonging the pound, always slopping
abruptly.
4 Introduction
of ; je, /; venir, to come. At the end of words of more
than one syllable it is silent ; as dame, lady ; farine,
flour. After two consonants, or at the end of a syllable
and preceding a consonant, its sound is very indistinct,
merely sufficient to pronounce the consonant before it ;
as arbre, tree ; samedi, Saturday, It has the sound of ^
{a in late) before final d, f, r, z, when these consonants
are mute ; as pied, foot ; clef, key ; parler, to speak ;
nez, nose. It has the sound of ^ before c, f, 1, r, s, t, x,
not mute, before final t mute or pronounced, and before
a double consonant; as bee, beak ; chef, chief; sel, salt;
fer, h'on ; ferme, farm ; belle, heautlful ; net, clean /
obje(t), object ; ^Becie{€)^ secret; regre(t), regret ; tu es,
thou art ; il est, he is.
In et, les, des, ces, mes, tes, ses, the e is longer than e in est, is, but
not quite so long as e in nez, nose.
In femme, woman ; solennel, solemn ; hennir, to neigh ; nenni, no^
not by anij means, and in all adverbs ending in -emment, the first e has
the sound of French short a.^
i and i usually have the sound of i in machine. As
nid, nest ; gris, gray ; ile, island ; fini, finished ; midi,
noon ; ici, hei^e. In the last three of these examples the
first i is shorter than the second.
o (open) has a sound between the o of not and the u
of ?iut. Robe, dress ; mode, fashion ; mol, soft ; votre,
your ; ^cole, school ; bonne, good (fem.); parole, word.
o (closed) has the sound of o in note. As mot, word ;
cdt^, side ; le vdtre, yours ; rdle, roll, role; rose, rose;
chose, thing ; fosse, grave,
is silent in f aon, Laon, paon, taon.
u is pronounced like u in German, but has no equiva-
lent in English. To form it, round the lips as if about
I Ueallv a medium a.
Pronunciation 5
to whistle, then without moving the lips, say ee, Tu,
thou ; rue, street ; plus, inore ; lune, moon ; murmure,
murmur. It is usually silent after q and also when
standing between g and e or g and i. As qui, who ;
qusitre J four ; guerre, war; guide, r/u id e.
y following a consonant, or standing alone, has the
sound of French i. As type, ti/pe ; y, there.
y standing between two vowels performs the office of
iy, the i uniting with the preceding vowel. As rayon,
ray, = rai-yon ; appuyer, to suppo?'t, z=a.ppvLi-yeT. (See
below. Compound Vowels.) Pays^ paysan, paysage = pai-
ls, etc.
Compound Vowels and Diphthongs
ai at the end of verbs, in gai, quai, and in je sais, tu
sais, il sait, has the sound of 6 : j'ai, I have ; je donnerai,
I shall give ; otherwise it has the sound of 6 : mais, but;
vrai, trice ; je donnerais, I should give.
In faisant, doing, and its derivatives, it has the sound of e.
au, eau have the sound of o in uote. As autre, other ;
chapeau, hat ; beau, handsome. In Paul, mauvais, hady
and before r, au has the sound of open o.
ei has the sound of ^. As reine, queen,
eu, oBu have no equivalent in English. The sound is
somewhat like that of i in sir^ pronounced with the lips
rounded, and is longer in some words than in others.
As fmuy fire ; Hexir, floiver ; oeuf, egg.
In all parts of the verb avoir, to have, eu has the sound of u.
ou has the sound of oo in moon. As jour, day,
oi has nearly the sound of wah ; more correctly, it is
a combination of French ou and medium a. As moi,
me ; roi, king. Be careful not to get a sound resembling
a in the English word ball,
08 has the sound of oi in moelle and po8Ie.
Introduction
In all other diphthongs the first vowel is pronounced
quickly and the voice dwells on the second. As ciel,
heaven; Dieu, God; hruit, noise ; oui, yes ; juin, June.
Distinguish carefully between ou-i and u-i, the latter
being a combination of French u and I. As puis (ptl-i),
then ; huile, oil. C'est lui, it is he; but c'est Louis, it
is Louis,
Nasal Vowels
m and n, when final or before a consonant, lose their
value as consonants and form with the preceding vowel
a nasal sound which is a true vowel. These sounds
have no exact equivalents in English; and in pronoun-
cing them, care must be taken that no consonant m, w,
or n^, be heard.
They are divided into four groups :
an'
- am . '
I, y= an ID. want,
en
em^
As dans, in ; lampe, lamp ; enfant, child ; empire,
empire; grand, large.
En is silent in the ending of the third person plural
of all verbs. As lis donneut, they give.
in^
im
ain
II. aim
ein
yn
ym.
As vin, wine ; important, important ; pain, bread ;
faim, hunger ; sein, breast; syntaze, syntax; symbole,
symbol.
= aw in bank, not too flat.
Pronunciation %
En = in in examen, examination, europden, European. Some pro-
nounce en in h3rmen like in, but the best authorities favor -ene
(hymeue).
-ien final or in the verbs tenir, to hold, and venir, to come, = i-in
(French i followed by nasal in). As bien, (bi-in), icell ; rien, nothing;
tiens, hold ; viens, come.
oin )
. > = ou followed by nasal in. As coin (cou-in), corner; loin,
^ far; moins, less; 'poin.g, fist,
III. { = on in donH,
om)
As bon, good ; ponton, pontoon ; nova, name ; non, no.
un 1
IV. um \ = a slightly rounded unaccented French e
eiinj (see p. 3), nasalized.
As un, one ; bnin, brown ; parfum, perfume ; k jeun,
fasting.
Final -um in album, rhum, geranium, medium, maximum, etc., is
pronounced like om in homme, comme.
Vowels are not nasalized before double n or double m,
nor before n or m followed by a vowel or h mute. As
bonne (fern.), good ; ^me, soul ; une (fern.), one ; pomme,
apple ; ennemi, enemy ; inhumain, inhuman ; europeenne,
(fern.) European,
But the nasal sound is heard in ennui and its derivatives, and in
all words beginning with emm-, as emmener, to lead away ; also in
enivrer, to intoxicate.
Consonants
Final consonants are generally silent, except o, f, 1, r.
Otherwise they usually have the same sound as in Eng-
lish. As sec, dry ; chef, chief; sel, salt ; mer, sea.
o before e, i, y, or with the cedilla (g) has the sound
of s. As oeoi, this ; citer, to quote ; gargon, boy ; legon,
8 Introduction
lesson ; regu, received. Otherwise it has the sound of k.
As car, ybr; cou, neck; avec, with; lac, lake; ^chec,
check (in chess).
Verbs ending in -cer and -cevoir preserve the s sound of c by the
use of the cedilla (c). recevoir, to receive : il recut, he received ; com-
mencer, to begin : commenqant, beginning ; commencons, let us begin.
c final is silent after n (as blanc, white ; franc, frank), and in
accroc, broc, clerc, eric, echecs (chess), escroc, estomac, lacs, raccroc,
tabac. c of done is heard in the announcement of a conclusion
or before a vowel. It has the sound of hard g in second and its
derivatives.
ch has the sound of ch in machine. As chat, cat ;
chercher, to seek ; chirurgien, surgeon ; architecte, archi-
tect ; chim^re, chimera.
oh before a consonant, and usually in words derived from the
Greek, has the sound of k. As yacht (iak), orchestre, orchestra;
chcBVLT, choir ; Christ, Christ; chr6tien, Christian; hcho, echo; chaos
(ka-o), chaos. It is silent in almanach.
d final is sounded in proper names (as Dayid) and in sud, south.
It is silent in poids, weight.
f final is silent in clef, key, cerf, stag, chef-d-oeuvre ; and also in
the plurals boeufs, oxen, oeufs, eggs, nerfs, nerves, though heard in
the singulars boBuf, osuf, nerf. In neaf, nine, i is silent before a
consonant, and has the sound of v before a vowel or h mute.
g before e, i, and y, has the sound of s in pleasure ;
before a, o, and u, the sound of ^ in gag. As gingembre,
ginger J gage, pledge, g is silent in doigt, finger ; sang,
hlood ; vingt, twenty ; legs, legacy.
Verbs ending in -ger insert e after g before a or o, to keep the
zh quality throughout the verb. The e has no value except to
modify the sound of g. As manger, to eat : mangeant, eating ; pro-
t^ger, to protect : protegeons, let us protect.
gn sounds like gn in mignonette. As agneau, lamb^ montagne,
mountain ; magnifique, magnijicent.
h is not heard in pronunciation. It is called mute
Pronunciation 9
(h muette) when the final vowel of the preceding word
may be elided before it, or when the final consonant of
the preceding word may be carried over to it in pronun-
ciation ; otherwise, it is called aspirate (h aspir^e). As
I'homme, the man, and les hommes, the men; but le h^roa.
the hero, and les h^ros, the heroes.
If the -8 of les in les li6ro8 were carried over it would sound like
les z6ros, the zeros.
Whether the h is mute or aspirate cau be learned only by obser-
vation and practice. The following are among the most usual
words in which the h is aspirate : la hache, the axe ; la haie, the
hedge ; la haine, hate ; une halle, a market-place ; les hardes, the
clothes ; les haricots, the leans ; le hasard, the chance ; la hate, haste ;
le haut, the summit ; le h§ro8, the hero (but Th^rome, rh6roisme) ; la
honte, the shame; le Hfivre, Havre ; la Haye, the Hague ; la Hollande,
Holland ; le huit, the eight (but mute in dix-huit and vingt-huit).
j has the sound of s in pleasure. As jour, day ; joli,
pretty ; jambe, leg ; joindre, to join,
ill, not initial, and sometimes il when final, form the
so-called liquid 1 (1 mouill^e), with nearly the sound of y
in yes. As soleil, sun ; fille, daughter,
A vowel standing before the liquid 1 does not form a
diphthong with the i, but retains its own sound ; ue and
oe have then the sound of eu. As paille, straw ; feuille,
leaf ; orQVieil, pride ; ceil, eye.
There is no liquid sound in il, avril, exil, vil, fll, mil, civil, profil,
p6ril, nil, Achille, Lille, pupille, distiller, vaciller, osciller, mille, ville,
village, tranquille. Of the exceptions containing ill, the last four
are of most frequent occurrence.
1 is silent in baril, chenil, coutil, fils (s is sounded), fusil, gentil,
gril, outil, persil, pouls, so^, sourcil.
1 is heard in calme, calm.
m and n, if the preceding vowel is not nasal, have the
same sound as in English, m is silent in damner and
its compounds and in automne.
10 Introduction
p IS silent in baptSme, compte, corps, dompter, exempt, temps,
sculpter, sept, and their compounds. It is sounded in septembre,
September^ and in psaume, psalm, ph has the sound of f.
qu has the sound of k. As qui, who ; quality, quality.
Final q of cinq, Jive, is sounded, except before a consonant or
aspirate b. q is heard in coq, cock, but silent in coq d'Inde, turkey-
gobbler.
In aquarelle, equateur, Equation, loquace, quadrupede, quartz, and
a few other words qu has the same sound as in English.
r is articulated much more distinctly than in English.
As rue, street ; riviere, river,
r final is sounded when preceded by a, i, o, u (as car,
for ; finir, to finish ; dur, hard), in monosyllables ending
in -er (as fer, iron), and in amer, hitter ; cuiller,^ spoon ;
enfer, hell ; fier, pi^oud ; hier, yesterday ; I'hiver, ivinter.
In other words final -er is sounded like 6. As parler,
to speak ; dernier, last ^ premiei,^ first ; l^ger, light.
Both r's are distinctly sounded in the future and conditional
tenses of acqu^rir, courir, and mourir, to distinguish them from the
other forms with a single r. As nous courons, we run ; nous courrons
we shall run. It is always silent in monsieur, pronounced m''sieu.
s between two vowels has the sound of s in please. As
voisin, neighbor ; base, base ; ^eraser, to crush.
Except in parasol, d6su6tude, and in compound words, where s
retains the hissing sound of its simple form. As pr6seance, prece-
dence, vraisemblable, likely.
Otherwise it has the sound of s in sister. As sensa-
tion, sensation ; prisme, prism / h^roisme, heroism.
Except in transaction, transalpin, transie^er, transit, transitif,
transition, balsamine, and Alsace, in which it has the sound of z.
s final is silent except in albinos, aloes, angelus, as, atlas, bis,
blocus, cens, eborus, dervis, en sus, fils, flores^ Gil Slas, gratis, belas,
1 Look out for French u in this word.
* Notice that the first e in this word is like e in English th{e) man.
Pronunciation 11
Iris, jadis, laps, lis (though generally silent in fleur-de-lis), mais, mars,
mcBurs, obus, ours, r^bus, Eheims, rhinoceros, Saint-Gaudens (Fr. nasal
in s), sinus, sens (but sen(s) commun), tons (when used without a
noun), us, vis, and in Greek and Latin names, as V6nus. In the
singular os, bone, the 8 is generally heard, but not in the plural : un os
(short o) ; des os, pronounced like des eauz.
In Jesus, the final 8 is sometimes heard, and in le Christ both 8 and
t are pronounced ; but in Jesus-Christ the s of J68U8 and st of Christ
are silent.
t usually sounds as in tutor. It has the hissing sound
of s iu the combinations -tion, -tial, -tiel, -tieux, and in a
few words ending in -tie, which in English end in -cy.
As situation, situation ; partiality, partiality ; essentiel,
essential ; factieux, factious ; d^mocratie, democracy.
Also in balbutier, initier, patience, ineptie, minutie, sati6t6 (first
t), and in proper names ending in -tien ; as un Venitien, a Venetian.
In the imperfect indicative and present subjunctive of verbs, or
when preceded by s, t retains its hard sound. As nous partions,
question. Also in moitie, half, bonnetier, Poitiers, galimatias, chr^tien^
Claretie.
th always has the sound of t. As theatre, theatre;
th6j tea.
t final is silent, except in brut, but, chut, dot, deficit, est, east, fat,
granit, lest, mat, net, ouest, and most words ending in -ct. In sept
and huit, the t is mute only before a noun or adjective beginning with
a consonant ; as dans huit jours. In vingt, t is always mute except
in the numbers 21 to 29 inclusive.
w occurs only in a few words of foreign origin, such as tramway
(pron. as in English), whist (pron. ouist), wagon (pron. vagou).
X usually has the sound of ks. As luxe, luxury ;
auxiliaire, auxiliary, ex- initial and followed by a vowel
or h mute has the sound of yz. As exil, exile ; examen,
(en = nasal in), examination ; exemple^ example. In
exception, x^=:ks.
12
Introduction
It has the sound of ss in Bruxelles, soizante, siz, and diz; but the
Z of siz or diz is silent before a consonant, and sounds like z before
a vowel or h mute. It has the sound of z in deuzieme, sizidme,
dizieme, diz-huit, diz-neuf .
Division of Syllables
In the body of a word each syllable must if possible
begin with a consonant ; as mo-ra-li-t^, a-ma-bi-li-t^.
If there are two consonants the division usually takes
place between the two ; as hom-me, vil-le, par-tir, en-
ten-du. But if the second is 1 or r (and the first is
neither 1 nor r), or if the two are gn, the division takes
place before the two ; as ^-glise, ta-bleau, no-tre, ^-crire,
vi-gne.
As h is never heard in pronunciation, the consonant
which precedes it is always carried, in speaking, to the
following vowel ; as i-nhu-main, i-nha-bi-t^.
The compound consonant z ( = ks or ga) always goes with the
preceding vowel ; as ez-il.
"Words for Practice
quatre
tr^s
robe
papa
t§te
mode
Canada
je
^cole
table
de
or
bl^mer
venir
fort
ananas
dame
bote
pas
arbre
oter
classe
samedi
rue
passer
nez
plu3
^t^
pied
gai
v^rit^
objet
pays
repet^
secret
puis
p^re
ici
appuyer
pr^s
midi
cou
Words for Practice
13
bout
enfant
avec
eau
jambe
blanc
fl^au
vin
gage
hair
pain
second
je hais
main
garQon
hai'ssaut
bien
general
paille
rien
niangea
tailleur
le sien
rossignol
ceil
moyen
science
leur
juin
patience
demeure
on
le tien
eu ^ Parts
bonbon
question
feus y of
grognon
nation
j'eussej avoir
brun
soleil
roi
lundi
meilleur
soif
humble
grand
album
Exceptions, similarities,
etc.
k
votre
sais
a
le votre
ses
as
non
ces
la
nom
mes
14
un
mais
ou
une
mais
aoUt
bon
au
soi
bonne
eau
soie
rien
bout
sois
reine
but
et
plein
butte
est (is)
pleine
des
est (east)
faim
d^s
mer
femme
pr^
m^re
examen
pr^s
14
Introduction
pr^s
villageois
tabac
lui
gentil
estomac
Louis
gentille
net
cou
le haut
nette
coup
Peau
clef
moi
la hauteur
cl^
mois
I'auteur
chef
moins
les hauteurs
chef-d'oeuvre
moine
les auteurs
oeuf
sel
la haine
oeufs
selle
laine
boeuf
celle
le h^ros
boeufs
on
I'hero'ine
coeur
an
les heros
choeur
ane
les z^ros
soeur
mil
le huit
je donnai
mille
lui
je donnais
fils
tache
tous (adj.)
fil
t^che
tons (pron.)
fille
ennemi
J^sus
ville
ennui
Christ
village
lac
J^sus-Christ
The Liuking of Words (La Liaison).
The last consonant of a word, standing before a
word beginning with a vowel or h mute and closely con-
nected with it in sense, is often carried over to it in
pronunciation.
In such cases s and x have the sound of z, d that of t, c
and g that of k, and f that of v. As mes^amis, ils^ont,
aux^armes, grand^omme, avec^elle, rang_^lev^. In
carrying bver the n of a nasal, the sound of the nasal
must be retained, and the n sounds as if it were the first
Linking of Words 15
letter of the following word : mbn enfant = mon nenf ant ;
un homme = un nhomme.
This linking of words, called liaison, is necessary in public speaking
or reading; in conversation it generally takes place only when the
words thus joined cannot do without each other. It cannot occur
before oui, onze, or onzieme. The t of at is never linked to the
following word.
P'inal m, n, p, or r of a noun is not usually carried over. Beyond
certain general principles, it is impossible to lay down rules. In read-
ing, the number of liaisons will vary, according to the style of the
composition, the shades of thought, pauses, euphony, and the taste of
the reader.
Examples of Liaison
Ce petit^enfant est tr^s^aimable, This little child is
very lovable,
Leurs^amis ne sont pas_encore arrives, Their fHends
have not arrived yet.
Quels jours^heureux ! What happy days !
Que dit^on ? What do they say ?
Quand^avez-vous^^t^ chez^eux ? When were you at
their house ?
Je les^ai vus de temps^en temps, / saw them from
time to time.
Ca m'est^egal, That makes no difference to me.
Elle repond^a ses question s_amusantes, She answers
his amusing questions.
Ils^aiment^a lire et k ecrire, They like to read and
write.
II a beaucoup^^tudie, He has studied a great deal,
Elle est bien_heureuse, tout^heureuse, She is very
happy ^ quite happy.
Capital Letters
Except at the beginning of a sentence, capital letters,
lettres majuscules, are not used for the names of the
16 Introduction
months and of the days of the week : as avril, lundi ; for
any word used as an adjective: as un officier fran5ais ;
for any word used to signify rank or position : as
empereur, roi^ duo, g^ndral, cardinal^ docteur, abbd,
maire, etc.
Punctuation Marks
The following are the marks of punctuation most
frequently used :
le point • le point d' exclamation !
la virgule , le tiret —
le point (et) virgule ; la par enthuse ( )
lea deux points : lea guillemets '^ "
le point d'interrogation ? les points suspensifs
Expressions for Class-room Use 17
EXPRESSIONS FOR CLASS-ROOM USE
1 Monsieur (M.), Sir^ Mr,
2 Madame (Mme.), Madam, Mrs.
3 Mademoiselle (Mile.), Miss,
Bon jour, Good morning, good day.
^5 Bo^i soir. Good evening, good night.
An i(^.vmT)'v:(7hr)d-h?ip. (until I have the ^^\
' u plaisir.J pleasure of seeing you again) J
8 A Remain, Good-bye until to-morrow.
9 A ce soir, Good-bye until this evening,
10 Que.fiigai££ ? Xwhat does-— mean? '
1 Qu e veut di re ?; -
12 Comment dit-on ? How doe^ one {do you) say
X — ? '
^13 Comment ^crit-on ? How does one {do you)
/ write ?
f 14 Ecrivez, Write,^ •
"^.15 En anglais, In English.
16 En franqais, In French,
' / 17 Comment epelle-t-on ? How does one (do you)
y/ ^ spell ?
.18 Epelez, Spell,
/^ 19 Comment prononce-t-on ? How does one {do you)
/ pronounce ?
20 Prononcez apv^s raoi, Pronounce after me*
/21 Lisez, Read,
/^22 Lisez le fr^nqais, Read the French.
^23 S'il vous plait, Please ; if ?/ou jjle ase*
i ^jbM^I? Wh at (did you said Tl
1 With capital letters, accents are regilTarly omitted.
2 Forms ending in -ez without the subject vous, yow, are all imperatives.
To make any of tliem negative, put ne before and pas directly after
2
iuc^Qu
What?
'ardon, I beg (ijouv) pardo7u
QVoX^Thank you.
]2^^ Pf^'i^ ^^ qnni^ ^You are welcome; donH mert^\
ie n'est,4iaa,la42eine,/^io/i IL (In response to thanks.) /
epetez, Repeat, ^
epetez ensemble, Repeat together,
Traduisez, Translate,
Conjuguez, Conjugate,
Repondez, Answer,
Fermez les livres, Close the {your) hooks,
Ouvrez les livres, Open the books,
Commencez, Begin,
Continuez, Continue*
Ecoutez, Listen,
A tf-.P jidez^ Wait,
41 Faites attention! Pay (lit., make) attention!
42 Comprenez-vous, Do you understand?
43 Oui, monsieur, je comprends, Yes^ sir, I understand,
44 Kon, mad am e, je ne comprends pas, No, madam, I
do not zinderstand,
45 Je ne sais pas, / do not know.
46 N'est-ce pas ? Is it not ? ^
47 Vous comprenez, n'est-ce pas ? You understand^ do
you not ?
48 lifiyez la main, Raise your hand,
49 Ceci, this {thing); cela, that (thing),
50 Qu'est-ce? \
51 Qu'est-ce que c^est ? ,'- What is that ?
52 Qu*est-ce que e'est que cela ? j
1 The explanation of the use of n'est-ce pas? instead of the repetition of
a statement in the form of a negative question, is left to the teacher: You
do, do you not? He has, has he notf They will^ mil they not T etc., in
English, but always n*est-ce pas in French,
\ I-
Expressions for Class-room Use
1^
53 C'est un (une) , It is a (or an) ,
54 Le mot, The word.
55 La phrase, The sentence. ""^ -'
56 Quelle leqon ? Wliat lesson?
51 Quelle page ? What page ?
5^ Au haut \ (At the top 'J
59 Au milieu j-de la page, \ In the middled of the page.
CO Au bas J l^^ the foot J
ul Ajoutez, Add.
62 Quelle faute ? What mistake ?
63 Corrigez, Correct.
64 Avez-vous quelque chose k ajouter ? Have you any-
thing to add ?
65 Y a-t-il encore quelque chose a corriger ? Is there
anything else to correct ?
66 Est-il periuis de dire ? May one say ?
67 II f aut , We need .
68 Faut-il ? Do you need ?
69 II faut ajouter , We must add: •'
70 II doit etre, It should he.
71 II doit y avoir, There should he.
72 Au lieu de, InstM.d. o f. ^
"16 Vouiez-vousr Uo you wish? (followed by an infini
tive, Will you ?)
74 Allez au tableau (noir), Go to the hla^ikhoard.
15 Ecrivez sur le tableau, Write on the hoard. ^> ^ ^ /
76 lueveZ'YOus, Eise, stand 2^^. . Jt--^ i / ( C\ H
77 Asseyez-vous, Be seated. Q^ ^^^CT^pi^^^^J^ VJ J^
78 Ramassez, Pick up, gather upyXoUect.
79 C'est assez. That is enough.
80 Cela suffit, That will do.
EXERCISES
There are only two genders in French, the masculine
and the feminine.^
Before a noun masculine use un for a or an, use le
for the.
Before a noun feminine use une for a or an, use la
for the.
Before a vowel or h mute use T instead of le or la.
le pdre, the father. un homme, a man.
la mdre, the mother, une femine) a woman, a wife.
un frdre, a brother, un ami
une sceur, a sister. une amie '
le fils, the son. I'enfant (m. or f), the child,
la fllle, the daughter, et, and.
ia friend.
1. Un p^re, une mere. 2. Une m^re et un fils. 3. Un
fils et une fiUe. 4. Le frere, la soeur. 5. L'homme et
la femme. 6. Un frere et un ami. 7. La soeur et Tamie.
8. Une femme et un enfant. 9. Le p^re, la mfere et
I'enfant. 10. L'homme, le fils et la fille.
1. A mother, a daughter. 2. A father and a son. 3. A
son and a mother. 4. The father and the mother. 5. The
brother, the friend (m.), the child, the sister. 6. The
man, the Woman, the friend (f .), the son. 7. The brother
and a friend. 8. The daughter and a friend (f .). 9. A
man and a child. 10. The woman and the child.
1 When learning a French noun, pupils should acquire with it an article
denoting the gender.
21
22 Present Indicative of Avoir
2
The e of je (/) is omitted when the following verb
begins with a vowel, and an apostrophe takes its place.
je, /. ai, have, j*ai, I have.
Avoir, to have.
Present Indicative, Affirmative.
j*ai, / have, nous avons, we have,
tu as, thou hast, vous avez, you have}-
il a, he has. ils ont, they (m.) have,
elle a, she has, elles ont, they (f.) have,
1. J'ai un fr^re. 2. L'homme a uue femme. 3. Tu
as un ami. 4. L'enfant a une soeur. 5. Kous avons un
p^re et une mere. 6. Elle a une amie. 7. Ils ont un
enfant. 8. Vous avez une m^re, une soeur et un fr^re.
9. J'ai un ami. 10. II a un fils et une fille.
1. I have a sister. 2. We have a friend. 3. They
have a mother. 4. The child has a brother and a sister.
5. The woman has a friend (f.). 6. You have a father
and a brother. 7. The man has a son and a daughter.
8. They (f.) have a father and a mother. 9. She has a
sister. 10. He has a friend, and the friend has a brother.
3
(1) In a question, if the subject is a personal pronoun,
it stands after the verb and is connected with it by a
hyphen: ai-je, have I? ont-ils, have they?
(2) When the third person singular ends in a vowel,
it is followed for the sake of euphony by -t- before il or
elle : a-t-il, has he ?
1 Vous, like the English you, may be either singular or plural. Tu is
the familiar form, and is used among members of the same family, intimate
friends, among and to children, to animals, etc. Use vous for you in thes«
exercises, unless otherwise indicated.
Present Indicative of Avoir 23
Avoir. — Present Indicative, Interrogative.
ai-je, have If avons-nous, have wet
as-tu, hast thou f avez-vous, have you f
a-t-il, has hef ont-ilg, have they (m.) ?
a-t-elle, has she ? ont-elles, have they (f.) ?
le livre, the hook. vu, seen (past part.),
une grammaire, a grammar, perdu, lost (past part.).
UD crayon, a pencil. qui 1 who f
une plume, a pen. oui, yes.
le papier, the paper. ou, or.
Tencre (f), the ink. aussi, also, too.
I'eau (f.), the water. lk,i there.
qu'aves-TOUS Ik, what have you there f
qu'a-t-il perdu, what has he lost f
1. Avez-vous un frere ou une scEur ? 2. J*ai un frere et
une soeur. 3. A-t-il perdu le crayon ? 4. 11 a perdu le
crayon et le papier. 5. Ai-je une grammaire ? 6. Oui,
monsieur, vous avez une grammaire. 7. A-t-elle vu
le fils ? 8. Oui, mademoiselle, elle a vu le fils et elle
aaussi vu la fille. 9. Ont-ils un enfant? 10. lis ont
un fils. 11. Qu'avez-vous la ? 12, J'ai I'eau et Pencre.
13. Qui a un crayon ? 14. Qu'a-t-il vu ? 15. II a vu
une grammaire et une plume.
1. She has a sister and a brother. 2. We have seen
the paper and the pen. 3. They have the water and
the ink, 4. She has a book. 5. She has also a pen.
6. Have you a grammar ? ^ 7. Have you lost a pencil ?
8. What have you there ? 9. Who has lost a pen ?
10. Who has the paper ? 11. What have you lost ?
12. W^hat has she seen ? 13. Have I a pen or a pencil ?
14. Who has seen the ink ?
1 Pronounced like la, the. See Introdaction, page 1.
2 For use of the numerous questions in the English exercises of this book,
see Editor's Preface.
24 Agreement of Adjectives
4
An adjective always agrees in gender with the noun
which it qualifies. To form the feminine of most
adjectives, add e to the masculine.
Adjectives ending in e mute in the masculine do not
change in the feminine.
Etre, to be.
Present Indicative, Affirmative.
je snis, / am. nous sommes, we are,
tu es, thou art. vous §tes, you are,
il est, he is. ils sont, they (m.) are,
eUe est, she is, . eUes sont, they (f.) are,
petit (m.), petite (f.), little, small, short.
grand (m.), grande (f.), large, tall, great,
bon (m.), bonne (f.), good, kind,
mauvais (m.), manvaise (f.)i bad,
riohe, rich. facUe, easy. jeiine, young,
panvre, poor. difficUe, difficult. trds, very,
la lettre, tlie letter. 6crit, written,
1, Le crayon est bon, la pUirae est mauvaise. 2. Le
p^re est errand, la fille est petite. 3. La gramraaire est
tr^s difficile. 4. II a une plume, la plume est bonne.
5. Le fils a perdu un petit livre. S. Je suis grand, tu es
petit. 7. Qui est jeune ? 8. Le fils est jeune, et la fille
est jeane aussi. 9. II est bon, elle est bonne. 10. Le
fr^re est riche, la soeur est tres pauvre. 11. J'ai vu un
jeune homme, il est tr^s riche. 12. Le jeune homme a
dcrit une tr^s bonne lettre.
1. The good pencil, the bad pen. 2. The ink is very
bad, the water is good. 3. The man has a good son.
4. Has he also a good daughter ? 5. Has she lost a
small pencil ? 6. Who has lost a large book ? 7. The
father is very kind, the mother is also very kind. 8. 1
Present Indicative of JEtre 25
have lost a small grammar. 9. You are very kind.
lOjbShe has written a letter, the letter is very good.
11. The brother is young, and the sister is young too.
12. The mother is tall, the daughter is short. 13. The
grammar is difficult. 14. They have a friend, she is
very rich. 15. The pen is good, the paper is poor (bad).*
5
(1) When the nominative it stands for a masculine
noun (such as crayon), it is expressed by il ; when it
stands for a feminine noun (such as plume), by elle.
J'ai un crayon, il est bon, I have a pencil, it is a good one.
II a une grammaire, elle est difficile, he has a grammar, it is difficult.
(2) In a question, if the subject of the verb is a noun,
the noun usually stands before the verb and is repeated
after the verb in the form of a pronoun.
L'homme est-il riche, is the man rich ?
Etre. — Present Indicative, Interbogativb.
8uis-je, am /? sommes-nous 1
es-tu ? Stes-vous %
est-il 1 sont-ils 1
est-elle % sont-elles I
1. J'ai vu le livre, il est petit. 2. L'enfant a-t-il
I'encre ? 3. L'homme a-t-il une femme ? 4. La femme
est-elle riche ? 5. Nous avons vu I'encre, elle est mau-
vaise. 6. Vous avez un crayon ; est-il bon ou mauvais ?
7. La grammaire est-elle facile ou difficile ? 8. L'enfant
est-il jeune ? 9. L'ami est-il riche ? 10. L'amie est-elle
grande ? 11. L'homme est-il grand ou petit ?
1. The woman has a son. 2. The son has a grammar.
3. The little child has a good father. 4. He has also a
1 English words in parentheses ( ) are to be expressed in French; those
in brackets [ ] are to be omitted.
26 Plural of Nouns
good mother. 5. The child has a sister. 6. Is the man
young ? 7. Is he poor or rich ? 8. Is the pencil#[a]
good [one] ? 9. Is the ink good or bad ? 10. Is the
grammar small ? 11. Is it easy or difficult ? 12. Has
the man a friend ? 13. Is the water good ? 14. What
have you written ? 15. Is the letter [a] good [one] ?
16. Are^ you tall or short ?
6
(1) Most nouns form their plural, as in English, by
adding s to the singular.
(2) The plural of all the forms of the definite article
(le, la, r) is les.
le frdre, the brother. les frdres, the brother 8»
la soBur, the sister. les soeurs, the sisters.
rami, the friend. les amis, the friends.
(3) The negation not is ordinarily expressed by ne
before the conjugated part of the verb and pas after it.
Je n'ai pas vu, / have not seen.
la maison, the house. ferm6, closed. \
la chambre, the room. trouv6, /own c?. p
la porta, the door. achate, bought. I
una fenetre, a window. pris, taken. ^^ ^^^P ®®'
une table, a table. ouvert, opened.]
une chaise, a chair. mais, but,
le tiroir, the drawer. non, no.
Avoir. — Present Indicative, Negative.
je n'ai pas, / have not, nous n'avons pas.
tn n'as pas. vous n'avez pas.
11 n'a pas. ils n'ont pas.
elle n'a pas. ellas n'ont pas.
1 Vous always takes a plural verb, but the adjective qualifying it is
plural only when more than one person is addressed.
n^
Possessive Adjectives 27
1. Avez-vous les grammaires ? 2. Je n'ai pas les gram-
maires, mais j'ai les crayons et le papier. 3. Nous
n'avons pas vu les maisons. 4. II n'a pas ferm^ les
fenetres, mais il a ferme les portes. 5. Ai-je pris la
plume ? 6. Vous n'avez pas pris la plume, mais vous
avez pris le crayon. 7. Avez-vous trouv^ les enfants ?
8. Qui a ouvert la fen^tre ? 9. Qui a achete les maisons ?
10. Qui a ecrit une lettre ? 11. Qu'avez-vous achete ?
12. Qu'avez-vous pris ? 13. Elle a ferm^ le tiroir.
1. They have bought the houses. 2. He has closed
the doors. 3. He has also closed the windows. 4. We
have not S3en the pencils. 5. The children have taken
the ink; they have not taken the water. 6. She has
found the children. 7. Has the man closed or opened
the windows ? 8. Have you taken the pens or the
pencils ? 9. Have they bought the tables and the
chairs ? 10. Have you bought the small or the large
pens ? 11. Have I the grammar ? 12. Have they
closed the books ? 13. Has the woman seen the rooms?
14. Has she taken the paper or the pen ? 15. What
have you closed ? 16. Who has opened the drawer ?
Possessive Adjectives.
Singular. Plural.
xnon (m.), ma (f.), met, mi/,
ton (ra.), ta (f.), tes, thy, your.
son (m.), sa (f.), ses, his, her, itt.
Dotre (m.), notre (f.), nos, our,
▼otre (m.), votre (f.), vos, your,
leur (m.), leur (f.), leurs, their.
In French, the possessive adjective agrees with the
thing possessed, and not, as in English, with the
possessor.
28 Possessive Adjectives
son pdre, his father, or her father, leur maison, their house,
sa mere, his mother, or her mother, leurs maisons, their houses.
Before a feminine word beginning with a vowel or h
mute, for the sake of euphony use mon, ton, son, instead
of ma, ta, sa.
mon ami, my friend (m.).
mon amie, my friend (f.).
son amie, his or her friend (f.).
Avoir. — Present Indicative, Negative Interroqativb.
n'ai-je pas, have I not ? n'avons-nous pas %
n'as-tu pas 1 n'avez-vons pas 1
n'a-t-il pas 1 n*ont-ils pas 1
n'a-t-elle pas 1 n'ont-elles pas 1
1. N'ai-je pas vu sa plume ? 2. Vous avez vu sa plume
et son crayon. 3. A-t-il pris mes crayons ? 4. Qu'avez-
vous trouv^ ? 5. J'ai trouv^ son encre, mais je n'ai
pas trouv^ sa plume. 6. N'a-t-il pas vu son amie ?
7. II a vu son amie et ses amis. 8. Qui a pris ma petite
grammaire ? 9. Ses filles sont grandes, mais ses fils sont
tres petits. 10. N'ont-ils pas mon livre ? 11. N'avez-
vous pas vu mes amis ? 12. Qui a vu leurs fils et leurs
filles ? 13. lis ont trouv^ nos crayons.
1. The men have not seen their sons. 2. Your friends
have seen my sister. 3. Her friend (f.) has bought the
little tables. 4. The woman has n't found her children.
5. Their mother has found their little sister. 6. Has
he not lost his books ? 7. Have you not opened my
drawer ? 8. Has she seen her father or her sister ?
9. Has n't the man closed our doors and our windows ?
10. Have I not seen your friend ? 11. My child, have
you (2nd sing,) lost my pencil ? 12. Have they lost
their pens or their pencils ? 13. Have we our gram-
mars ? 14. Have n't you seen their house ? 15. Who
has opened his windows ?
Agreement of Adjectives 29
n
8
\(1) An adjective always agrees in number, as well
aaviiA gender, with the noun which it qualifies.
]fi\ Most adjectives form their plural like nouns, by
s to the singular.
Singular. Plural.
bon (m). bona (ra.).
I bonne (f.). bonnes (f.).
(3) The sign 's of the English possessive is not used
in French. Turn such expressions as my brother's hook,
their father* s house, etc., into the book of my brother, the
Jioicse of their father, etc.
le livre de mon f rere, my brother*8 book,
la maison de leur p6re, their father's house.
utUe, usefuL . , , f amiable, lovable, kind,
. ,. aimaDle, < , , ,
joli, pretty. ypleasant, agreeable.
id, here. C wicked; (in speaking
pour, /or. ' l^of a child) naughty,
un, une, one. trois, three,
deux, two. quatre, ybur.
de, of, from.
Etre. — Present Indicative, Negative.
je ne suis pas, I am not. nous ne sommes pas.
tu n'es pas. vous n'etes pas.
■) il n'est pas. ils ne sont pas.
«J^ eUe n'est pas. elles ne sont pas.
\y •^TT Les trois enfants de mon frere sont tres aimables.
2}^ Les amis de votre fils sont-ils riches ? 3. Ses amis
ne sont pas riches, ils sont pauvres. 4. Les deux
maisons de sa soeur ne sont pas tr^s grandes, mais elles
sont tres jolies. 5. Les enfants ont-ils trouve les livres
de leur pere ? 6. Les plumes de ma soeur ne sont pas
bonnes ; elles sont mauvaises. 7. N'avez-vous pas vu
^i
30 Agreement of Adjectives
les quatre enfaats de votre ami ? 8. Sont-ils aimables ?
9. Sont-ils grands ? 10. Sont-ils jolis ? 11. Sont-ils
m^chants ? 12. Sa fille n'est pas jolie, mais elle est
bonne. 13. Ses deux livres ne sont-ils pas tres utiles ?
1. You have taken my brother's two pencils. 2. Your
father has bought the houses for your three brothers.
3. The houses are small, but they are very pretty.
4. His fraud's sisters are young. 5. They are very
kind, ^f Is your friend here ? 7. Who is here ?
8. Whois not here ? 9. Are your pens good [ones] ?
10. Are the children tall or short ? 11. Are they
naughty? 12. Has he taken the books ? 13. Have n't
the children closed their grammars ? 14. Has your
brother lost his pen ahd his jpencil ? 15. Has he lost
his books too ? 16. what has he lost ? 17, Have you
written three or four letters ?
M^ 9
^
(1) An adjective qualifying two or more nouns
masculine must be masculine plural.
(2) An adjective qualifying two or more nouns
feminine must be feminine plural.
(3) An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of
different genders must be masculine plural.
Etre. — Present Indicative, Negative Interrogative.
ne suis-je pas, am I not ? ne sommes-nous pas t
n'es-tu pas ? n'Stes-vous pas T
n'est-il pas 1 ne sont-ils pas ?
n'est-elle pas 1 ne sont-elles pas ?
malade, sick, ill. souvcnt, often.
gai, cheerful, merry. tou jours, always,
triste, sad. aujourd'hui, to-day.
hant, high, sur, ouy upon.
^ Ih^ The Conversational Past 31
^ I 1. Le p^re et le fils sont grands. 2. La maison est
^ /haute. 3. La mere et la fille sont petites. 4. EUes sont
y-ftoujours bonnes et aimables. 5. Nous avons vu les tables
< I et les chaises. 6. Sout-elles hautes ? 7. Le pere et la
\j mfere sont-ils bons ? 8. Les livres sont-ils sur la table
^ aujourd'hui ? 9. Ne sont-ils pas souvent sur la chaise ?
10. Vos amis ne sont-ils pas toujours gais ? 11. Us sont
i tristes aujourd'hui; ils sont malades. 12. N'est-il pas
ton frere ? 13. Les hommes ne sont-ils pas riches ?
14^Les quatre petites filles sont-elles souvent raechantes ?
is father and his brother are very tall, and he is
1 too. 2. His wife and his sister are always very
agreeable. 3.-His friends are not sad; they are very
cheerful. 4 Their trees and their houses are high.
5. Your brother's friend is ill to-day. 6. Are n't you
here often (often here) ? 7. Are you always here ?
8. Are you sad to-day ? 9. Am I not always cheerful ?
10. Who took (has taken) my books ? 11. Are n't they
on your table ? 12. Are my pens and my pencils good or /\-
bad ? 13. Is n't your grammar easy ? 14. Is n't the' J
book [a] useful [one] ? 15. Is he your friend ? 16. Am "jV
I not his friend ? \
!• \!^'
(1) The conversational past tense in French is the
perfect (past indefinite).
J'ai vu votre pdre hier, / taw your father yesterday.
II a perdu sa montre, he lost his watch.
(2) The auxiliary verb to do does not exist in
French. In translation, change the expressions did I
see, did he bicy, did you find, etc., into have I seen, has he
bought, have^^ou found, etc.
A-t-il perdu sa montre, did he lose his watch f
J
32 The Conversational Past
(3) The prepositions de and a, the definite article (le,
la, r. les,), and the possessive adjectives are repeated
before each noun to which they refer.
la poche, the pocket. mis, put. \
le mouchoir, the handkerchief, donne, given. J-P^
le canif , the penknife. parl^, spoken. ) Participles.
la montre, the watch. Mer, yesterday.
©11,1 where. k,i to, at.
quand, when, dans, tn, into,
k la maison, at home.
1. Les montres de notre pere et de notre mfere sont
jolies. 2. Ou etes-vous ? 3. Etes-vous sur la chaise ?
4. Etes-vous Gaston Foulquier ? 5. Je ne suis pas
Gaston Foulquier, je suis . 6. Votre frere a-t-il
perdu son canif hier ou aujourd'hui ? 7. 11 a perdu son
canif hier. 8. J'ai ^crit une lettre a mon frere et k ma
soeur. 9. Ou est votre mouchoir ? 10. II est dans ma
poche. 11. Quand ai-je vu votre grammaire ? 12. Vous
avez vu ma grammaire aujourd'hui. 13. Ou avez-vpus
mis mes livres ? 14. J'ai mis vos livres sur votre taole
ou sur une de vos chaises. 15. Mes crayons sont dans
le tiroir.
1. My brother has lost his pencil and penknife.
2. They are not on his table. 3. They are in his pocket.
4. She has lost her pretty little watch. 5. They have
often spoken to my friend and his brother. 6. She has
lost her brother's pencils and pens. 7. Where did she
find her handkerchief ? 8. Who took {has taken) my
ink ? 9. Who put my books on the table ? 10. Did
they speak of my brother and sister ? 11. Have you
your penknife to-day ? 12. Where is it ? 13. Is n^t it
1 Notice the accent which distinguishes k, fo, at, from a, has, and also
OU, where, from ou, or. The accent does not affect the pronunciation.
Numeral Adjectives
33
in your pocket ? QA/Are your father and mother here ?
16. Where are they ? 16% Did you write a letter to-day
or yesterday ? 17. Have you one, two, three, or four
pencils ? 18. Are they in your drawer ?
l'6eole (f.), the school,
I'^cole, at school,
r^glise (f.). the church,
^ k r^glise^a^ church,
p}the class.
11
cinq,^yc. huit, eight. ,
six, SIX. \ neuf, nine,
sept, seven, diz, ten,
nsonant of each of the above numerals is sflent before a
r h aspirate of a word which they multiply ; iu all other
lal consonant is sounded. The p of sept is always silent.
onze, eleven, donze, twelve,
r^leve (m. or f.), the pupil,
una salle, a room (a large room),
une salle de classe, a class-room,
assis (m.), assise (t), seated,
debout (adv.), standing,
H y a, there is, there are.
Y a-t-il 1 is there ? are there f
1. Son ami a trois crayons et huit plumes sur sa table.
2. II y a dix Aleves dans la classe de mou frere. 3. Je
' ne suis pas debout, je suis assis. 4. Louise est aussi
assise. 5, II y a neuf salles de classe dans cette ^cole.
6. Nous sommes a Tecole ; notre p^re et notre m^re sont
k la maison. 7. II y a sur ma table un canif, une plume,
deux crayons, six cahiers, et neuf grammaires. 8. Je
suis assis. 9. Mes ^l^J|ifc|^^e sont pas debout, ils
sont assis. 10. Y a-t-il^ux eleves dans cette classe ?
11. , Avez-vous ^crit sept ou huit lettres ? 12. ]£tes-vous
a I'eglise ou a I'ecole ?
1. The pupils are in the class-room. 2. The pupils
of my class are very tall. 3. His pupils are short.
8
^
34 Ordinal Numbers
4. There are ten books on my table. 5. The pupils
are not seated. 6. They are standing. 7. She is
seated. 8. They (f.) are seated. 9/^here is the
class ? 10. Where are you ? 11. Are^*y«kU at home or
at school ? 12. Who is standing ? 13. Are you my
pupils ? 14. Am I a pupil ? 15. Who am I ? M.'A.Te.
there six, eight, or ten books on the table ? IT^Is his
father at school ? 18. Where is he ? 19. Am^-^his
mother, where is, she to-day ? 20. Is she at church f^
12
\P^ premier (m.),) sixieme, si!rM.
premiere (l.),]-^^^ ' septieme, seventh,
J' deuxi^me, ^ huitidme, eighth,
S second, j^econd, neuvieme, ninth,
troisi^me, third. dixieme, tenth.
^ qvia,tTihm9, fourth, oniidme, eleventh,
cinqmhmet Jijlh, dooiiime, twelfth.
With the exception of premier (first) and second (second), an
ordinal number is formed by adding -i6me to the cardinal number. In
adding -i^me to form the ordinal, drop final -e of the cardinal, insert
u after q, and change f to y : quatre, quatridme ; cinq, cinqni^me ;
neuf, neuvi^me.
Before huit or huiti^me, anee, or onzi^me, 1* is never used for le or
la, and final consonants are never linked * la hnitiime le^pn ; la onzi-
kme porte ; les onze livres.
la le^on, the lesson. nn th^me, \^^ exercise.
la phrase, the sentence, un exercice, j
un mot, a word. nn cahier, a note-hook.
pr6par6, prepared (past part.).
1. Avez-vous ^crit le onzieme theme hier ? 2. ^ITous
avons ^crit le onzieme theme hier et le douzi^me aujour-
fd'hui. 3. La onzieme leQon est tres facile. 4. Y a-t-il
dix salles de classe dans son ecole ? 5. Mes el^ves ont
ecrit leurs phrases dans leurs cahiers. 6. II y a neuf
p
■ Contraction of the Definite Article 35
mots dans la cinquieme phrase. 7. Y a-t-il onze ou
douze eleves dans votre classe ? 8. Huit eleves sont
assis, et trois sont debout. 9. II a ecrit dix lettres a sa
m^re et six a son pere. 10. J'ai mis mes onze livres
sur votre table. 11. Qu'avez-vous ^crit aujourd'hui ?
12. II a vendu sept montres k ses amis. 13. 11 y a douze
phrases dans la onzieme leQon.
• 1. The eleventh lesson is an easy one. 2. The les-
sons are not often difficult. 3. No, they are always
very easy. 4. There are five letters in the word ^leve.
5. There are twelve pupils in his class. 6. Have yo^
written the eleventh exercise ? 7. Have you written the
twelfth to-day ? 8. Have you prepared your lesson ?
9. Who has written the sentences in his note-book ?
\ 10. Who wrote your exercises ? 11. Who has written
Y the first sentence ? 12. Who is standing ? 13. Have
N^ the pupils closed their grammars ? 14. Have they pre-
X pared their lesson ? ^
^ 13
Contraction of the preposition ^ and tjie definite
article ^ :
^ and le contract into au.
Jt and la do not contract, u la.
a and T do not contract, a W
k and les contract into aux.
an garqon, to the boy, k Tamie (f.) to the friend,
k Tonole, to the unch. k la tante, to the aunt,
aux m^decins, to the doctors,
{an before a masculine noun beginning with a consonant or
aspirate h,
kla before a feminine noun beginning with a consonant or
aspirate h,
k V before a masculine or feminine noun beginning with a
vowel or mute h»
anx before a plural noun.
86 Contraction of the Definite Article
le garcon, the boy. le medecin, the doctor,
I'oncle, fhe uncle. la famille, the family.
la tante, the aunt. pret^, lent. ^ p i.
le cousin, the cousin (m.). lu, read. L
la cousine, the cousin (f.). vendu, sold.j I*articiples.
le neven, the nephew. Jean, John.
la niece, the niece. Jeanne, Jane.
le voisin, the neighbor (m.). Louis, Louis.
la voisine, the neighbor (f.). Louise, Louise,
treize, thirteen. treizi^me, thirteenth.
1. Le neveu, bm neveu. 2. La niece, k la ni^ce.
3. Les garQons, aux garqons. 4. L'oncle, les oncles, h
Poiicle, aux oncles. 5. Aux medecins, aux amis, aux
amies. 6. II a pret^ ses livres au frere de mon voisin.
7. Mon ami a vendu une jolie maison k Poncle de sa
femme. 8. Avez-vous parl^ au neveu et k la ni^ce de
votre amie ? 9. J^ai parle a son fils et k sa fille.
10. Elle a donn^ un livre au medecin. 11. Qu'avez-vous
pret^ k I'ami de mon cousin? 12. II a vendu ses
maisons aux medecins. 13. Nous avons donn^ nos livres
et nos plumes aux enfants. 14. Le fils de mon oncle est
mon cousin, et sa fille est ma cousine.
For Oral DrilL 1. The boy, the friend (m.), th<
friend (f.), the family, the neighbors. 2. To the boy,,
to the friend (m.), to the friend (f.), to the family, to
the neighbors. 3. The man, to the man, the men, to the
men. 4. The woman, to the woman, the women, to the
women. 5. The brother, to the brother, the brothers,
Itto the brothers. 6. The father, the child, to the father,
to the child,
1. John and Louis nre my neighbor's children. 2. He
has written a letter to his son's friend. 3. She has
written to her friend's son. 4. They have spoken to the
^^-'^'
Contraction of the Definite Article 37
doctor. 5. She gave the boy her pens and pencils (Iter
pens and pencils to the boy), 6. He has often spoken to
his pupil's uncle and aunt. 7. Have we the twelfth or
thirteenth lesson to-day ? 8. Did your cousin sell his
house to his wife's father or brother ? 9. Did you give
or lend your books to my neighbor's children ? 10. Have
I seen your father and mother ? 11. Is Jane Louise's
sister or her cousin ? 12. Is your neighbor's family
a large one ? 13. Has he four or five children ? 14. Have
we written twelve or thirteen sentences ?
14J
Contraction of the preposition de and the definite
article ^ :
le and le contract into
de and la do not contract, de la.
de and 1' do not contract, de T.
and les contract into dea
dn fr^re, ofov from the brother, de rami, ^
de la soBur, o/or from the sister, de I'amie,/ ^^ ^^/^^"^ the friend.
des 61eves, of ov from the pupils.
le chapean, the hat, jou6, played.
I'habit (m.), the coat. re^u, received,
la robe, the dress. port^, carried, worn. I Past
une bague, a ring. apport^, brought, j Participles,
un cadeau, a gift, a present. 6te, taken off.
(^BXoTZQy fourteen. montrl, shown,
avec, with.
before a masculine noun beginning with a consonant, or
aspirate h. <4f*
de la before a. feminine noun beginning with a consonant or
aspirate h.
del' before a masculine or feminipe noun beginning with a
vowel or mute h,
des before a plural nouB
f .
So Contraction of the Definite Article
1. A-t-il parle au f rere ou au fils du medecin ? 2. Le
fils et la fille de notre voisin ont reQu une lettre de
leur oncle. 3. Jean a requ un cadeau de son* oticle.
4. Jeaii a requ un chapeau, et Louise a reQu une bague.
5. Un de mes eleves a ecrit quatorze phrases ; il n'a pas
V \ joue avec ses amis. 6. J'ai donne un habit au fils de la
s^V \ pauvre femme. 7. Mon voisin a apporte treize ou qua-
v^ ' W'ze livres aux enfants. 8. Qui a pris les livres des
\^ enfants ? 9. A-t-elle ^crit aux filles du medecin ?
^" 10. As-tu vu le chapeau du garqon ? 11. Avez-vous la
montre de la jeune fille ? 12. Les cahiers des eleves
\x sont sur la table. 13. Kos amis ne sont ,pas k I'^glise
aujourd'hui ; ils sont a la fnaiaon. / vi^' A
\\ t For Oral Driir 1r- TiiU licphew, the man, the ai
. the boys. 2. Of the nephew, of the man, of the aunt,
^ of the boys. 3. The friend (m.), the friend (f.), of the
< fnend (m.), of the friend (f.), the friends (m.), of the
friends (f.). 4. The boy, of the boy, to the boy, of
the boys, to the . boys. 5. The father, from the father,
"^ to the father. 6. The child, from the child, to the
oj child. 7. The children, from the children, to the
' 1. We have received a letter' from the doctor's son.
i 2. He has shown his exercises to his brother's friend.
3. The doctor has given his daughter a ring. 4. The
man's children have received a gift from the neighbors.
5. Our neighbor is a good woman. 6. Is the boy's hat on
the table ? 7. Did your father sell his house to the doc-
tor or to the doctor's neighbor? 8. Isn't the boy's
grammar easy ? 9. Have you written the first sentence
of the fourteenth lesson ? 10. Has he brought a letter
from his friend's father or from his father's friend?
Possessive Pronouns 39
11. Are the child's father and mother rich or poor?
12. Ha^ Jphn spoken to the woman's nephew or son ?
13. T>jJ-|-,v>^ h^y ^j^ i.io hat in the house ? '<^^. Did he
J!(JL^^ his hat offrn.5. Have my pupjls prepared their
J^^son o/have they played with their friends /\ Cc//V^
^^
Singular
-masculine. feminine.
le mien,
le tien,
le sien,
le notre,
la mienne,
la tienne,
la sienne,
la notre,
lessive Pronouns.
Plural /
masculine. feminine.
les miens,
uo
le votre, *. la votre,
le leur, la leur,
les miennes, mine,
les tiens, les tiennes, thine, youn,
les siens, les siennes, his, hers, its.
les notres, ours,
les votres, yours.
les leurs, theirs.
(1) Possessive pronouns, in French^^agree in gender
^^^^«ifd numter with the object posses^red, and not, as iu
English, wHb the possessor.
"^ Note carefullyvihe circumflexifccent that distinguishes
the possessive pro'himjis ndtre/^nd votre from the posses-
sive adjectives notre aHd votj?
In the senteuce Your penciljf^ good one, hut hers is a poor one,
Votre crayon est bon, mais Ife sieK^st mauvais, the pronoun le sien
is masculine singular, bec^fse- crayoflVjie noun which it represents,
is masculine singular, yf the sentenc^^cre is my watch ; where is
yours? Voici ma montM; oil est la votre r^e pronoun la votre is
feminine singular, hecMaQ the noun montre is\minine singular.
(2) ExpressiAs like a friend of mine^ hook of hers,
"etc., are in Fr^h, one of my friends, one oj\er looks, etc. :
I de mes amis, luie de me^ ami^
L de ses livresj
^a friend of mine,
a book ofhersy^
tn de mes amis, une de mei amlMi
An de ses livresj I ^
40 Possessive Pronouns
la boite, the box. la craie, the chalk. un encrier, an inkwell.
un porte-plume, a penholder. la regie, the rule, the ruler.
voici, here is, here are. voila, there is, there are. quinze, fifteen.
II y 2i^l:fm3:^is, or there are, sim^*^ makes a statement: II y a un
livre sur ma taBTe>£4^ ^-^ ^ ho^^on my table ; II y a dix eleves dans
cette salle, there are ten^ift^in this room. Voila points out an object
and answers the quMUfm^, whS?5^s^2^J^^®^® ^^®^ There is my book,
1. Voici mon livre ; oil est le votre ? 2. Voici le
mien, voila le votre. 3. Ou est la boite ? 4. Voila
la boite. 5» Ou est la craie ? 6. Voila la craie dans
la boite. 7. Oil est la bague? 8. Voila la bague sur la
table. 9. Voici mon porte-plume ; je n'ai pas trouve le
otre. 10. Voici le porte-plume ; ou est la plume ?
11. II y a quatorze ^l^ves dans ma classe. 12. Y a-t-il
aussi quatorze eleves dans la votre ? 13. Ou est la
classe ? 14. Voici la classe. 15. Ou est votre exer-
cice ? 16. Voici le mien, voili le sien. 17. VoiU un
de vos themes, , f ^^ , '-^v,
1. There are my books, pens, paper, ana ink. 2. Here
is a book o^ ^urs. 3. Here is the box^^z-^here i^. the
chalk ? A. It is on the table. 5. There is my pen-
holder. 6. John has seld ^ his' watch, and Jane has
lost^Kei^.^ 'Yf'^liere are-^^^'^^oors and Cuj^ Windows in
this (cette) room. 8. Hereare the doors. 9. There are
the windows. 10. Here is my pen ; where is yours ?
IL Where is his ? 12. I^^[]l^ /are my pencils ; where
are li^i^?^ 13. Where ure theiSr^' 14. Has he mine
or his [own] ? 15. Is , the ink-well on the chair ?
16. Where is it ? 17. Hstve you s^en a ruler' of mine ?
18. There is my kii>fe ; w^ere is^yoursj 19. Are your
pens good ? 20. Are mine good, too ? zl. We have
written our exercises ; have you written yours too ?
22. Where is the ink ? 23. Where is your friend ?
•//
Compctnsqii of Adjectives
41
16
Laraer, sTrimler, higmer, etc., are translated by mere
t^more small, moremigh, etc. : plus gprand, plus petit,
plu^haut.
Ma soBur est p^iAgrande que mon fr^re.
My sister is talh7\han my brother.
exception, better iaekpressed by meilleur.
plus, more,
moins, less.
^ que, than.
|eize, sixteen.
s-sept, seventeen.
r-huit, eighteen.
Notel
dix-nvuil nineteen.
un avoCBt, a lawyer,
un arbre, a tree,
une fleur, a flower.
dine feuille, a leaf {of a tree or of a book).
e elision of e in que {than) before a vowel : qu'un.
^Mon fr^re est plus petit que votre soeur. 2. Est-il
,^lus ou moins jeune qu'elle ? 3. Leurs arbres sont plus
hauts que ma maison. ^La lille de I'avocat est plus
jolie que la votre. 5. Les fleurs de Jeanne sont
plus jolies que les votres. /oj Votre plume est meilleure
ue la mienne, mais mon crayon est meilleur que le votre.
T^J'ai mis vos lettres et les siennes sur votre table.
II n'a pas trouve les siennes. (9^ La chambre de mon
rere est j)lus grande que la^jnienne, mais la mienne est
lus jolie que la sienne. dO. y a-t;il dix-neuf ou vingt
ots dans la neuvi^me phrase ? /ll^es phrases de la
linzi^me leqon sont-elles faciles ou difficiles ? 12. Nos
eglises sont plus hautes que les votres. (l3JUn avocat
est moins utile qu'un medecin.
1. We have seen the doctor's house. 2. It is taller
than his trees. 3. Your neighbor's trees are higher than
his house. 4. Your friend's nieces are prettier than
his daughters. 5. Your pens are smaller than mine.
42 Relative Pronoun
6. They are better too. 7. She has lost a leaf of her
note-book. 8. Where is your brother ? 9. Is he taller
than I (moi) ? 10. Is he not taller than you ? 11. Is
he younger ? 12. Have you your watch or his ?
13. Where is mine ? 14. Where is yours ? 15. Is
yours larger or smaller than mine ? 16. Is the six-
teenth lesson more or less difficult than the fifteenth ?
17.1s a doctor more or less useful than a lawyer?
18. Are the leaves of your trees very large ? 19. Are
your friends richer than we ? 20. Are they more agree-
able ? 21. Are his pencils better than yours ? 22. Are
the flowers more or less useful than the trees ?
17
(1) The nominative case of the relative pronoun
(who^ which, that) is qui, the objective case is que.^
L'homme qui est ici, the man who is here.
L'homme que vous avez vu, the man whom you saw,
(2) The relative is never omitted in French.
Le parapluie qu'il a perdu, the umbrella he lost.
Note elision of e in que before a vowel. The i of qui is never
dropped.
le jardin, the garden. le parapluie, the umbrella.
un banc, a bench. Iais36, left. "J
le pupitre, the desk. emprunt6, borrowed. I "ast^
la canne, the cane. rendu, given back, returned. I Participles,
si, so (before an adjective or adverb).
1. Nous avons vu une maison qui est tres haute; elle
est plus haute que la notre. 2. Le livre que vous avez
achate est plus utile que le mien. 3. J'ai trouve une
plume qui est tres mauvaise. ^. Mon pere a achete le
1 Which or that next the verb is qui ; separated from it, que.
Demonstrative Adjectives
43
jardin que vous avez vu. 5. Le livre qu'il a perdu est
le mien. 6. Oil a-t-elle laiss^ le livre qu'elle a rendu ?
7. II a emprunt^ ma canne. 8. Voila un joli petit para-
pluie que j'ai acbete pour vous. 9. Les arbres qui sont
dans son jardin sont plus hauts que ceux (those) qui
sont dans le mien. 10. II y a six bancs dans le jardin
de Tavocat. 11. J'ai deux bons amis ; lis sont si aima-
bles I 12. Les garqons qui sont ici aujourd'hui sont mes
cousins. 13. Sa femme a laiss^ son parapluie a P^glise.
// 1. We have seen the benches which the man has put
'into our garden. 2. We have found one sentence that
is difficult. 3. They are often very easy. 4. There is
the young man who gave a cane to my brother. 5. The
books which he has put on the desk are mine. 6. I
have lost my umbrella; have you lost yours ? 7. Have
you brought yours to school to-day ? 8. Is it a better
one than mine ? 9. Where is the pencil you borrowed?
10. Did you leave yours at home ? 11. Is n't an um-
brella more useful than a cane ? 12. Is the boy I saw
yesterday with you younger than you ? 13. His sister
ipt so tall; is she younger? 14. Is th'e exercise
iich*you have written easy or difficult? 15. Is a per!:
more useful than a pencil ? 16., Who has taken the
note-book she left on my table ?i
emonstrative Adjectives.
ce, cet (m.), w/its
cette (f.), /or that.
ces (m. and f. pi.), these, those.
form cet is used instead of ce before a masculine
adjective beginning with a vowel or h mute :
44 Demonstrative Adjectives
cet ami, this friend ; cet homme, that man ; ce jeime
homme, this or that young man.
Demonstrative adjectives, in French, must be repeated
before each noun which they modify.
Ou avez-vous vu cet homme et cette f emme \
Where did you see that man and woman ?
le chien, the dog. le chat, the cat,
1. Quand avez-vous achete cette table ? 2. Ce livre
est petit; il est plus petit que les livres qu'elle a mis
sur mon pupitre. ^. Cette eau est bonne, cette encre est
mauvaise. 4. Aye^-vous ouvert ces fenStres ? 5. J'ai
donne un cadeau a ce joli petit enfant. 6. Cet enfant
est le leur. /y. Jean a achete ces chaises. 8. Qui a
trouv^ ce chien ? 9. Qui a apporte cette encre ?
10. La fiUe de cet homme est notre araie. 11. Voici
ton chat, mon enfant, l^^e chat n'est-il pas joli?
13. Qui a achete cette maison ? 14. Ces hommes sont
nos amis. 15. Cet exercice est tres facile. Q^6. Cet
arbre est plus haut que le notre.
1. These books are yours. 2. We have seen this
child's father and mother. 3. Her father has bought
that large house. A. Those flowers are prettier than
yours. 5. The children found that dog and cat yester-
day. 6. Is this water good ? 7. Is n't this tree a tall
one ? (^8/Are n't the leaves of those trees pretty ?
9. This pen is mine ; where is his ? 10. These pencils
are yours ; where are mine ? 11. Did he receive this
letter from the doctor or the lawyer ? 12. Who opened
these doors and windows? 13. Is that man rich or poor?
14 Is that chalk good ? 15. Is it better than mine ?
/I6. Is this exercise easy or difficult ?
Demonstrative Fronouns 45
19
Demonstrative Pronouns.
Singular. Plural.
eelni (m.)^i^<^
*?--
25
'^ — \ Past Participles with Etre.
V (1) The past participle coming after any form of the
verb etre {to be) agrees in gender and number with the
subject. (For exception, see Lesson 67.)
(2) The following are the past participles that are
always used with etre instead of avoir.
all6, gone. arriv6, arrived.
parti, gone away, set out, left, entr6 (dans), entered, gone into.
sorti, gone'out, come out. rest6, remained, stayed.
venu, come. tomh6, fallen.
deveiiu» hecmne. ii6, horn.
revenu, returned , come hack, mort, died (adj. dead),
retourn6, returned, gone hack. d6c6d6, died (rarely used),
il y a (before a period of time), ago.
11 y a huit jours (une semaine), a week ago.
pas encore, not yet. le soir, the evening.
•nsemble, together. hier soir, last evening.
Londres, London.
1. Mes fr^res sont sortis. 2. Leurs soeurs sont parties
Y hier soir. 3. Son pere et sa mere sont morts. 4. La
-^ petite fille est tombee. 5. Quand est-elle nee ? 6. Elle
7 est nee en 1899. 7. Vos amis soiit-ils restes a la maison ?
Past Participles with Etre 55
8. Les enfants ne sont-ils pas venus ? 9. lis ne sont
pas encore arrives.^ 10. Mes Aleves sont de venus tr^s
grands. 11. EUes sont revenues ensemble. 12. Ou
sont-elles allees ? 13. EUes sont allies ^ Paris.
^4. Nous sommes entr6s dans la maison. 15. Nous
avons achet^ ces deux maisons blanches. 16. Je suis
n^ en 1869, et mon amie en 1868. 17. Napoleon est
mort 1»^ 5 mi£i, 1821.
Hereafter there will he found in many of the Lessons two exer-
cises for translation from English into French^ marked respectively
A and B, the latter consisting entirely of questions. For use of
these questions, see Preface,
(A) £ T^e letters arrived an hour ago. 2. Here is the
pencil that I bought. 3. Your friends went away Friday
morning, and ours Saturday evening. 4. His father and
mother went to Paris June 1st and returned on the 21st.
5. This family has bec ome ri ch. 6. John's pen is lost.
7. He has\ losT his pen-holder^too, 8. This man's
daughters have grown (become) very tall and have also
grown to be (become) very pretty and agreeable. 9. I
received a pretty little present last evening. 10. Two
men fell dead that morning^ 11. The leaves of these
trees have become yellow. 12. Our neighbors left a
week ago. 13. Two of our large trees have fallen.
14. His letters are not written yet.
(B) 1. Who has come ? 2. Did your sister go to
school to-day ? 3. Did you see the boys who came in ?
4. Have n't the pupils come into the class-room yet ?
5. Did you come to school yesterday or did you stay at
home ? 6. Did she come last Friday, the 11th ? 7. Have
your friends gone to London ? 8. Where did they go ?
1 Note the position of pas encore.
Personal Pronouns loith Prepositions
9. When did they leave ? 10. Did they set out to-
gether ? 11. Have you seen the house and gardens ?
Not yet. 12. Is his uncle dead ? 13. Is his aunt dead
also ? 14. Where and when did she die ? 15. Did
they (/.) go into the house ? 16. Is he out (gone out) ?
17. When were you born ? 18. Were you born in
Boston ? X Q.
The following are the forms of the personal pronouns
used with prepositions :
xnoi, me.
nons, us.
toi, thee^ you.
V0U8, you.
lui, him.
eox, them (m.).
eUe, her.
eUes, them (f.).
apr^s, after (time).
80US, under.
derridre, behind (place).
pres de, near.
avant, before (time).
malgr^, in spite of.
devant, before (place).
sans, without.
entre, between.
chez, at the house of.
1 Chez means also to the house of in the house of at the office or place
of business of
De is not used after chez or malgr6, but is used with prds
'■"'*>v v^^ chez le m^decin, at the doctor's.
\y^r^' malgre son pere, in spite of his father.
s.\ pres ^ nous, near us,
es enfants sont alles chez leur oncle. 2. lis ne sont
f^^pas rest^s chez eux. 3. Ne sont-ils pas encore revenus ?
p^^ 4. Tons les ^l^ves sont assis sur les bancs. 5. lis sont
derri^re les pupitres. 6. Cette femme est tres pauvre ;
toutes ses amies sont mortes avant elle. 7. Elles sont
sorties malgre moi. 8. lis sont venus a nous. 9. Vos
frferes sont arrives quinze minutes avant vous. 10. lis
sont arrives 11 y a una heure et demie. 11. Je suis
PersonoL Pronouns with Prepositions 57
devant la classe. 12. La classe est devant uioi. 13. Qui
es^erriere elles ? 14. Kotre ^cole est pr^s de I'eglise.
0)j\l. For them (m.), for them (/.). 2. Of me, of
hiniT^^S. Of you, of her. 4. At my house, at her house.
5. At his house, at our house. 6. At your house, at their
house. 7. At the lawyer's, at the doctor's. 8. She
came to our house without tliem and in spite of them.
9. He fell sick on Thursday morning and died before the
evening. 10. Our neighbors are not at home to-day ;
they went away last evening and have n't returned yet.
11, My father is at home ; he is not out. 12. We went
away after them and returned home before them.
13. After you, my friend. 14. He is standing by (near)
the tableTX 15. She is sitting near the door. 16. He
went away with them a quarter of an hour ago and came
back without them. 17. They did not come back to-
gether. 18. Have you seen the garden behind the
church ?
\(B)S 1. Where are you ? 2. Are you at home [express
twVways] ? 3. Where is the class ? 4. Is it in front of
me ? 5. Am I in front of the class ? 6. Is the table
behind me ? 7. Is it behind you {pL) ? 8. Am I near
the table ? 9. Where is the chair ? 10. Is the table
between the class and me? 11. Am I standing or seated ?
12. Where am I standing? 13. Is my grammar on the
table ? 14. Is the pencil on the grammar^ 15. Are
your brothers at the doctor's ? IS^-^ta. tfTey go to his
house together ? 17. Are they ill ? 18. Where are
they ? 19. Did you come into this room before or after
I did (after me) ? 20. Is she sitting in front of you ?
21. Am I standing behind you ? 22. Did you go out
without her?
<::>^-c2XL.<_ <3
58 The Adjective Tout_
27
The adjective tout always- precedes the article when
the latter is present, 'hf is not expressed after all in
French. ^
Tout, ally whole, every.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
tout (m.), toute (f.). tous (m.), toutes (f.).
tout homme, every man. tous les mois, every month,
toute femme, every woman. toutes les semaines, every week.
toute la maison, the whole house. tous les jours, every day.
tout le monde, everybody (lit., all tous les dimanches, every Sunday.
the world). tous les lundis, every Monday,
tous les hommes, all the men, all and so on for each day.
men. tous les ans, every year.
^ autre, other. '^ eu, had, ) past
^^.-''"^'^ m§me, same. 6t6, been, j participles.
After m§ine [same), as is expressed by que :
J'ai lu les monies livres que vous, / have read the same books as you.
1. Tous mes crayons soiit perdus, et toutes mes plumes
sont mauvaises. 2. Qui a apporte toutes ces fieurs ?
3. EUe a vu les memes livres et les monies encriers que
vous. 4. Qu'avez-vous cherch^ ? 5. J'ai cherche mon
encrier et mon porte-plume ; j'ai trouve mon encrier
chez lui, mais je n'ai pas encore trouve mon porte-plume.
6. Montrez-moi la fenetre. 7. Voil^ la fenStre ; elle est
pr^s de la porte. 8. Ont-ils lu les autres lettres ?
9. A-t-elle visits tout le jardin ? 10. II a ecrit une
lettre ^ sa mfere tous les jeudis. 11. Elle a rcQu une
lettre tous les lundis. 12. Tout le monde est ici au-
jourd'hui. 13. Tous les hommes qui sont ici sont mes
amis. 14. Donnez-moi les m§mes crayons.
1 Another is expressed in two ways in French : by encore un (or una))
an additional one; by un (une) autre, a different one. Encore une fois,
ftnce more ; une autre fois, some other time.
59
1. I have been^n all ^febe-^oms of that white house.
2. She has visited the whole house every week. 3. Her
uncle and aunt have not been at church to-day. 4. All of
their friends are dead. 5. Is the whole grammar useful ?
6. We have seen the same man as you. 7. When did
she write to her mother? 8. Did she write a letter
every day or every week? 9. She wrote every Friday.
JO.Jjj y f ? m o t he^ sam ebooks b ut the other pp.^s ,
11. Everybody is here. /T^ Where are the other pupils ?
13. He has prepared all 6fJliaJ»«5T5Bs"at home. 14. John
has left one of his books at home every day. 15. All of
Mary's dresses are pretty; they are prettier than her
sister's. 16. Bring us another umbrella [two meanings].
28
VERBS.
French verbs may be divided into four conjugations,
distinguished from each other by the termination of
the infinitive. The 1st ends in -er, the 2d in -ir, the 3d
in -oir, the 4th in -re.
In English, the present participle ends in -dug ; in
French, it ends in -ant. It is frequently used in Eng-
lish with the verb to he, but it is never so used in French.
Instead of saying / am speaking, we must in French
say / speak ; instead of / was speaking, I spoke ; instead
of / shall he speaking, I shall speak.
parlant, speaking.
L_ ; ' , [do you speak t
f I speak, ,
je parle, ^I do speak, parlez-yous, j
1/ am speaking.
r 1 . I are you speaking f
am speaking.
60 The First Conjugation
First Conjugation.
In the first conjugation, which contains the great
majority of French verbs, the infinitive ends in -er, and
the past participle in -^.
porter, to carry ; portant, carrying ; port§, carried.
Present Indicative.
TERMINATIONS I -6, -€8, -6, -0118, -€2, -Ollt.
AFFIRMATIVE. INTERROGATIVE.
je porte, J
/ carry, T am carrying, ( port6-je 1 ^
/ do carry. \ est-ce que je porte T
tu portes. portes-tu T
11 (eUe) porte. porte-t-il (eUe) 1 2
nous portons. portons-nous ?
vous portez. portez-vous 1
ils (eUes) portent. portent-ils (eUes) 1
NEGATIVE. NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE.
je ne porte pas. ( ne port6-je pas ?
tu ne portes pas. ( est-ce que je ne porte pas T
11 ne porte pas. ne portes-tu pas 1
nous ne portons pas. ne porte-t-U pas 1
vous ne portez pas. ne portons-nous pas 1
ils ne portent pas. ne portez-vous pas 1
ne portent-ils pas ?
1 III questions, when the 1st person singular ends in e mute, an acute
accent is placed on it for the sake of the sound: donn§-je, do I give? Any
statement preceded by est-ce que (is it that f) becomes a question : II a
requ une lettre, he has received a letter. Est-ce qu*il a requ une lettre 1
Has he received a letter ? The latter construction should be used for the
interrogative form of the 1st person singular, as forms like doiin6-je> parle-
je, etc., are found only in exalted style and in poetry.
2 See Lesson 3, (2).
The First Conjugation 61
tronver, to find ^ io consider.^ visiter, to visit.
doaner, to give. parler, to speak^ to talk.
preter, to lend. 6ter, to take off,
demeurer, to live, to dwell. laisser, to leave, to let, let alone, allow,
fermer, to shut, to close. cacher, to hide.
montrer, to show, to point out. plenrer, to weep, to cry,
aimer, to love, to like, chercher, to seek, to look for,
penser, to think. travailler, to work.
Men, well. sage, wise; (of a child) good, well-behaved.
Imperative.
The imperative of any regular verb is formed from
the present indicative. In the 1st conjugation, -s of the
second person singular is dropped.
SINOULAB. PLURAL.
porte, carry, portons, let us carry, portez, carry.
1. Je cherche mes crayons; ils sont perdus. 2. Aiinez-
vous les fleurs ? 3. Est-ce que tout le monde aime las
jardins ? 4. Ne cachez pas les cahiers de mes el^ves,
mon ami. 5. Travaillez chez vous. 6. Ne pavlez pas
toujours. 7. Nous sommes alles chez elle, mais elle
etait (was) sortie avec vous. 8. Cette femme est riche,
mais elle travaille une heure dans son jardin tons les
jours. 9. Je trouve que votre f r^re est tr^s sage ; il
travaille bien. 10. Fermons ces fenetres. 11. Nous ne
fermons pas les portes. 12. Vous cachez toujours mes
plumes ; ou sont-elles ? 13. Qui cache les miennes ?
14. Demeurez-vous pr^s d'ici ? 15. Qui pleure ? 16. Ne
trouvez-vous pas ces enfants sages? 17. Oui, ils sont
toujours sages. 18. Ne pleure pas, mon petit ami.
1 Notice this meaning of tronver : Comment trouvez-vous mon cha*
peani How do you like my half or What do you think of my hat? Dis-
tinguish from aimer and penser.
62 Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects
For Oral Drill. — 1. He is visiting; he is visited.
2. She is not visiting j she is not visited. 3. He has
visited ; he has not visited. 4. She does visit ; she does
not visit. 5. Does he visit ? 6. Does he not visit ?
7. We visit; we are visiting. 8. We do visit; we do not
visit. 9. We are visited; we are not visited.
^^JWhere do you live ? 2. Where do we live ? 3. Do
they live near the school ? 4. Are you looking-f|^ your
len or pencil ? 5. Are you working ? 6. Are all the
pupils of this class working ? 7. Do you not consider
these sentences very easy ? 8. Am I speaking of you
or of her ? 9. Are you speaking of him or of me ?
10. Who is talking ? 11. Where did you leave your
books ? 12. Who has hidden miii£T^ 13. Does she
leave hers at home ? 14. Have you brought all of
yours ? 15. Does a boy wear or take off his hat in the
house? 16. Do not^ cry, my child. 17. He is speak-
ing of your friends and mine. 18. We close all the
doors and windows every evening. 19. I do not close
mine. 20. Close that window near the door and this
one too.
29
Personal Pronouns used as Direct Objects.
Personal pronouns used as objects always precede
the verb, except in an affirmative command.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
me, me.
nous, m.
te, iheCy you.
vous, you.
le, him, it.
les (m. & f .) them.
la, her, it.
1 Use second singular in addressing a child. See French sentence 18 of
this lesson.
Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects 63
/ Me, te, le, la, standing before a verb, become m', t', V
^ before a vowel or h mute.
M'a-t-il vu, has he seen me f
Oil sont-ils 1 Les voilk. Where are they f There they are.
Me voici, here I am.
Donnez-le k votre pdre, give it to your father.
But Ne le donnez pas k votre pdre, do not give it to your father.
Notice that a prououu, whether subject or object, placed after a
verb is connected with it by a hyphen.
accepter, to accept, gronder, to scold.
apporter, to bring. regardor, to look at.
jouer, to play. remarquer, to notice.
compter, to count. rester, to stay, to remain.
entrer (dans), to enter, to go or come in, tomber, to fall.
louer, to praise. blamer, to blame.
une excuse, an excuse. pr6parer, to prepare, to get
le plaisir, the pleasure. ready beforehand.
avec plaisir, with pleasure. quelquefois, sometimes.
s'il vous plait, if you please, please. maintenant, now.
1. Acceptez-vous ce joli cadeau ? 2. Je Taccepte
maintenant avec plaisir. 3. Je ne vous ai pas vu ce
matin. 4. Votre cousin est arriv^, mais je ne Tai pas vu.
5. II a perdu sa gramraaire ; il la cherche maintenant.
6. Avez-vous pris mes livres ? 7. Oui, monsieur, je les
ai pris et je les ai mis sur cette petite table qui est pr^s
de la fenetre. 8. Les voici. 9. Otez-les. 10. Vous
travaillez quelquefois, n'est-ce pas ? 11. Voila votre
habit noir; le cherchez-vous ? 12. Aimez-vous les
livres ? 13. Je les airae bien. 14. Ne les aimez-vous
pas ? 15. Mon pere apporte un joli cadeau a ma soeur
Marie. 16. Est-ce que votre m^re vous blame ? 17. Elle
ne me blame pas, mais elle vous blame.
{A) 1. Here is a book ; I bought it for you. 2. When
he is naughty, I scold him. 3. Is n't he always good ?
y^ r rr
64 Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects
4. Where is my book ? I have lost it. 5. I have n't it
now. 6. Have you seen it ? 7. Have n't you found it
yet ? 8. Here it is. 9. There you are. 10. Where are
the books that I put on this boy's desk ? 11. You did
not put them on his desk; here they are on mine.
12. John has found a penknife ; he has put it into his
pocket. 13. Now, show me the chalk, please. 14. With
pleasure ; there it is in the box. 15. Don't look at me,
look at her. 16. I do not like his excuse, and I do not
accept it. 17. Accept my excuses. 18. I do accept
thein very often. 19. That door is open; shut it.
20. Your parents love you, love them. 21. Here are the
rules; notice them. 22. We find them easy. 23. Don't
hide it. 24. Count your sentences. 25. Don't scold us
always ; scold her sometimes.
(B) 1. Here is an exercise ; did I write it ? 2. Where
are you now ? 3. Where am I ? 4. Where is Mr. S. ?
5. Where is Miss M. ? 6. Are you looking at me ?
7. Am I looking at you ? 8. Am I looking at you now ?
9. Are you not looking for him ? 10. She has lost her
pencil ; have you seen it ? 11. Have n't you noticed it ?
12. Are you looking for it ? 13. Do you bring your
note-books every day ? 14. Who has taken them ?
15. Have you my watch ? • 16. Has he it ? 17. Where
is it, please ? 18. Does the man close these windows
every evening ? 19. Do you always prepare your les-
sons ? 20. Have you written this exercise ? 21. Has
everybody written it? 22. This boy's mother is kind to
{pour) him ; does he love her ? 23. Are you playing or
working ? 24. Do I praise you often ?
Past Participle ivith Avoir 65
30
Past Participle with Avoir.
A past participle used with the verb avoir agrees
with the direct object when the object precedes the
verb.
Ma soBur est arriv6e ; I'avez-VOTW vue! Afy sister has arrived; have
you seen her ?
Nous a-t-il vus, has he seen us f
Voici une montre ; mon pdre I'a acheWe Mer. Here is a watch ; my
father bought if yesterday.
n a reiju les lettres que j'ai Sorites ; les avez-vous lues 1
He has received the letters that I wrote ; did you read them f
If there is no direct object or if it follows the verb,
the past participle with avoir remains unchanged.
Nous avons jou6, we have played.
J'ai vu votre soeur, / saw your sister,
H a achete une montre, he bought a watch.
Elle a requ mes lettres, she got my letters.
Eecall rule for agreement with etre (Lesson 25).
excuser, to excuse. une hlstoire, a history^ a story.
raconter, to relate, to tell. interessant, interesting. ^
chanter, to sing. pourquoi, why.
une chanson, a song. . parce que, because,
\l/lls ont chante les m§mes chansons. Qj^lles sont
venues. 3. lis ont lu tous les livres que j'ai pretes
Pautre jour a leur pere. 4. Les avez-vous terpv^s int^-
ressants ? 5. Pourquoi Iqjb^ avez-vous lus ? yg^Pu as-tu
mis ses autres plumes ? (j^j^Q l^s ai mises dans cette
petite boite verte. 8. Est-ce que vous ne les avez pas
trouvees ? 9. Ernest a achet^ une montre et une canne.
10. Oil les a-t-il achetees ? (ll^J^ous avez ouvert mes
fenetres. 12. Pardon, madame, je ne les ai pas ouvertes,
^^^^ 5
66 Past Participle with Avoir
je les ai fermees. 13. A-t-elle eu ma Blume ? 14. Elle
ne Pa pas eue. 15. L'a-t-elle vue ? ofiL^Pourquoi cette
petite fille est-elle si mechante ? aTf^Elle n'est pas
niechante, elle est tres sage. 18. Pourquoi pleure-t-'elle
tou jours ? 19. Elle est triste, parce que son p^re et sa
mere sojj± morts. ^2^
(A)(yWe like all the ^o^t^^W t^l Q^ThQy^
:ed all the stories you told. t^Jj^W^rfeive found!^^^"^
liked all the storing you
them interesting. Qy He does not lenff^KTs^ote-book tb
the other^4)imilaj^>5. He has often shoj-n it jtoJiis f\<
friends, f^/ TelPus a little story or S^^^S^tfljitle 1/
song. 7. Our parents always love us. ^8^ Where did 1-^*.%^
leave my hat and coat ? ^_9j)You leftTtEem in th^*§arden.
10. The ^ouse that he has sold is a large one. \UJ The
book that feead is not very interesting. 12. The woman
that wrote tjike letter we received yesterday arrived this
. morning, (l^ That boy y^o is sit^ting neap^ou is not
^'looking IP his book, 1^ isloo^^g' at me. y^There is
your book, sir ; look at it. (l5) Do not look at me.
(B) 1. Do you like this story? 2. Who told it?
3. Did you tell it ? 4. Who wrote this letter ? 5. Did
your brother write it ? 6. Where are the apples you
brought to school this morning ? 7. I put them on the
table or into a box, I think ; who took them ? 8. Did
you eat them ? 9. Did she sing this song ? 10. Is she
singing to-day the same songs she sang yesterday ?
11. Why do I scold you sometimes ? 12. Why did I
this morning ? 13. Did I scold her because she did
not write the same sentences as the other pupils ?
14. She has written them now, has n't she ? 15. Have
the other pupils written theirs ? 16. Here is the his-
tory ; don't you find it interesting ? 17. Do you like
the songs they sing ? 18. Have you excused us ?
^ Same construction as montrez-nous in Lesson 19.
Plural of Nouns and Adjectives 67
31
Plural of Nouns and Adjectives.
Most nouns and adjectives form their plural, as in
English, by adding s.
r^ventail (m.), the fan. les 6ventail8, the fans.
Exceptions : — 1. Nouns and adjectives ending in -s,
-X, or -z, remain unchanged in the plural :
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
le fils, the son. les flls, the sons.
romnibas (m.), the omnibus, les omnibus, the omnibuses
la voix, the voice. les voix, the voices,
le nez, the nose. les nez, the noses.
heureox, heureux, happy, fortunate.
2. Nouns and adjectives ending in -an, -eu, and seven
nouns in -on,^ add x to form the plural :
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
le chapeau, the hat. les chapeaux, the hats.
le feu, the Jire. les f eux, the fires.
un cheveu, a hair, les cheveux, the hair.
beau (m.), beaux (m.),"! beautiful, handsome,
belle (f.), belles (f.), J fine.
le bijou, the jewel. les bijoux, the jewels.
le joujou, the toy, plaything, les joujoux, the toys, playthings.
The plural of the adjective bleu is regular : blens.
3. Most nouns and adjectives ending in -al change
-al into -aux.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
le cheval, the horse. les chevaux, the horses.
* ranimal, the animal. les animaux, the animals.
6gal, 6gaux, equal.
The plural of bal (m.), ball (a dance) is regular : bals.
" A complete list is given on page 303. For the plural of foreign and
compound nouns, see Appendix, page 304.
68 Plural of Nouns and Adjectives
4. Eight nouns in -ail change ail into aux : ^
le travail, the worky the labor. les travaux, the works j the labors,
le corail, the coral. les coraux, the corals.
5. Aieul, ciel, and ceil are irregular.
Singular. Plural.
aieul, grandfather. aieuls, grandfathers.
aienl, ancestor. aieux, ancestors.
ciel, sky. ciels, skies (of painting),
ciel, sky, heaven. cieux, skies^ heavens.
^il. eye. y*^"^i T^^ ■
1. Les coraux qu'il a achetes sont tres beaux. 2. Ces
voix sont tres gales. 3. Vos cheveux sont plus beaux
que les miens et que ceux de ma sceur. 4 Ou avez-vous
trouv^ ces grands chapeaux ? 5. Je les ai trouves chez
votre voisin. 6. Les enfants qui ont joue avec moi
aujourd'hui sont heureuxj^s sont plus heureux que
moi. 7. Louis_ et Jeaii ^'soiiV dans la merae classe.
8. Aimes-tu tes jolis joujoiix? 9. Les tiens sont plus
jolis que les miens. 10. Vos travaux sont plus utiles
que les leurs. 11. Je pense que vous aimez les animaux.
12. N'acceptez-vous pas ces jolis cadeaux ? 13. Avez-
vous vu mes beaux chevaux? 14. Ou sont-ils ? 15. Les
voil^.
1. Your hats are smaller than ours. 2. This animal
is very little. 3. These little animals are beautiful and
useful. 4. When did you buy these gifts ? 5. Did
you buy them for me ? 6. Her eyes and mine are
blue. 7. The sky is blue. 8. Have you seen the beau-
tiful corals that she has received ? 9. Do they sing be-
cause they are happy ? 10. Why are they not happy ? •
11. Their father and mother have not come back from Lon-
don. 12. All of her jewels are Jaeautiful. 13. Have you
1 A complete list is given on page 303.
/ -^^ «^
Second Co\
seen his horses ? 14. Have you seen mine ? 15. Your
hair is prettier than hers or her brother's. 16. Where do
you find those beautiful red flowers ? 17. I am always
looking for them. 18. The works of these men are not
very useful. 19. Her toys are prettier than her
brother's.
32
Second Conjugation.
In verbs of the second conjugation the infinitive ends
in -ir, and the past participle in -i.
In regular verbs of this conjugation, -iss is inserted
before the ending of the present participle: toi8a ant>,
finishing. , ^==
Present Indicative.
TERMINATIONS : -is, -Is, -it, -Issoiis, -issez, -issent.
je finis, Ijinish^ I am finishing y nous finissons.
/tu finis. / do finish, vous finissez.
il or elle finit. ils or elles finissent.
Imperative,
singular. plural.
Mia, finish. fLniBBOna, let us finish. timsaet, finish.
punir, to punish. le tableau,^ the picture.
batir, to build. le portrait, the portrait.
agir, to act. la ville, the city, the town.
salir, to soil. le village, the village.
saisir, to seize, le prix, the price, the prize.
choisir, to choose. le jeu, the game, play.
mal, badly. le bateau, the boat.
ainsi, thus, so. le couteau, the knife.
principal, principal. le g6n6ral, the general.
le parent, the parent, the relative, le journal, the newspaper.
^ le tableau noir (or le tableau, if there is no chance for ambiguity),
the blackboard.
70 Second Conjugation
1. Le general finit son journal. 2. Les generaux
finissent leurs journaux. 3. Est-ce votre oncle qui Mtit
cette maison ? 4. Non, c'est le medecin ; il est devenu
bien riche. 5. Voici deux grands couteaux; Jean
choisit celui-la, et son fr^re choisit celui-ci. 6. Punissez-
vous souvent les enfants qui sont sages ? 7. Non, mon
ami, mais je punis quelquefois les mechants enfants.
8. N'agissez pas ainsi. 9. Cette enfant salit sa robe
tons les jours. 10. Pourquoi punit-elle ce petit garqon ?
11. Parce qu'il saisit toujours les fleurs de sa soeur.
12. Cet homme a bati deux maisons dans le village ou
vous demeurez. 13. Les enfants aiment bien les jeux.
14. EUe est moins souvent punie que son fr^re.
15. A-t-il vu les livres que nous avons choisis ?
For Oral Drill. — 1. They choose; they 2^ choosing.
2. They do not choose ; they are not choosing. 3. Are
you choosing ; are you chosen ? 4. Are you not choos-
ing; are you not chosen? 5. She chooses; she has
chosen. 6. She is choosing; she is chosen. 7. We
choose; we have not chosen. 8. She has been chosen;
she has not been chosen. 9. Does she choose ?
(^ Of all their animals, their white horses are the most
beautiful. 2. Are your parents building that house ?
3. Are you speaking of this house or that ? 4. He is
choosing these knives for the boys. 5. Have you seen
the boat that lie has built ? 6. The pictures that he has
brought from Paris are finer than ours. 7. Is this your
aunt's portrait or your mother's ? 8. I am choosing the
prizes that I give to the pupils who work well. 9. This
woman's children act badly. 10. Why do they act so ?
11. Why does she punish us ? 12. Our newspapers are
better than yoursJ 13. All of the generals have left for
Nouns in General Statement 71
Paris ; they have left their horses here. 14. She is
finishing her work; are you finishing yours? 15. Do
you like the games these children play ? 16. She always
punishes her daughters when they soil their dresses.
33
Nouns in General Statement.
A noun used in a general sense requires the definite
article in French.
J'aime les chiens, I am fond ofdotjsj^m general).
Le cafe est meilleur que le th6, coffee is better than tea.
Les chevaux sont utiles k rhomme (or auz hommes), horses are
useful to man.
le soldat, the soldier, ob6ir (k), fo obey)-
un oiseau, a bird. d^sobeir {'k)yto disobey.
la vie, the Ufe^ living. cher (m.),^ ,
I'argent (m.), silver, money. chere (f.)>/
Tor (m.), gold. rare, rare.
le cafe, coffee. court, short.
le tli6, tea. nombreux, numerous.
peut-Stre, perhaps. malheureux, unhappy, unfortunate.
1. Tout le raonde aime I'argent. 2. Les enfants sages
ne d^sobeissent pas a leurs parents. 3. lis obeissent
toujours. 4. La vie d'un oiseau est courte. 5. La vie
est plus chere k Londres qu'a Paris. 6. Les omnibus
sont plus nombreux a Paris qu'a Rome. 7. Votre plume
est peut-etre meilleure que mon crayon. 8. Le chien est
I'ami de Thomme. 9. Aimez-vous les chevaux noirs ?
10. Les yeux bruns sont toujours bons. 11. Le vert est
une jolie couleur. 12. Les pommes vertes ne sont pas
bonnes. 13. Les enfants aiment les soldats.
1 Ob^ir and d6sob6ir take the dative case : either an indirect pronoun
object or k before a noun object.
72 Nouns of Quantity
1. A lawyer is less useful than a doctor. 2. Doctors
are more useful than lawyers. 3. Life is short. 4. Gold
and silver are useful. 5. Silver is perhaps more useful
than gold. 6. Tea is good, but I think that coffee is
better. 7. This dog obeys the little boy. 8. My sister
is fond of birds. 9. I like them too. 10. Horses are
more useful than all the other animals. 11. Cats love
birds. 12. Do birds love cats ? 13. Do not dogs love
cats ? 14. Are birds numerous here ? 15. Omnibuses
are still numerous in Paris. 16. Are you fond of ani-
mals ? 17. Do you disobey your parents ? 18. Always
obey your father and mother. 19. Does everybody care
for flowers ? 20. Is living dearer in this town than in
that ? 21. Do I always accept excuses ? 22. Boys like
work. 23. Those who do not work are often unhappy.
24. Our soldiers always obey their generals.
34
Nouns of Quantity.
A noun of measure or quantity requires the preposi-
tion de (d') without the article before the noun limited :
une paire de chevaux, a pair of horses.
Exception: La plupart, most, takes de and the article before the
noun. La plupart des hommes, most men.
la douzaine, the dozen. la plupart, most, the greater part.
la demi-douzaine, the half-dozen. un oeuf, an egg.
la livre, the pound. le Sucre, the sugar.
la demi-livre, the half-pound. la fraise, the strawberry,
un panier, a basket. le beurre, the butter.
un verre, a glass. le lait, the milk.
une tasse, a cup. le vin, the wine.
une carafe, a carafe ^ a decanter, la biere, the beer.
Nouiis of Quantity 73
la bouteille, the bottle. remplir, to Jill,
un morceau,! a piece, voulez-vous, 2 c?o you wish, will you
have ?
1. Apportez-moi une tasse de caf^ et un verre d^eau.
2. Donnez-moi encore nne tasse de the. 3. Le p^re de
Jean a achete une douzaine de bouteilles de vin. 4. II a
apporte une carafe d'eau. 5. J'ai donne deux paniers de
poires a la femme du pauvre homme. 6. Voulez-vous
une livre de beurre ou une douzaine d'oeufs ? 7. II a
pris une tasse de lait. 8. Dcfhnez-moi une demi-douzaine
de mouchoirs. 9. II remplit nos verres. 10. Ma cousine
a pris un verre de vin, et mon cousin un verre de bi^re.
11. II a offert un beau cadeau au jeune homme qui a
trouv^ sa montre. 12. L'a-t-il accepte ? 13. Voici un
panier de pommes pour votre m^re. 14. La pluparfc des
femmes aiment les fleurs.
(A) 1. She bought a dozen eggs on Monday. 2. Who
fills the carafe ? 3. I do (I fill it). 4. Will you have
a glass of water or a cup of milk ? 5. They have brought
a half-pound of tea and two pounds of butter. 6. They
have also brought three pounds of sugar and four baskets
of strawberries. 7. My sister has bought a half-dozen
white handkerchiefs for her friend Louise. 8. Bring
me a carafe of water. 9. There are two dozen pupils
in his class. 10. Here is a cup of coffee for you.
11. Do not fill my glass, fill hers. 12. There it is.
13. You have lost your pen and ink, but I have n't seen
them. 14. Look for them. 15. Won't you have mine?
16. Most men work (pL) every day.
1 Notice that morceau is a fragment, a morsel, while pi6ce is usually a
complete whole . TTn morceau de beurre ; une piece d'or (ou de cinq francs) .
2 Followed by an infinitive, will you f Voulez-vous rester ici, mil you
stay here f
74 Third Conjugation
(B) 1. Are you filling my glass ? 2. Are you filling
hers ? 3. Who is filling it ? 4. Did lie take a glass of
water or wine ? 5. What did you take ? 6. Where is
my chalk ? 7. Who has taken my bottle of ink ? 8. Did
you take it ? 9. Did you see it ? 10. Did I put it into
the drawer ? 11. Where is the box of pens ? 12. Is
it on this table ? 13. Have I a dozen pens or pencils ?
14. Did you take a cup of coffee or a glass of milk this
morning ? 15. What have you in your pocket ?
35
Third Conjugation.
In verbs gf the third conjugation the infinitive ends
in -oir, and the past participle in -u.
recevoir, to receive; recevant, receiving; regu, received.
Present Indicative.
TERMINATIONS : -8, -8, -t, -0118, -ez, -ent.
je re(joi8, / receive, 1 do receive, nous recevon8.
tu re^ois. / am receiving. vous recevez.
il reqoit. ils resolvent.
Imperative,
singular. plural.
roQois, receive. recevons, let us receive, recevez, receive.
Nouns of Material.
A noun, used to denote the material of which an
object is made, follows the name of the object and is
preceded by de without the article :
Tine montre d'or, a g^ld watch,
une robe de sole, a silk dress.
un chemiu de fer, a railroad.
Nouns of Material 75
d^oevoir, to deceive. la paille, the straw,
devoir, to owe (past participle, le cuir, the leather.
da (m.), due (f.).)^ tine bottine, a boot.
une paire, a pair. un Soulier, a shoe,
le fer, the iron. un gant, a glove.
racier (m.), the steel, un sac, a hag.
le fer-blanc, the tin. une chain* , a chain.
le cuivre, the copper, une fourchette, a fork.
le marbre, the marble, une cuiller, a spoon.
le bois, the wood. une assiette, a plate,
la sole, the silk, un chemin, a road.
1. Nous avons une douzaine de couteaux d'argent.
2. Elle a achete une belle robe de sole. 3. Nous n'avons
pas nos gants. 4. Les avez-vous ? 5. Voulez-vous cette
demi-douzaine de cuillers d'argent ? 6. Donnez-moi
aussi deux douzaines et demie de couteaux d'acier.
7. Marie, apportez-nous trois tasses de the, trois verres
d'eau, et le suere. 8. Voici un panier de fraises.,
9. J'accepte ce cadeau avec plaisir. 10. Nos amis sont
venus par (^y) chemin de fer. 11. Les avez-vous vus^?
12. Pas encore. 13. Ou sont-ils maintenant ? 14. lis
visitent leur oncle a Chicago. 15. Apportez-nous une
livre de cafe, s'il vous plait.
For Oral Drill. — 1. I receive ; I am not receiving.
2. We receive ; let us not receive. 3. He receive^; he
does not receive. 4. We are not receiving ; let us
receive. 5. They receive ; do they receive ? 6. Does
she receive ? 7. Is she not receiving ? 8. Receive ;
do not receive.
(A) 1. He owes ten francs to his brother. 2. You
owe yours six francs, I think. 3. We have bought a
dozen silver forks and a half-dozen plates. 4. They re-
1 The circumflex accent is placed over the past part. masc. dft to distin-
guish it from du, of the.
76 Adverbs of Quantity
ceive these beautiful gifts with pleasure. 5. She receives
every week two or three interesting letters from her
brother who is now in London. 6. Here is your pair of
silk gloves. 7. Yes, I left them here. 8. I have a
silver pen-holder and a gold pen. 9. Here is your
leather bag. 10. Bring us a half-dozen silver spoons,
please. 11. I do not wear my straw hat now. 12. This
man loves everybody. 13. Everybody loves him.
14. Will you have a pair of boots or shoes ? 15. I have
bought a dozen boxes of steel pens for the pupils of
this school. 16. She receives her friends every evening.
17. He is very rich ; he owes it to his father. 18. Let
us receive him well.
(B) 1. Does your father receive his papers every day
or every week ? 2. Where are the pears I bought ?
, 3. Have you eaten them ? 4. Who put them into this
paper bag ? 5. What have you in that tin box, sir ?
6. Is iron more useful than steel ? 7. Is copper still
more useful ? 8. Who has a gold watch ? 9. Where
is your gold chain ? 10. Did you leave it at home ?
11. She likes wooden tables ; do you like them too ?
12. Do you like marble tables ? 13. Is there a railroad
ill this town ? 14. Is it near this house ? 15. Have
you brought that pair of boots for me ?
36
/' Adverbs of Quantity.
An advero of quantity (like a noun of quantity) re-
quires de^ithout the article before the noun limited :
beaucoup de poinmes, many apples.
ExOv Imperative.
vends, sell. vendons, let us sell. vendez, sell.
On, onCy we, yoit, they, people.
The indefinite pronoun on, even when plural in mean-
ing, is used only as the subject of a verb in the third
person singular. In many cases it is used where the
passive form is used in English.
On vend des pommes ici, then sell apples here.
On chante, parce que Ton ^ est heureux, one sings {we sing) because
one is {we are) happif.
Oil trouve-t-on ^ des aiguilles, ivhere do you find needles 9
Oil vend-on du lait et de la crdme, where are milk and cream sold ?
On parle francais ici, r„ ,
_ . , * . \ t rench. spoken here.
Ici on parle frangais, / '
la dentelle, the lace. le lit, the bed.
la mousseline, the muslin. la question, the question.
le ruban, the ribbon. la reponse, the answer.
le fil, the thread, r^pondre (k),to answer.
1 In the irregular verb mettre, to put: je mets. tu mets, 11 met; in
vaincre» to conquer, also irregular: je vaincs, tu vaincs, il vainc.
2 Notice that I'on may be used instead of on whenever it sounds better.
It is often used after et, ou, oil, que, lorsque, pourquoi, si, etc., but not
when the following word begins with 1.
' Like il and elle in a question (Lesson 3), on is joined by -t- to a verb
ending in a vowel.
84
Fourth Conjugation
une aiguille, a needle^
une 6pingle, a pin,/
11T1 i^A n thimhlp.. /
. rendre, to give back^ to return.
Wtendre, to hear.
un de, a thimble. / kttendre, to wait^ to wait for.
des ciseaux (m.), scissors. nerdre, to lose, to waste.
la laine, the wool. cfertainement, certainly.
le drap, the oioth, the sheet (of a bed), piesque^ almost, nearly.
jfu Repondez-vous aux lettres ! de ' voire cousine ?
^jRepond-omtoujours a vos questiops? (^ Oui, presque
toujours. ^Quand je joue avecjmon fr^re, je perds
souvent. / 5. Oui, quand on joua avec lui, on perd
presque /toujours. [Q Ou vend-on ides rubans ? 7. On
t
en vend/ici. (A On vend aimi deslaiguilles, des epingles
du fil, n'est-ce pas ? /9/R)urquoi attend-on ici ?
On attend des lettres. y^lL^attend des reponses
\^ aux let res qu'il a d^ja ecrites. |^^0n trouve que la
JU vie est jh^re dans les grandes villes. iS. Trouve-t-on
des livr s interessants dans ce grand magasin ? 14. Cer-
taineme it, on en trouve beaucoijip. ^5yOn a apportey^/
les et des poires. AL6j 6n les a apport^es k n^ay^ >^
^0n-apepdu:4nes.^^aaux.bien des fois. J^
Drill. — iT louare lojsmg ;areyounbt losing ? ^^T^
^she npt losing? . 3. One Ipsee; one is ^
she is not lost, ^v.- 5. I am waiting ; ^
[g ? 6r Wait ; , do not wait. 7. Is he >3
S.'^re people waiting? 9. Let us wait 5
lit. '\ 10. Do I hear? 11. Do I not he^?
12. Have they heard ? 13. They hear ; they wait. /
/l.)Is he waiting fW your brother? ^ He always
waits for hira\ f 3i I ani waiting for mine. C;I am
waited for too Xj^dineJ^imes (one waits for me, etc.).
r^5^Where do they sell gloves and hats? .6. Do they
-S&ll them near here ? 7. Where are scissors sold ?
( 8. IWhere do you find beds, tables, and chairs ? 9. We
waiting ?
let us not
le \*
w
The Partitive after .
fithj iron, copper, and several o
(^. Eeturn these books tVda
your friends always return^j^^ours
Jt^ When people have fiends,
vl§/Do you hear me?- (l6)ldo.
for me? ,18) I am. 197 Gi^
you borrowed^ 20. Here they
pins, thread, /and a thimblo^in that box. ^2. She has
bought lace, mijglln, ribbon^ and wool. gS.jjfTow I have
answered jjJJ^our questitms,
Llmost always
are fortunate.
iVAre you waiting
lack bhose needles
. 21.\There are
ys. tT
eptj'
C EzceKJon to
CJSJVbentbfei
40
le Tor Use of the Pji
After a Negative.
^
U
noun is the direct objeS/ of a negative
verb, some or piny (expressed or understp/id ip English)
is expressed by de without the article.
Je n'ai pas d'argent, / have n't any money, or / have no mortify.
Elle n'a pas de souliers, she has n't any shoes, or she has nojhoes.
Vous n'avez pas de livre, you have n't a book.
(2) After ni . . . ni, neither . . . nor, and[i^ans, with-
out, both de and the article are omitted.
II n'a ni amis ni argent, he has neither friends nor mo
II est sans amis, he is without friends.
que, only, both de an4 the article
(3) After ne
are used.
Nous n'avons que des pidcea de cinq sous, we have only Jive- sou
pieces.
H n'a que des amis, he has nothing but friends.
(4) Jamais without a verb means never ; with a verb
preceded by ne, it means never ; with a verb without
ne, it means ever.
^gO^ C'-l^v^XU c[ (ZA-^^-'t^^
86 The Partitive after a Negative
Avez-vous jamais vu des lions, have you ever seen lions 9
Jamais, never.
Wen avez-vous jamais vu, have you never seen any ?
Notice the position of jamais : before the past participle in a
compound tense.
(5) Ni . . . ni, without a verb, have a negative mean-
ing: ni run ni I'autre, Tieither one; used with a verb,
the veA must be preceded by ne.
Je ne parle ni anglais ni franqais.
/ speak neither English nor French,
Notice the omission of pas as in the case of ne . . . que and
jamais.
1. N'attendez pas de r^ponse a vos lettrea, 2. Je n?en
attends jamais. 3. M. Jacob vend-il de la dentelle et
de la mousseline ? 4. II ne vend ni dentelle ni mousse-
line. 5. II ne vend que des rubans. 6. Ce garqon n'a
jamais lu de livre franqais. 7. Je n'ai pas de sole, mais
j'ai du 111 blanc. 8. Vous en avez beaucoup. 9. En
avez-vous jamais assez ? 10. Jamais. 11. N'en avez-
vous jamais assez? 12. Presque jamais. 13. M'ap-
porte-t-on du pain et du beurre ? 14. Nous n'avons
pas de the. 15. Apportez-nous du lait. Merci (thank
yo2i), madame. 16. En voulez-vous deux ou trois verres?
17. Mon pere n'a ni porte-monnaie ni argent.
Cl. JThese mejLare very poor ; they have neither friends
nor mcmej, r2AShe has n't any muslin ; she has only
lace. (SjJlB^she enough ? CVhat is (there is) the
question. (ojWe have no books. /o^Have you pa#er
only ? 7. We have neither books nor j)aper. (^ I
have not an umbrella, f Q-jTake mine. /lOL Thank you,
I have already borrowea'one. ' 11. Do ybvl ever return
the umbrellas you borrow ? 124 Almost never. (13. Not
The Partitive with Adjectives 87
(jpas) always, but sometimes. 14. Have you returned
the one you borrowed on Thursday ? 15. Not yet.
16. Return it to-day, please. 17. My friends never re-
turn ih^AB that they borrow. 18. Now I have only
one. /^19 JHe has money, but I have n't. 20, Have you ?
21. I na;^. (22^ How much have you? \23. I have a
good deal. 24. One never has enough. zS. Answer
this question : have I as much as you ? 2^, Are you
waiting for an answer? 27. I always wait for an answer,
but you never do (wait).
Exception to Rule for Use of the Partitive Article.
Adjective before the Noun. »
When an adjective stands before the noun in French,
some or any (expressed or understood in English) is ex-
pressed by de without the article.
/ du pain, de bon pain.
/ de la viande, de bonne viande.
de Teaa, de bonne ean.
des pommes, de bonnes pommes.
But du papier, du papier blanc.
The following adjectives usually precede their nouns.^
beau, beautiful. mauvais, had.
bon, good. m^chant, wicked.
grand, large. petit, sviall,
gros, big. vieux (m.)A^^^
jeune, young. vieille (f.), j
joli, pretty. vilain, ugly.
1 The position of adjectives must be learned largely by observation. For
a more complete treatment of this subject, see Lesson 43.
88 The Partitive with Adjectives
le cirque, the circus. la souris, the mouse.
la cage, the cage. la vache, the cow.
le lion, the lion. le bceuf , the ox,
un Elephant, an elephant. le mouton, the sheep, mutton.
le tigre, the tiger. la brebis, the sheep, the ewe.
le leopard, the leopard. un agneau, a lamb,
nn OUTB, a hear. une b§te, a beast, an animal.
le loup, the wolf. un troupeau, a flock, a herd
le singe, the monkey. la grange, the barn.
le serpent, the snake. mordre, to bite.
le rat, the rat, fournir, to furnish.
I
1. Vous n'avez pas encore vu de lion, je pense. ^ 2. J*ai
vu des tigres, des leopards, des loups et des serpents.
3. Nous avons vu de gros Elephants. 4. Les lions, les
elephants et les loups sont des aniraaux. 5. Les ele-
phants sont de gros animaux. 6. lis sont plus gros que
tous les autres animaux. 7. Que regardez-vous ? 8. Je
regarde cette cage de singes. 9. Les aimez-vous ?
10. Je les trouve tr^s interessants. 11. Les chats
aiment les rats et les souris. 12. Notre vache fournit
de bon lait. 13. Ce chien ne nous mord jamais.
14. On n'aime pas les mauvais fruits. ~ 15. Les agneaux
sont de petits moutons. 16. Ces hommes portent de
grands chapeaux mais de petits gants.
1. The man has cows and sheep in his barn. 2. He
has no oxen, but he has fine horses. 3. Has he a pair
of them ? 4. That horse is biting one of your young
trees. 5. Sheep furnish wool. 6. Mice and rats are
small animals. 7. Do you like snakes ? 8. I do not. \
9. He always has good friends and beautiful bcJbEst"'*'^
10. Good books are always good friends. 11. There are
many old men and women who live in this town.
12. Here we are at the circus. 13. Are there animals in
these cages ? 14. There are a great many. 15. How
Imperfect Indicative 89
many ? 16. There are two or three hundred. 17. I
think that there are three hundred and fifty. 18. Did
you ever visit any other (d^ autre) circus ? 19. What
have you seen to-day ? 20. We have seen old lions,
handsome tigers, and beautiful leopards. 21. We have
also seen young elephants and little bears. 22. Where
are the monkeys ? 23. There they are in the cage.
24. Look at them ; are n't they pretty ? 25. I think that
those little beasts are very ugly.
f Imperfect Indicative.
It has been stated (Lesson 10) that the perfect is the
past tense of conversation. If, however, the past action
is represented as going on at the same time with another
action or as a customary or continued action, it is ex-
pressed by the imperfect.
Quand j'^tais jeune, je demeurais k Bouen.
When I was young, I lived at Rouen.
The imperfect of a verb may be formed by changing
the ending -ant of the present .participle into -ais.
FINITIVE.
Present Participle.
Imperfect Indicative.
porter,
portant,
je port ais.
flnir,
finissant.i
je flnissais.
recevoir,
recevant,
je recevais.
vendre,
yendant,
je vendais.
avoir,
ayant,
j'avais.-
§tre,
6tant,
j'6tai8.
1 Note again the iss before the ending of the present participle of regular
verbs of the second conjugation.
2 Notice that the imperfect of avoir is regular, while the present participle
is irregular.
'■^Amirfii^ ^ Q^^vuj
90 J Imperfect Indicative
The terminations of the imperfect are alike in all
verbs : -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient.
je portals, / was carrying, I car- nous portions,
tu portals, [riedy I used to carry. vous portlez.
11 portalt. Us portaient.
Conjugate the imperfect indicative of each of the
verbs given on page 89, using that of porter as a model.
(X^la campagne, the country (as dis- rencontrer, to meet,
tinguished from the town). paresseux, idle, lazy.
k la campagne, in the country. applique, diligent.
le pays, the country (the region, iibondant, abundant.
the whole country). Buiwa.ntf following.
la chose, the thing. autrefois, for jtierly.
le lapin, the rabbit. I'ann^e derniere, last year,
11 y a, there ?s, there are.
11 y avalt, there was, there were.
Qu'est-ce qu'il y a, ivhat is there ?
Qu*est-ce qu'il y avait, what was there f
\{jQu
Juand vous etiez jeune, mon ami, vous aviez de
beaux joujoux. 2. Mes parents n'etaient pas si riches
que les votres, raais j'avais aussi de jolies choses.
3. Nous ne demeurions pas k la ville, mais nous avions
une grande maison k la campagne. 4. II y avait pres
de la maison un petit bois et de grands arbres. 5. J'avais
pres de ma fenetre un petit jardin plein de fleurs rouges
et blanches. 6. Mon jardin etait tres petit, mais mes
fleurs etaient si jolies ! 7. II y avait beaucoup d'oiseaux
dans le jardin et dans le bois. 8. Les oranges etaient
rares, mais les fraises Etaient abondantes. 9. Nous
avions aussi beaucoup de poires et de pommes. 10. Nos
chiens etaient heureux parce qu'il y avait beaucoup de
lapins dans le bois, et les chats parce qu'il y avait beau-
coup d'oiseaux dans le jardin. 11. II y avait aussi des
souris et des rats dans notre vieille grange. 12. Nous
Imperject Indicative
&
dtions heureux, parce que nous avions beaucoup de bous
amis. 13. Tout le monde ^tait heureux.>^^ ^^ (j^J^ Ia(a\
Bepon dez enfra ngais aux questions suivantes : 1. Quand ^
votre ami etait jeufi^T-^-^piWttit-il V 2. UiT aviez-vous,
assez? 3. Qu'est-ce que vous aviez? 4. Vos parentd^'-f^
etaient-ils tres riches ? 5. Etaient-ils plus ou moins
riches que les siens? 6. Ou demeuriez-vous ? 7. Aviez-
vous une petite maison ? 8. Qu'est-ce qu'il y avait pres
de la raaison ? 9. Qu'aviez-vous pr^s de votre fen^tre ?
10. Qu'est-ce qu'il y avait dans votre jardin ? 11. De
quelles couleurs etaient-elles ? 12. Etaient-elles tr^s
jolies ? 13. Y avait-il des oiseaux ? 14. Combien y en
avait-il ? 15. Vous aviez beaucoup d'oranges, n'est-ce
pas ? 16. Y avait-il des fraises ? 17. Quels fruits
aviez-vous ? 18. Et quels animaux ? 19. Les chiens
Etaient-ils heureux ? 20. Pourquoi ? 21. Et les chats ?
22. Etiez-vous heureux ou malheureux? 23. Pourquoi?
24. Qui etait heureu/ ? ^^.. (Q/0.>Y^^-^^ '
They had; they have. 2. They
Dhey^usedjto,re(j|eive; they do roz/
IS cflbosi
she was no
(LiHis sisters were rich because they
diugent, but his brothers were sometimes
one always rich because one is diligent ?
was in Paris last year I often used to,
^^Where were you an hour ago ? (5^
uncle's. /6yl was answering my friend'i
you came in. {7/ When she was young, she used to sing
were always
idle. 2. Is
i3. When I
father,.
at our-'
rter, when
92 Position of Adjectives
well. 8. Our neighbors were formerly richer than you;
they had large houses, beautiful gardens, and a large
number of horses and dogs. 9. Did he have more money
than you this morning ? 10. There was formerly a large
wood near the town in which (where) I used to live.
(ll.iWe J^^e speaking of her when she entered the
room, (l2j^^here were you when we went to your
house ? (13. Were you waiting for an omnibus when I
saw you tln§_jiijiiming^i_i4.^\Last year she used to
receive more letters than I. 15. They never obeyed
►^ ' ^' tneir parents, but we always obeyed ours. 16. They
jSi^ worked well and they were always happy. 17. They
. worked well because they were never punished.
43
Position of Adjectives.
Adjectives usually follow tlieir nouns in French,
especially those denoting color, shape, or nationality .^
avengle, blind, espagnol, Spanish.
sourd, deaf. italien, Italian,
muet (m.), ^ mute, dumb, la main, the hand,
muette (f.), j silent. le pied, the foot.
droit, right, straight. la langue, the tongue, language,
gauche, left, awkward. un h6tel, a hotel.
chaud, warm, I'lidtel de ville, the city hall.
froid, cold. descendre, to go down, come down, descend.
rond, round, descendre k un li6tel, to stop or to put up at
carr6, square. a hotel.
allemand, German. monter, to go up, to ride.
am6rioain, A merican, desirer, to desire, to wish,
^k pied, on foot.
k cheval, on horseback.
* For a fuller treatment of this subject, see Lesson 97.
Position of Adjectives
93
1. Apportez-nous, s'il vous plait, de meilleur vin, de
Peau chaude, et du sucre. 2. Votre cousine pretait
autrefois k ma soeur des livres allemands qui ^taient tr^s
interessants et aussi tr^s amusants. 3. Nous avons de
bonne encre rouge. 4. Desirez-vous une table ronde
ou carree ? 5. Je desire une table ronde, monsieur.
6. Voila un homme aveugle. 7. Est-il sourd aussi ?
8. Ces deux petites filles sont muettes. 9. La langue
italienne est beaucoup plus facile que/la langue alle-
mande. 10. Ce pauvre homme a permi la main droite.
11. Montez-vous quelquefois a ah^y/i? 12. Nous avons
de bon pain et de bonne viande. /13. Dans le mot gauche^
11 Y a une lettre muette.
rtj Do you desire hot water or cold water ?
Borne hot water. /Sj Sha*v\ me the right handT
the left hand, prNfse. j^sj^ Miss K. deaf?
also dumb and blind. Oj/How do you find the*
language ? /^. I find it difficult, but^.very interesting.
r^9y Where do you put up in Earis ? (10^1 always stop at
^ne hotel Continental. ^IJDid you ride horseback
when you were young? azjYes, I rode sometimes in (d)
the Bois de Boulogne. 13. Ifc went away on foot and
came back on horseback. fl.4.jrhis table is round, that
one is square. 15. How m^ffy American newspapers
did you receive when you were iiy^ondon ? 16. We
always received three or four. yUJJWe wish (desire)
two cups of cold milk, please. Ig^ f you have no tea
or (neither . . . nor) coffee, bring us hot water, cream,
and some sugar. 19. We were looking at the city hall
when your friends found us.
94 Comparisdfb.of Adjectives
Comparison x^Cjaidjectives.
(1) Th6 comparative is formed by placiog plus, more,
moins, less, or aussi, as, before the adjective. After a
negative si usually takes the place of aussi.
Elle eit moins gauche que son amie, she is less awkward than her
friend.
Elle est aussi jolie que son fr^re, mais elle n'est pas si polie, she
is as pretty as her brother, but she is not so polite.
Than before a number is expressed by de.
J'ai plus de cinq livres, / have more than Jive books.
Vous en avez plus de dix, n'est-ce pas I
You have more than ten^ have you not ?
(2) The superlative of an adjective is formed by
placing the definite article or the possessive adjective
before plus or moins of the comparative.
jeune, young ; plus jeune, younger ; le plus jeune, the youngest.
int6re8sant, interesting ; moins int^ressant, less interesting ; le moins
int^ressant, the least interesting.
Charles et Jean sont leurs plus chers amis, Charles and John are their
dearest friends.
Three adjectives have irregular comparative and su-
perlative forms:
bon, good ; meilleur, better ; le meilleur, the best.
11 f plus petit, sma//er; le plus petit, eau
porte-monnaie avec des pieces d'or. 5. Aurai-je aussi un
cheval blanc ? 6. Vous n'aurez pas de cheval ; ces
animaux-14 coutent tres cher.* 7. Nous ne choisirons
ni chevaux ni chiens. 8. Je pense que nous visiterons
DOS amis franqais Pann^ prochaine. 9. Elle ne rendra
k sa cousine ni sa bague ni ses gants. 10. Ne m'ecouterez-
vous plus ? 11. Je vous econterai et je, vous obeirai.
12. Etudierez-vous la langue franqaise ? 13. Vous la
trouverez la plus belle des langues. 14 Marie sera plus
belle que sa soeur. 15. Vous travaillez trop aujour-
d'hui, vous serez malade demain. 16. N'etes-vous plus
fatigue ?
For Oral Drill. — 1. We shall have; we shall be; we
shall find. 2. He will have; he will be; he will find.
3. You will have ; you will be; you will receive. 4. Shall
I have ? Shall I be ? Shall I sell ? 5. They will have ;
they will be ; there will be. 6. We shall have found ;
we shall be found ; we shall have arrived. 7. She will
give ; she will succeed ; she will sell. 8. They will for-
get ; they will have forgotten ; they will be forgotten.
Repeat the above sentences^ making them negative.
1. Sljall you be busy this afternoon ? 2. We shall be
at liberty soon. 3. I shall be glad of it. 4. She will
answer her friend's letter to-morrow morning. 5. Shall
you stay here next month ? 6. I shall be at the sea-
shore next month. 7. Who will be in the country ?
1 Notice the adverbial use of cher; hence, no agreemenL
104 The Future Tense
8. You will find some paper in this drawer. 9. No, there
is n't any more. 10. Your exercises will be much less
difficult than mine. 11. Mine will no longer be so easy
as yours. 12. When shall you arrive in Paris ? 13. I
shall be in London on the 1st and in Paris on the 11th
of next month. 14. Work well, and I am sure you will
succeed. 15. We shall have an American newspaper
next Saturday. 16. That will be a great pleasure for
us. 17. We shall have one sooner than you. 18. You
will receive a letter from your friends next week.
19. Shall you come down this morning ? 20. Wait a
moment, I shall be ready soon. 21. We shall wait no
longer. 22. Whom are you looking for in this street ?
23. How much do those scissors cost ? 24. They cost
three francs a (J>a) pair, 25. They cost dear. 26. Yes,
they are very dear.
The future tense must be used after qnand, lorsque,
whoiy aussitot que, des que, as soon as, if futurity is
implied.
Vous aurez ce livre quand (lorsque) vous aurez 6crit votre lettre.
You will have this book when ijou have written your letter.
Vous aurez cet argent aussitdt que (des que) vous arriverez.
You shall have that money as soon as you arrive.
Quand must be used for ivhen in direct and indirect questions ;
otherwise, quand and lorsque are practically interchangeable.
le bout, the end, the extremity. simple, simple.
la fin, the end, the conclusion. preferable, preferable.
la recompense, the reward. quelque chose, something.
gagner, to earn, to win quelqu'un, some one, any one.
casser to break. le temps, the time, the weather,
fiflr6, dd. avoir le temps, to have time.
The Future Tense 105
passer, to pass^ to go bi/, to fade. passer par, to go through,
passer le temps, to spend the time. par ici, this way.
passer chez , to call on . par Ik, that way,
passer devant (ou pr6s de), to pass, to alors, then,
go past something,
1, Serez-vous bien aise quand vous aurez fini votre
travail ? 2. Louise travaille bien, elle gagnera tous les
prix. 3. Comment passerons-nous le temps ? 4. Nous
regarderons les animaux dans le Jardin des Plantes.
5. Des que leur mere sera ici, elle nous donnera du fil,
de la soie et des aiguilles. 6. Vous serez un peu plus
aimable quand vous ne serez plus malade. 7. Aussitot
qu'elle sera arrivee, elle aura une tasse de lait, du pain
et des fraises. 8. Aussitot qu'elle arrive, elle dit tou-
jours qu'elle ne restera pas. 9. Elle dit qu'elle n'a
jamais le temps. 10. Quand nous aurons prepare notre
leqon, nous serons libres. 11. Nous en serous bien aises.
12. Kous jouerons alors avec plus de plaisir. 13. Qaand
je serai a Londres, je passerai chez votre ami, M. Rainer,
23 Downs Eoad, Clapton. 14. Voici quelque chose que
j'ai achete pour vous. 15. Quand on passe devant
quelqu'un, on dit, " Pardon I ''
(A) 1. When she is here, we always work well.
2. When they are here, we shall not work any more.
3. Shall you speak of it ? 4. I shall speak of it only
once. 5. We shall find these books very interesting, I
am sure (of it). 6. Won't you have one? 7. How
many days shall you stay in Boston ? 8. Shall you go
through Baton Rouge ? 9. When will he have finished
his letters ? 10. Will he not finish them at once ?
11. His father and brother are very tall, and he will be
taller still (still taller) perhaps. 12. When John is
older, he will win more prizes. 13. Prizes are the re-
106 The Future Tense
wards of labor. 14. The weather is fine to-day, and it
will be finer to-morrow. 15. Do not take this beautiful
silk umbrella, — you will lose it. 16. When there are
fewer words in these rules, they will be simpler. 17. At
the end of this book one will find many useful words.
18. He has broken the end of his umbrella. 19. Where
will one find you next week ? 20. Do not look at
me, look at your book ; I shall be here when you have
finished your sentence. 21. Men fade [away] like
(comme) flowers.
(B) 1. Shall you not be at liberty this evening ?
2. Shall you be busy to-morrow evening ? 3. Shall you
play this afternoon ? 4. Shall you not have time ?
6, Shall you work all the afternoon ? 6. How do ^-ou
find the weather to-day ? 7. Do you often call on your
friends ? 8. Where will they be next Sunday ? 9, Here
aje two roads; shall we choose this one or that one?
10. When you go^ home this afternoon, shall you go this
way or that way ? 11. Are you older or younger than I?
12. Will my pupils stay at home to-morrow ? 13. Will
they be at church or at school ? 14. Who will be here
to-morrow morning ? 15. Who will be here on Monday
next ? 16. Who was here last Tuesday ? 17. Shall
we have the forty-ninth or the fiftieth lesson to-morrow ?
18. Show me your pocket-book. 19. Shall you liave
money enough ? 20. How do you spend your time ?
21. Do you work all the time ?
1 irez, future of aller, to go.
Interrogative Adjectives 107
49
Interrogative Adjectives.
The adjective quel, which, what, what a, has the fol-
lowing forms :
rquel (in.), f quels (m.)i
' (^quelle (f.). J^quelles (f.).
The noun which quel modifies is nsnally the next word In the sen-
tence; with the verb etre, the noun may stand after the verb.
Quel livre avez-vous pris 1
Quel est le nom du livre que vous avez pris 1
le nom, the name, Taffaire (f.), the affair,
Texemple (ni.), the example, les afftdres, the affairs, businens,
le dictionnaire ( m.), the dictionary, ramasser, to collect, to pick up,
le plancher, the floor, laiaser tomber, to let fall, to drop^
le bruit, the noise, the report.
Quelles fleurs ayez-Tous prises t Which flowers did you take?
Quels livres a-t-il lus ] What hooks has he read?
Quelle femme ! What a woman t
Quel dommage ! What a pity I
1. Dans quelle partie de cette ville demeurez-vou8 ?
2. De quel pays etes-vous ? 3. Sur quelle table a-t-il mis
mes gants ? 4. Quels gauts ? 5. Ceux que j'ai achetds
Pautre jour au Bon Marchd. 6. Quel grand magasin !
7. Quels souliers avez-vous choisis ? 8. Quelles chan-
sons choisirez-vous ? 9. Je choisirai celles-ci; ce sont
les meilleures. 10. De quelle charabre a-t-on ouvert les
fenetres ? 11. Quels raouchoirs a-t-il donu^ 4 sa scEur ?
12. Vous avez laiss^ tomber quelque chose, monsieur.
13. Merci, madame ; c'est ma montre que j'ai laiss^e
tomber sur ce plaucher de marbre. 14. Vous Tavez
cass^e, n'est-ce pas ? 15. Quel dommage I 16. Ra«
^ In laisser tomber, tonber remains unchanged and Imisser b conjo-
gated.
108 Time of Day. Dates
massez vos livres, vos crayons et votre papier. 17. Ne
les laissez pas tomber. 18. Avez-vous entendu ce bruit ?
1. Whose are these pens ? 2. What pens ? 3. Those
that some one has dropped on the floor. 4. I dropped
them a moment ago, they are mine. 5. Pick them up,
please. 6. I will pick them up immediately. 7. What
French books have you read? 8. Whose dictionary is
this ? 9. What dictionary ? 10. This one. 11. It is
not mine, it is your own (yours). 12. What a fine book I
13. Which pen is the best, this one or that? 14. This
one is much better than' the other. 15. Which pens are
the best ? 16. These steel pens are the best. 17. What
is the name of this book ? 18. Who wrote it? 19. Of
what book are you speaking ? 20. What lesson have we
to-day ? 21. What a question ! 22. What beautiful
pictures ! 23. Who dropped something ? 24. What a
noise! 25. You do not work enough; that is why you
do not succeed in your business. 26. What an example I
50
Time of Day. Dates.
(1) Examine the following models for telling the time
of day :
Quelle heure est-il 1 What time is it 9
II est une heure, It is one o'clock*
II est deux heures, It is two o'clock.
II est cinq heures et demie,
II est cinq heures et demie, \t. - j tf ^ /*
II est cinq heures t rente, j J F^ J* ^
Quatre heures (et) (un) quart,
Quatre heures quinze (minutes),
Six heures dix, vingt, etc., Six ten, twenty, etc
Huit heures cinquante, 1 rt. ,, ^^ , • , , •
„ .^ . a. / . . V \ Eight Jifly, ten minutes to mm
Neuf heures moins dix (minutes),/ ^ •'•/ ^»
I Quarter past four.
Time of Day. Dates
109
B est midi,
II est midi et demi,
II est minuit,
II est minuit moins cinq,
A quelle heure ]
A huit heures du soir,
A diz heures precises,
Vers sept heures,
It is twelve o'clock^ noon.
It is half-past twelve.
It is twelve o'clock^ midnight.
It is Jive minutes to twelve*
At what time f
At eight in the evening.
Promptly at ten o'clock.
About seven o'clock.
(a) As in English, any number of minutes may go with the preced-
ing hour, although after half past, the next hour is usually named less
(moins) the number of minutes.
(b) II est or est-il in these expressions is an impersonal verb and is
therefore invariable.
(c) O'clock is often omitted in English, but heure or heurea is not
omitted in French. Minutes may be omitted.
(d) Midi and minuit are used for twelve o'clock.
(e) Demi is masculine after midi and minuit ; Lesson 23 (3).
(2) Kecall rules for dates, Lesson 24, and observe
the following expressions :
Quel jour du mois est-ce aujourd'hui 1 ^
Quel jour du mois avons-nous 1 I What day of the month is it
Quel quantieme (le combien) du mois j to-day f
est-ce aujourd'hui? J
C'est aujourd'hui le premier fevrier,
Ce sera domain le deux,
C'6tait hier le trente et un Janvier,
£lle est revenue le 11 mars,
II y a une semaine (ou huit jours ),i
n y a une quinzaine (ou quinze jours), ^
D'aujourd*hui en huit,
D*aujourd'hui en quinze,
Vendi-edi en huit,
Samedi en quinze,
£n diz-neuf cent six,
En (dans) quel mois?
Au mois de septembre.
En septembre,
It 18 February first.
To-morrow will be the second.
Yesterday was Jan. Slst.
She came back on March 11th.
A week ago.
A fortnight ago.
A week from to-day,
A fortnight from to-day,
A week from Friday.
A fortnight from Saturday.
In 1906,
In what month ?
In the month of September.
In September.
1 In tlie expressions huit Jours and quinze jours, the French count aa
one the day from which the time is reckoned.
no
Conjugation of Aller
Aller (irregular), to go}
Present Indicative.
Imperfect Indicative.
Future.
je vais, / go^ I am going, j'allais, / went, I was going, j'irai, I shall go.
tu vas. / do go. tu allais. / used to go. tu iras.
il va. il allait.
nous allons. nous allions.
vous allez. vous alliez.
ils vont. ils allaient.
il ira.
nous irons,
vous irez.
ilsiront.
Imperative.
SIKGULAR. PLURAL.
va, go. allons, let us go. allez, go,
la nuit, the night, la voiture, the carrUigi,
la gare, the station, tard, late.
le train, the train, par, by, through,
en voiture, in a carriage,
il est tard, it is late.
par le train de deux heures, by the 2 o*cIock train,
1, Quelle heure est-il ? 2. II est midi cinq on midi
dix. 3. II n'est pas encore midi et quart. 4. Elle n'est
pas partie avec eux; elle est partie plus tard, h 3 heures
et demie. 5. Nous avons rencontre nos amis ce matin a
9 heures moins un quart lorsque nous allions a la gare.
6. Avec qui alliez-vous a la gare ? 7. Avec mon pere et
ma m^re; ils sont all^s a la campagne pour deux ou
trois mois. 8. De quelle gare sont-ils partis ? 9. lis
sont partis de la gare du Nord. 10. Irez-vous a I'eglise
dimanche prochain ? 11. J'ai vu votre pere il y a une
quinzaine. 12. II arrivera a cinq heures precises.
13. II est maintenant pres de neuf heures. 14. Est-elle
ne'e en 1897 ? 15. Elle est nee le 7 juillet, 1899.
1 It will be noted that the tenses of aller given here correspond to thost
already presented in connection with regular verbs.
Conjugation of Aller 111
(-4) 1. We are going home to-morrow. 2. We shall
be at home before noon. 3. In what month do you go
to the country ? 4. In the month of July. 5. What
time is it ? 6. It is a quarter to two. 7. It is five
minutes to three. 8. It is 4.20. 9. To-day we shall go
home at half-past one. 10. He started for London last
evening by the 8.10 train. 11. His brother went to
London too, but he was very ill. 12. He will go home a
week from to-day. 13. It is already late. 14. What a
beautiful night! 15. Where were you going last even-
ing when we met you ? 16. We were going to the
theatre. 17. Do you often go to the theatre ? 18. It
is the of , 190-. 19. Yesterday was the ,
and to-moiTow will be the . 20. At what time did
they go away ? 21. They went away from the house at
a quarter to eleven and from the station a half-hour
later. 22. They came back by the midnight train.
23. Let us go to church next Sunday.
(B) 1. What time is it ? 2. At what time did you
come to school this morning ? 3. At what hour do you
go home ? 4. What day of the month is this ? 5. What
day of the week is it ? 6. Where shall you go a week
from Sunday ? 7. Do you go to school every day ?
8. Shall we be here a week from Friday ? 9. Did you
go to the country last Saturday ? 10. Did you come
back by the train, on foot, on horseback, or in a carriage ?
11. It is already ten o'clock, is it not ? 12. Is it noon ?
13. Shall you stay here till three ? 14. You go home
about two o'clock, do you not ? 15. Did you get here
this morning at exactly eight o'clock ? 16. Where were
you a fortnight ago ? 17. How many days are there in
a week? 18. Are there seven or eight? 19. But how
does one say, " A week ago " ?
112 Conjugation of Faire
51
Seasons. Weather.
la saison, the season. en (dans) quelle saison, at lohat season f
le printemps, the spring. au printemps, in spring.
V€te (m.), the summer. en 6te, in summer.
I'automne (m.), the autumn, en automne, in autumn.
riiiver (m.), Me winter, en hiver, in winter.
la neige, the snow. le champ, the Jield,
la pluie, the rain. le sable, the sand.
le vent, the wind. la cour, the yard, the court,
le tonnerre, the thunder. le proverbe, the proverb.
Faire (irregular), to do, to make.
Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Future.
je fais, / dOf I am doing^ je faisais. je ferai, / shall do or
tViioiB. [I make or am making, tu faisais. tu feras. [make.
il fait. 11 faisait. il fera.
nous faisons. nous faisions. nous ferons.
vous faites. vous faisiez. vous ferez.
ils font. ils f aisaient. lis f eront.
Imperative.
SINGULAR. plural.
fais, make^ do, faisons, let us make or do. faites, make, do.
Observe the following impersonal constructions :
Quel temps fait-il 1 What kind of weather is it ?
11 fait beau (temps),i It isfiie [weather).
II faisait mauvais bier, It was bad weather yesterday.
11 faisait de la pluie, It tvas rainy.
11 fera f roid demain. It will be cold to-morrow,
n fait du vent, It is windy.
II fait chaud, It is warm.
n fait froid, // is cold.
11 neige. It snows.
1 In Lesson 48, we had le temps used as the subject of the verb 8tre. It
cannot be the subject of any form of the verb faire.
Conjugation of Faire 113
n tonne, It thunderSi
II Eclair e, // lightena.
II grele, // hails.
II pleut (pres. ind. of pleuvoir, irreg.), It rains,
H pleuvait (imperf. iud.), It was raining, it rained.
U pleuvra (future), It will rain.
1. Le printemps est une belle saison. 2. C'est la
saison des fleurs. 3. Quand il pleut, prenez votre para-
pluie. 4. D'ou tombe la pluie ? 5. Quand il pleut ou
quand il neige, on dit qu'il fait mauvais (temps). 6. Le
temps est mauvais. 7. Voici un proverbe : apr^s la
pluie, le beau temps. 8. En quel mois sommes-nous k
present? 9. Les arbres out des feuilles en ete; mais
en hiver ils n'en ont plus. 10. Combien de jours a ce
mois-ci ? 11. Combien en aura le mois prochain ?
12. Que font les enfants d'une ecole ? 13. Notre cour
est belle tout I'^t^. 14. Tout-le monde aime les champs
au printemps, ils sont si verts. 15. Vous faites trop de
bruit ; n'en faites plus.
1. Name the seasons. 2. Do you like all the seasons ?
3. Why does one love the spring ? 4. Where do people
go in summer ? 5. Does it snow in summer or in
autumn ? (Use ni , . , ni in answer.) 6. When does
it snow ? 7. Do you like the snow ? 8. Is there much
in this part of the country? 9. Is it raining? 10. Was
it raining this morning when you came to school ?
11. Did you open your umbrella ? 12. Umbrellas are
very useful when it rains, are n't they ? 13. Is it cold
here ? 14. Is it too warm ? 15. In what season is
it cold ? 16. What season is this (in what season are
we) ? 17. Is it windy to-day ? 18. What kind of
weather is it in July ? 19. Does it often thunder in the
winter ? 20. What do the children do ^ at the seashore ?
1 See 12th sentence in French exercise of this Lesson.
8
114 -^ges. Dimensions
21. Where do they play ? 22. Where do they play in
the country ? 23. Are the pupils playing in the yard or
are they working in their class-room ? 24. You are
making a great deal of noise, — what are you doing ? (T
am closing the window.) 25, Is autumn the season of
fruits or flowers ?
52
Ages. Dimensions.
(1) In asking or stating ages, the following construc-
tions are used :
Quel Sge avez-vous ? How old are you f
J'ai vingt ans, I am tioentij years old.
Quel age a votre cousine % How old is your cousin f
Elle a quinze ans, et son She is Jifleen years old, and her little
petit frere en a dix,i brother is ten.
Elle est ag6e de quinze ans, She is Jifleen,
Elle est plus Sg6e que lui She is Jive years older than he-
de cinq ans,
A rSge de quarante ani,^ At the age of forty,
(2) Dimensions are expressed as follows :
De quelle hauteur est cette 6glise 1 "^ rrrt . • .t i • 7. .»w. » »„
^\ ^, V X a .^ ' 1- ^yWhatisiheheigfU of this church?
Quelle est la hauteur de cette eglise ? j ^ ^
Une Eglise haute de cent pieds, A church one hundred feet in height.
Une maison d'une largeur detrente pieds, A house thirty feet wide.
Un jardin de cent pieds de longueur, 2 A garden a hundred feet long,
L'escalier est large de dix pieds, |
L'escalier a dix pieds de largeur,2 ^ The staircase is ten feet broad.
L'escalier a une largeur de dix pieds, |
Cette table a six pieds de longueur sur quatre de largeur, This table is
six feet by four.
Get arbre-ci est plus haut que celui-lk de vingt pieds. This tree is twenty
feet taller than that.
1 Observe that the years must always be expressed ia French. If ans
has already occurred in the sentence, en takes its place.
* Long, large, and haut may be used for longueur, largeur, and hauteur
m this construction ; 6pais and profond are not so used instead of epaisseur
and profondeur.
Conjugation of Savoir 115
Savoir (irregular), to Tcnow {a fact).
Pbesent Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Future.
je sais, / know, je savais, / knew. je saorai. / shall know.
tu sais. ta savais. tu saoras.
il salt. il savait. il saura.
nous Savons. nous savions. nous sauroni.
vous savez. vous saviez. vous saurez.
lis savent. Ub savaient. ils sauront.
Tin Edifice, a building. I'^ge (m.), tke age.
rescalier (m.), the staircase, let dimensions (f.), dimensions.
long (m.), ^ , la hauteur, the heig/U.
longue(f.),j la. longMeur, the length.
large, biroad, icide. la largeur, the breadth, the width,
profond, deep. la profondeur, t}ie depth.
6pai8 (m.), V, . -, I'epaisseur (f.), the thickness,
6paisse (f.),/ le pouce, the thumb,.tke inch,
vraiment, trulg, really.
1. On a b§,ti encore un grand edifice dans la rue du
Temple. 2. Vraiment? je ne le savais pas. 3. Est-ce
une eglise ou une ^cole ? 4. C'est une ^cole. 5. Quel
grand Edifice ! 6. De quelle hauteur est-il ? 7. II a
cent pieds de hauteur. 8. Est-ce que cette ^cole est
dej^ occup^e ? 9. Combien d'el^ves y art-il ? 10. II y
en a six cents. 11. Quel age ont-ils ? 12. Les plus
ag^s ont peut-etre dix-sept ou dix-huit ans, et les raoins
Sges en ont treize ou quatorze. 13. Quel §,ge avez-vous ?
14. J'ai dix-neuf ans et demi. 15. Savez-vous quel S,ge
a votre soeur? 16. Elle a seize ans, et mon fr^re en a
treize. 17. Je ne sais pas pourquoi nos amis ne sont
pas encore revenus. 18. Nous le saurons bientot, je
pense.
1. How high is this table? 2. It is three feet high.
3. What are the other dimensions ? 4. It is four feet
wide by five and a half feet long. 5. I knew that it was
116 The Interrogative Pronoun Lequel
a foot longer than ours. 6. Here is another table ; this
one is thirty inches in height. 7. What a pretty little
box ! 8. It is a square one, is n't it ? 9. This water is
very deep. 10. What is its depth ? 11. It is said that
it is a hundred feet deep. 12. I know that it is over
(more than) forty feet in depth. 13. How old are you ?
14. Don't you know how old I am (my age) ? 15. I
know that you are two or three years older than I.
16. How old is your brother ? 17. Is he only six ?
18. He is over six; he will be seven the first of next
month. 19. Is Charles fourteen or fifteen years old ?
20. He is neither fourteen nor fifteen, he is only twelve
and a half. 21. Eeally ? Are you sure of it ? 22. Yes^
sir, I know it. 23. What is the length of this room ?
24. What a thick book !
53
The interrogative pronoun lequel, which^ which one,
has the following forms :
MASCULINE. FEMININE. MASCULINE. FEMININE.
lequel, which, which one. laquelle. lesquels. lesquelles.
duquel, of which, of which one. de laquelle. desquels. desquelles.
auquel, to which, to which one. h. laquelle. auxquels. auxquelles.
Observe the difference between the use of quel (adjective) and
lequel (pronoun) :
Quel homme ? Whic^ man ?
Quel est ce livre ? What is this booh ?
Lequel de ces hommes 1 Which of these men f
Dire (irregular), to say, to telL
Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. Future.
je dis, / say, I am saying, jedisais, / was saying, I said, je dirai, IshaU
tu dis. / do say. tu disais. / used to say, tu diras. [say.
il dit. il disait. il dira.
Conjugation of Dire
117
nous disons.
V0U8 dites.
ilB disent.
nous disions.
vous disiez.
ils disaient.
nous dirons.
vous direz.
ils diront.
SINGULAR,
dis, say.
une personne, a person.
une jeune personne, a young lady.
la jeune fille,i the girl.
les jeunes gens, the young men.
le miroir, the mirror,
le fauteoil, the arm-chair,
sauvage, wild.
domestique, domestic.
Imperative.
PLURAL.
disonfl, let us say. dites, say.
absent, absent.
garder, to guard, to keep.
emporter, to carry away or off'.
remporter, to carry back, to win.
envoy e, sent (past part.),
bien (adv.), well.
mieux (adv.), better.
le mieux (adv.), best.
aimer mieux, to like better, to prefer.
Notice: (1) The adverb bien is irregularly compared. (2) lu the
superlative of an adverb, le is iuvariable. (3) In the idiom aimer mieux,
mieux is not usually separated from aimer, except by a second negative
such as pas, jamais, plus, etc.
1. Lequel de ces jeunes gens est sourd ? 2. Dites-
vous que c'est celui qui est pres de la table ? 3. La-
quelle de ces jeunes personnes est votre cousine ?
4. Elle n'est pas ici, elle est sortie. 5. Duquel de ces
romans parliez-vous ? 6. Disiez- vous que vous aimiez
mieux celui-ci? 7. De laquelle de ces jeunes filles
avez-vous vequ ce joli miroir? 8. De Jeanne; c'est la
plus ch^re de mes amies. 9. A laquelle de ces jeunes
personnes a-t-il envoy^ les choses qu'il a achet^es ce
matin ? 10. De quelles jeunes personnes parlez-vous ?
11. Je parle de celles que nous avons vues Vet6 dernier k
la campagne. 12. Auxquels de ces messieurs doivent-
ils de I'argent ? 13. Lequel de ces deux ^crivains aimez-
1 Fille, daughter, girl, is rarely used in the latter sense without an
at participle.
Ill sont partis hier, they left i^etterday.
Elle a fini tout k Theure, she has just now finished.
(2) As direct objects, tout {everything, all) and rien
{nothing) precede the past participle, but personne
{nobody) follows it.
J'ai tout perdu, / lost everything.
Je n'ai rieu vu, / have seen nothing.
Je n'ai rencontre personne, / met nobody.
Rien and personne (like jamais, necer) require ne before the verb;
used alone or without a verb, they retain their negative meaning.
Personne n'est absent, nohodi/ is absent.
N'avez-vous vu personnel Personne.
Have you seen no one? No one.
N'avez-vous rien trouvel Kien.
Have you found nothing'? Nothing,
ne . . . pas,2 not. cette nuit, last night.
ne . . . point, not (emphatic), commence, hegun.\ past
not at all. ri, laughed. Iparti-
ne . . . jamais, never, dormi, slept. I cipleg.
ne . . . plus,'^ no more, no longer. §tre bien mis(e),* to be well dressed.
ne . . . guere, scarcely, but little. Stre mal mis(e), to be badly dressed.
ne . . . rien, nothing, not anything, enfin, finally, at last.
ne . . . TpeTSonnQ,nobody,not any- k "peine, hardly.
body, no one. tout k fait, wholly, quite.
Mer soir, last evening. tout k I'heure, just now.
ce soir, this evening, to-night. alors, then.
1 For example: tout de suite, immediately; sur le champ, instantly}
tout k Vheure, just now; avec plaisir, with pleasure. A peine, hardly,
precedes the past participle. Tout k faiti wholly, quite^ generally precedes.
2 In these negative expressions, the place of pas is taken by point,
jamais, etc. Personne alone follows the past participle.
* Plus (like jamais, rien, and personne), when used without a verb has
a^negative meaning. Plus d'argent, no more money ; plus de lemons, ^o
^^b'e lessons.
132 Position of Adverbs
1. Mon frere a beaucoup pleure ce matin. 2. Dites
moi pourquoi. 3. Je vous Pai deja dit. 4. II pensait
qu'il avait perdu son argent hier soir. 5. L'avait-il
vraiment perdu? 6.11 n'avait rien perdu. 7. Per-
Sonne n'a rien perdu. 8. Vous avez bien ecrit votre
th^me. 9. Qui a inal agi? 10. II n'a guere d'argent.
11. Cette lettre est tr&s bien ecrite. 12. Saviez-vous
alors que votre frere etait deja revenu hier ? 13. A
quelle heure serez-vous ici demain ? 14. Toutes ses
amies sont toujours bien mises. 15. Nous sommes partis
de Paris hier soir. 16. Personne n'est encore revenu.
17. Je n'ai point reussi. 18. Avez-vous tout vu ? 19. Je
n'ai rien vu. 20. Quand nous etions chez eux, ils
n'avaient encore rien vendu. 21. Personne n'a pris ce
que vous avez perdu. 22. Personne ? 23. Personne.
24. Mon ami parle bien italien.
For Oral Drill. — 1. He has said nothing ; he has seen
nobody ; he has done well. 2. They have seen every-
thing ; they have finally seen everything ; they will have
seen everything to-morrow. 3. Have you met no one ?
Have n't you met any one ? 4. There is not ; there was
•no longer anything ; there will be nobody. 5. Has he
lost anything ? Who has lost everything ? 6. He has
not lost anything ; he has not lost everything. 7. No-
body came just now ; nothing has happened to-day.
(J) 1. You have written your letter badly. 2. His is
very well written, 3. There was nobody here yesterday
at half-past five in (de) the afternoon. 4. When I met
your brother just now, he had seen everything. 5. I
have not seen anything yet (yet anything seen). 6. Our
neighbor has not had much business to-day. 7. Nobody
has bought anything because everything is so dear.
Idioms ivith Avoir 133
8. Those ladies are always well dressed. 9. She laughed
so much that I scolded her. 10. I think that poor man
has always been so sad that he has never laughed.
11. He has no money at all, and he has scarcely any
friends. 12. He has lost everything. 13. No more ^
noise, please. 14. Did you meet no one this morning ?
15. No one. 16. What have you for me ? 17. Nothing.
18. Let us not wait any longer, let us finish these
sentences. 19. We have hardly begun.
{B) 1. Did you sleep well last night ? 2. At what
time did you get here ? 3. Has written a letter ?
4. Has he written it well ? 5. Are you very fond of
dogs (Do you like much the dogs) ? 6. Have you many
dogs? 7. How did you like those dogs we saw to-day?
8. Do you speak English? 9. Do you speak French
well ? 10. What have you lost ? 11. Who has lost
nothing ? 12. Is there anything in this drawer ?
13. Who is knocking ? 14. What were you doing a
moment ago ? 15. Who laughed just now ? 16. Where
shall you spend the night ? 17. Whom do you see in
the street ? 18. Don't you see anybody ? 19. Have
you entirely finished your exercise ? 20. Are there no
more sentences ?
59
Idioms with Avoir.
(1) In the following idioms avoir is used instead of
the verb to he :
avoir chaud. to he warm. avoir soif. to he thirsty.
avoir froid, to he cold. avoir sommeil, to be sleepy.
avoir f aim, to he hungry. avoir honte, to he ashamed*
1 See note, page 131.
134 Idioms icitti jlvoir
avoir peur, to be afraid. avoir besoin (de), to need.
avoir raison, to be right. avoir Tintention (de), to intend.
avoir tort, to be wrong. avoir mal a, to have a pain in, to ache.
In these expressions Men is generally used for very or quite : vous
avez bien raison, il a bien penr.
Qu'avez-vous ? What is the matter with you 9
Je n'ai rien, nothing is the matter with me,
II a quelqne chose, something ails him.
Qu'y a-t-il I What is the matter ?
II n'y a rien, there is nothing the matter.
Nlmporte, no matter., never mind.
Recall idiomatic use of avoir in asking or stating a person's age
(Lesson 52).
Quel age a-t-il % TTow old is he?
II a trente ans, et son frire en a vingt-cinq, he is thirty, and his
brother ia twenty- five.
(2) In speaking of parts of the body, the definite
article is ordinarily used for my, his, her, etc., if the
possessor is the subject of the sentence.
II ale bras cass6, his arm is broken.
Elle a les yeux bleus, she has blue eyes.
Montrez-moi la main droite, show me your right hand.
(3) With the three words mal, froid, and chand, the
person spoken of is made the subject of avoir.
II a mal au bras, his arm is sore, or aches.
J'ai bien froid aux mains, my hands are very cold.
le corps, the body. le cou, the neck.
la tete, the head. la gorge, the throat.
les cheveux (m.), the hair. I'epaule (f.), the shoulder.
la figure, \ i ^ la poitrine, the breast.
le visage, / le coeur, the heart.
la bouche, the mouth. le bras, the arm.
la levre, the lip. le coude, the elbow.
la dent, the tooth. le poignet, the ivrist.
la langue, the tongue. la main, the hand.
Idioms with Avoir 135
la joue, the cheek, le doigt, the finger,
I'oreille (f.), the ear, le pouce, the thumb,
roBil (in.), the eye. la jambe, the leg.
le nez, the nose. le genou, the knee.
le menton, the chin. le pied, the foot.
1. N'avez-vous pas trop chaud si pr^s du feu ?
2. J'avais froid tout a Theure, mais inainteiiant j'ai trop
chaud. 3. Vous avez sommeil, n'estce pas ? 4. Vous
avez raison, monsieur, j'ai bieu sommeil. 5. Saviez-vous
qu'il avait perdu le bras gauche ? 6. Qu'avez-vous ce
matin ? 7. J'ai mal a la tete. 8. Vous avez faim, peut-
etre. 9. Non, monsieur, j'ai trop mang4 10. Donnez-
moi la main dloite. 11. Avez-vous I'intention de revenir,
demain ? 12. Qu'y a-t-il ? 13. Eien. 14. Elle a tort.
15. N'importe. 16. lis ont froid aux mains. 17. Ne
voyez-vous pas qu'il a perdu la jambe droite ? 18. Quel
S.ge a votre soeur ? 19. Elle a vingt ans, et son amie en
a vingt et un. 20. Elle a les yeux noirs. 21. Le coude,
le genou et le pied sont des parties du corps. 22. II ne
parle plus, parce qu'il a mal a la gorge.
{A) 1. His eyes hurt him. 2. That old man has only
one arm. 3. He lost one when he was young. 4. You
are wrong, I think. 5. The elbow and the wrist are
parts of the arm. 6. What are you afraid of? 7. I am
not afraid of anything. 8. We intend to go to the sea-
shore next summer. 9. How many fingers have we?
10. My knee aches. 11. Give me your hand. 12. Which
one, — the right or the left ? 13. In winter my feet are
always cold. 14. He has acted badly and he is not
ashamed of his conduct. 15. No matter. 16. We are
cold and hungry. 17. Tell me what is the matter with
him. 18. Nothing is the matter with him. 19. He has
a broken wrist. 20. She has blue eyes and brown hair.
21. What a beautiful face !
136 Conditional Mode
(B) 1. Are your ears cold ? 2. Is it cold to-day ?
3. Is it too warm in this room ? 4. What is the matter
with you ? 5. Have you the tooth-ache ? 6. Do you
need this pencil ? 7. Have you one ? 8. Whose is
this one ? 9. Who is thirsty ? 10. Where are your
teeth ? 11. Have you a sore throat ? 12. Is anything
the matter with you ? 13. Am I right or wrong ?
14. Are you always right ? 15. Has he blue eyes or
brown ? 16. How many ears do we have ? 17. Have
we more eyes than ears ? 18. Name ten parts of the
head. 19. Name several other parts of the body.
20. Do you intend to stay here this evening ? 21. You
are sleepy ; did n't you sleep well last night ? 22. What
is the matter ? 23. Is there nothing the matter ?
24. Are you hungry ? 25. You are always hungry, are
you not ?
60
Conditional Mode.
(1) The present conditional of most verbs may be
formed by adding -ais to the infinitive. The first per-
son conditional of any French verb is the first person
of the future with s added. The endings are the same
as those of the imperfect.^
TERMINATIONS : -als, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient.
Infinitive. Future. Conditional.
porter, to carry, je porterai, / shall earn/, je porterais, I should carry.
finir, je finirai, je finirais.
recevoir, je recevrai, je recevrais.
vendre, je vendrai, je vendrais.
avoir, j'aurai, j'aurais.
1 In other words, to conjugate the conditional, add s to the first singular
of the future and conjugate with the endings of the imperfect.
Conditional Sentences
137
§tre,
aller,
faire,
dire,
savoir,
voir.
je serai,
j'irai,
je ferai,
je dirai,
je saurai,
je verrai,
je serais,
j'irais.
je ferais.
je dirais.
je saurais.
je verrais.
Present Conditional of Porter.
je porterais, / should or would nous porterions.
tu porterais. carry. vous porteriez.
il porterait. ils porteraient.
Conditional Sentences.
(2) The conditional does not denote a condition, but
the conclusion to a condition. Neither the future nor
the conditional is used after si ^ (t/), except in the
sense of whether,
Je ne sais pas s'il r^ussira, / do not hww whether he will succeed.
Je ne savais pas s'U r^ussirait, / did not know whether he would succeed,
(3) Examine the following examples of conditional-
sentences :
Condition.
Si vous Stes ici domain,
If you are here to-morrow,
If you will be here to-morrow
Si vous 6tiez ici maintenant.
If you were here nowy
Si vous restiez ici,
If you stayed here,
If you would stay here.
If you were to stay here,
-Si vous 6tiez rest6 ici.
If you had stayed here,
Conclusion.
je serai content.
/ shall be glad.
je serais content.
/ should be glad.
j'aurais ^t^ content.
/ should have been glad.
1 i is elided in si only when followed by U or ils : sll est, s'ils sont.
138 Conditional Sentences
It will be seen from these examples that the if
clause takes the present tense when the conclusion is
in the future, and the imperfect when the conclusion
is in the conditional. Notice that in the examples this
rule holds true, whatever the corresponding English
form may be.^
If you do (or will), I shall.
If you did (or would), I should.
tromper, to deceive. parmi, among.
oser, to dare. le choix, the choice.
sans, without, hut for. longtemps, a long time, long,
plus longtemps, longer.
il y aurait, there would he.
y aurait-U, would there be?
1. Si ndus avions le temps, nous visiterions cette ville
dont il parlait tout a Theure. 2. Elle est pleine de
tableaux iiiagnifiques. 3. Je vous gronderai bien, si
vous oubliez ma bague. 4. lis ne b^tiraient pas tant
de maisons, s'ils n'avaient pas beaucoup d'argent.
5. Que feriez-vous, si vous aviez autant d'argent qu'eux ?
6. Que ferez-vous lorsque vous serez a Londres ? 7. S'il
fait trop cbaud ici, nous passerons dans la bibliotheque.
8. Si elle avait remporte le prix de franqais, sa mere
aurait ete bien heureuse. 9. N'ai-je pas raison ? 10. Si
vous aviez assez d'argent, ou iriez-vous ? 11. S'il faisait
cela, il tromperait ses raeilleurs amis. 12. Sans raoi,
elle serait tombee. 13. Seriez-vous parti aujourd'hui,
si vous aviez requ cette lettre dont vous me parliez tout
a rheure ? 14. Repondriez-vous a sa lettre, si vous
aviez de Pencre et une meilleure plume ? 15. Je vous
aurais attendu jusqu'^ deux heures, si j'avais eu le temps.
^ Recall rules for quand, aussitot que, etc. (Lesson 48), which take the
future if futurity is implied, and notice that the contrary is true with si, the
present beine: required even if fntnritv is imolied.
Conditional Sentences 139
For Oral Drill. — 1. He will receive; he would receive.
2. If he will sell ; if he would sell ; if he sold ; if he
sells ; if he were to sell. 3. If he has sold ; if he had
sold. 4. We shall go ; we should go. 5. If we go ; if
we were to go. G. She has goue ; she had gone ; she
will have gone ; she would have gone. 7. If you see ;
if you will see ; if you saw ; if you had seen. 8. I shall
do it, if you speak of it ; I should do it, if you spoke of
it ; I should have done it, if you had spoken of it ; I will
do it, if you will speak of it. 9. Would you do it, if I
spoke of it ? 10. Will you do it, if I speak of it ?
11. Would you not have done it, if I had spoken of it ?
1. If he does not obey his parents, he will be unhappy
all his life. 2. She would deceive her father, if she
dared. 3. But she would not dare. 4. If she had
stayed longer yesterday, she would have seen a friend of
hers. 5. If you will be here to-morrow evening, you
will see him, I think. 6. We should be glad, if he were
here now. 7. If it had n't been for you (but for you), I
should have lost everything I had. 8. If you were not
here, where would you be ? 9. If you are not at church
next Sunday, where shall I find you ? 10. Would he not
return all the money he received, if he were not so poor ?
11. If she does not prepare her lesson, what shall we do ?
12. Would you choose this book, if you had your choice
among all these works ? 13. Why would you not choose
this one ? 14. Have you ever visited the largest cities
of this country ? 15. Should you visit them if you had
time ? 16. Shall you visit them when you have money
enough ? 17. If you are at liberty this evening, shall
we go to the theatre together ?
140 Interrogative Advei'hs
61
Interrogative Adverbs.
(1) If a sentence begins with an interrogative adverb
(pourquoi, oil, quand, comment, etc.), the rest of the sen-
tence follows the regular order used in asking a question
in French (Lesson 5).
Pourquoi votre frdre est-il si malheureuxl
Why is your brother so unhappy ?
Quand ma m^re est-elle partie 1 When did my mother leave f
A queUe heure la votre est-elle arriv^e chez elle ?
At what time did yours get home ?
(2) An interrogative lequel, laquelle, etc., in the objec-
tive case, requires the same order.
Lesquels de ses cMens votre f r^re a-t-il perdus ?
Which (ones) of his dogs has your brother lost ?
(3) After oil with the verb in a simple tense, the sub-
ject is not usually repeated in the form of a pronoun.
Oil est r6glise dont vous parliez tout k Theure 1
Where is the church of which you were just now speaking?
Oh demeurent vos amis % Where do your friends live f
But OU vos amis sont-ils aU6s 1 or, Vos amis ou sont-ils all6s 1
Composite Subject.
When a verb has two or more subjects of different
grammatical persons, they are usually summed up by
nous or vous, with which the verb agrees.^
Ma mere et moi, nous sommes all^s chez vous.
My mother and I ivent to your house.
Mon fr^re et vous, vous §tes partis k cinq heures precises.
My brother and you started at exactly five o'clock.
Iiui et moi, nous le verrons domain.
He and I shall see him to-morrow,
1 If the nous or vous is omitted, the verb agrees with whichever pro-
noun is understood.
Interrogative Adverbs 141
Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle.
As a mark of respect, the words monsieur, madame,
mademoiselle, or their plurals, are placed before the
adjective votre or vos followed by pere, mere, frere,
soeur, oncle, cousin, ami, etc., or their plurals.
J'ai rencontr6 monsieur votre p6re et madame votre m6re.
/ met f/our father and mother.
Comment se porte mademoiselle votre soeur 1
How is your sister f
Jacques, James. maintenant que, now that (or now when
Guillaume, William. that is uuderstood).
le quartier, the quarter, partout, everywhere.
le musee, the museum. quelque part, somewhere,
lebagage, \,^^ ^ nulle part,i no^.V..re.
lesbagages,j -^-^ ^ s6v6rement, scyere/^.
1. Mou frere et moi, nous sommes un peu malades
aujourd'hui. 2. Pourquoi monsieur votre fr^re n'a-t-il
pas encore r^pondu a ma lettre ? 3. Si vous etes libre
demain soir, que ferez-vous ? 4 Quand vous serez libre,
je vous visiterai. 5. Combien madame votre m^re
a-t-elle pay^ sa maison? 6. Ou votre soeur a-t-elle
cache ma montre? 7. EUe ne Ta cach^e nulle part;
la voila sur la table. 8. Quand mon ami Louis et
moi, nous demeurions ensemble dans le quartier latin,
nous visitions souvent les musees et les theatres.
9. Nous ne Poublierons jamais, j'en suis sur. 10. Com-
ment votre ami et vous trouviez-vous les tableaux dans
le musee du Luxembourg ? 11. Nous les trouvions
magnifiques. 12. Pourquoi mesdemoiselles vos soeurs
ne sont-elles pas contentes maintenant qu'elles ont requ
tant d'argent ? 13. Ma m^re et moi n'aurions-nous
trouve personne, si nous etions all^s chez vous hier
^ Nulle part requires ne before the verb.
142 Personal Pronouns
a quatre heures de Papres-midi ? 14. Non, monsieur
Guillaume, vous n'auriez trouve personne.
1. Henry and I have returned from London. 2. When
did you and he arrive ? 3. We arrived a half-hour ago.
4. Where is your baggage ? 5. We left it somewhere.
6. Have n't you looked for it ? 7. Yes, we have looked
for it everywhere. 8. Mary and I saw it at the station.
9. Why didn't you and she bring it? 10. Because we
were not strong enough. 11. What shall we do ? 12. I
have spoken to James about it; he will bring it this
afternoon. 13. If it hadn't been for you, we should
have lost it. 14. At what time shall you and I go
home ? 15. When will your parents visit us ? 16. Your
mother and sister will be here on Tuesday, the 16th, but
your father will stay in Paris until the 20th. 17. You
forget that you and your brother will have no prize this
month, because you have not worked well enough.
18. You know that you always succeed when you
work. 19. If you deceive him, he will punish you
severely. 20. Which of her friends is your mother
visiting ? 21. She is visiting a lady who lives in the
American quarter. 22. We shall go nowhere to-day,
but to-morrow we shall go to the country.
62
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
(1) There are two classes of personal pronouns, dis-
junctive and conjunctive.
Disjunctive Pronouns,
moi, /, v\e. nous, we^ us.
toi, thou, thee, vous, you.
lui, he, him, eux, they^ them (m.).
elle, she, her, elles, they, them (f.).
Personal Pronouns
143
moi-meme, myself. nous-memes, ourselves.
toi-meme, thijself. vous-memes, yourselves.
lui-meme, himself, eux-memes, themselves (m).
elle-m§me, herself elles-meme8,»s.
2. Henri y a demeure pendant trois ans, de 1900 a 1903.
3. II etait trois lieures quand j'ai commence mes exer-
cices. 4. II est raaintenant quatre heures et demie; je
travaille done depuis une heure et deraie.' 5. J'etudierai
encore une demi-heure, et ensuite je visiterai ma tante
qui est un peu malade depuis hier. 6. Votre cousin
n'est-il pas k Londres depuis longtemps ? 7. Oui, mon-
sieur, mon cousin demeure a Londres depuis trois mois.
8. J'ai demeure a Londres quinze jours, il y a bien long-
temps. 9. J'etais alors tres jeune, et j'aimais le plaisir
plus que le travail. 10. .T*ai peu voyage depuis, mais je
pense que je visiterai bientot Paris. 11. Quand etes-vous
alle a Edimbourg ? 12. 11 y aura trois mois a la fin de
la semaine prochaine. 13. Combien y a-t-il de temps que
votre fr^re est revenu ? 14. II y a quinze jours qu'il est
arrive de Bruxelles. 15. Combien de temps etes-vous
restes a Paris ? 16. Nous sommes rest^s trois jours
a Marseille, deux k Lyon, deux k Dijon, et huit k
Paris. 17. Combien de temps resterez-vous a Londres ?
18. Quinze jours seulement.
(A) 1. Is n't it your uncle who lives in that old house?
2. Yes, sir, it is he ; he has lived in it for over twenty
years. 3. How long have your father and mother been
travelling in Europe ? 4. They have been there for
several months. 5. What cities have they visited ?
6. They have visited all of the most interesting cities of
176 Duration of Time
France, Grermany, and Holland. 7. How long were they
at the Hague ? 8. They were there two or three weeks.
9. It is there that they read Dumas's La Tulipe Koire
for the first time. 10. They were there when you were,
were they not ? 11. When they were in Paris, they sent
us a beautiful gift. 12. Have n't they been in Switzer-
land yet ? 13. They are there now. 14, How long
have they been there ? 15. For seven or eight weeks,
I think. 16. Are they fond of the Alps ? 17. Very ;
my father, especially. 18. Where will they spend the
winter ? 19. They will be in Kome four months ; then
they will go to Naples, where they will stay from the first
of April until the fifth or sixth of May. 20. They will
be in America before June first. '
(B) 1. At what time did you come in ? 2. What
time is it now ? 3. How long have you been here ?
4. How long shall you stay here ? 5. At what time did
these pupils come to school this morning ? 6. Did
they come yesterday ? 7. How long did they stay ?
8. Who stayed the longer, you or I ? 9. I was here
an hour ago ; where were you ? 10. Were you alone ?
11. Where do you live ? 12. Have you lived there long ?
13. How long ? 14. I have been looking for my pen
for ten minutes ; have you seen it ? 15. Who took it ?
16. Didn't you know it was mine ? 17. You have some
friends who have been travelling for a long time, have
you not ? 18. Have n't they always travelled a great
deal ? 19. How long were they in Canada last summer?
20. How long have you studied French ? 21. Who
studies German ? 22. How long has he studied it ?
23. How long did you study the seventy -first lesson ?
24. When did you study it?
The Past Definite T'ense
177
73
Tbe Past Definite (Preterite).
avoir.
Stre.
donner.
j'eus, / had.
je fus, I was.
je donnai, / gave
ta eus.
tu fus.
ta donnas.
Ueut.
Ufut.
il donna.
nous eilmes.
nous f dmes.
nous donnEmes.
vous elites.
vous fates.
vous donnates.
ils eurent.
ils furent.
ils donndrent.
finir.
recevoir.
vendre.
je finis, I finished.
je rcqus, / received.
je vendis, I sdd.
tu finis.
tu requs.
tu vendis.
ilfinit.
il requt.
il vendit.
nous finimes.
nous recumes.
nous vendimes.
yons flnites.
vous recates.
vous vendites.
ils finirent.
ils re^urent.
ils vendirent.
Using the above paradigms as models, learn to co7ijugate
the past definite of any regular verb; also, of the irregu^
lar verbs already given: aller, j'allai, tu alias, etc; faire,
je fis, etc; dire, je dis, etc.; savoir, je sus, etc; voir, je
vis, etc Observe tJiat the only change of vowel occurs in
the third person plural of the first conjugation.
Use of Past Tenses.
(1) We have seen (Lessons 10 and 67) that the con-
versational past tense, denoting what happened, is the
past indefinite (perfect).
(2) We have also seen (Lesson 42) that the imperfect
is used to express a customary or continued past action,
or a description of the state of things when something
took place or while it was taking place ; also with si in
conditional clauses (Lesson 60).
12
178 The Past Definite Tense
(3) The ;past definite is used only in a formal nar-
rative ^ or historical style to denote an action or state
which was definitely completed in past time.
Study carefully the following examples :
J'ai vu votre cousine il y a quelques jours, I saw your cousin afow
days ago.
Oh etait-elle 1 Elle etait chez elle.
Where was she ? She was at home.
Etes-vous all6 la voir 1 did you go and see her?
Quand j'etais h, Paris, j'allais souvent k I'opera.
When I was in Paris^ I ojlen went {used to go) to the opera.
Le prince Edouard dans cette bataille ne perdit pas soixante hommes.
Prince Edward in that battle did not lose sixty men.
Les anciens Egyptians embaumaient les morts, les Grecs et les
Bomains les briilaient.
The ancient Egyptians embalmed the dead, the Greeks and Romans
burned them.
On embanma le corps d' Alexandre et on le transporta en Egypte.
They embalmed the body o/ Alexander and carried it to Egypt,
le libraire, the bookseller. le paysan, the peasant^ countryman,
I'ennemi (m.), the enemy. louer, to praise.
la bataille, the battle. couronner, to crown.
une 6p6e, a sword, s' eerier, to exclaim, to cry out,
1. Le roi donna dix louis au paysan et lui pardonna
sa faute. 2. Un officier blesse fut transporte chez lui,
ou deux medecins furent appeles. 3. On demanda a
un petit garQon, pourquoi il desirait du sel; c'est, re-
pondit-il, pour la viande qu'on me donnera. 4. Aussi-
tot qu'il eut fini son travail, il partit pour la campagne.
5. II me demanda pardon et m'assura qu'il me donnerait
1 The past anterior (compound of the past definite) expresses an action
immediately prior to that expressed by the past definite. It is used only
after quand, anssitot que, k peine, etc.
Apres qu'il eut parle, il s'assit, after he had spoken, he sat down.
A peine fut-il arriv§ que midi sonna, he had scarcely arrived when it
struck twelve.
The Past Definite Teyise 179
tout ce que je desirais. 6. La reine lui donna de beaux
bijoux; ils ^taient dans une boite d'or. 7. Quand nous
etions jeunes, je travaillais pendant que ma soeur jouait.
8. EUe chantait tous les jours. 9. Son raaitre lui pr^ta
quinze francs et lui demanda s'il en ^tait content.
10. Voici la petite histoire que Von m'a racontee : II y
avait une fois un homme qui ^tait tres pauvre. 11 avait
une fern me qui ^tait malade depuis longtemps et cinq
enfants qui avaient tou jours faim. Un jour une f^e
(a fairy) arriva et lui dit, " Mou pauvre ami, je vous
apporte quelque chose dont vous avez besoin/' etc,
1. The tree fell and killed the man who was cutting
it. 2. Their daughter won the prize and received a
beautiful book. 3. After the death of the queen, they
crowned her son. 4. The old book-seller often told us
stories, and one day he told us the story of his life.
5. The poor man cut the bread and afterwards he gave
the knife to a child that was standing near him. 6. My
father says that he used to forget everything when
he was at school. 7. Now he never forgets anything.
8. Who won the battle, the English or the French ?
9. Napoleon lost the battle of Waterloo. 10. Was he
not a great general in spite of that? 11. At last the
general perceived the enemy. 12. He perceived that
the soldiers were not far from the city which he was
defending. 13. What did he do ? 14. He seized his
sword and cried, " Let us receive them well ! " 15. What
happened then ? 16. His men obeyed him immediately
and defended the city. 17. Tlie king praised the gen-
eral and gave him a magnificent sword.
The names, descriptive past^ given to the imperfect, and the narrative
past, given to the past definite, in the Grandgent grammars, are highlj
suggestive of the proper use of these tenses.
180 Peculiaiities of the First Conjugation
74
Peculiarities in Verbs of the First Conjugation.
^11 the verbs of the first conjugation but two (aller,
to gOf and envoyer, to send) are regular, and conse-
quently are conjugated like donner. A few present
some peculiarities caused by changes made for the
sake of pronunciation. These verbs are: —
1st. Those having an e mute before their last syl-
lable, such as mener, lever, appeler, jeter.
2d. Those having an e before their last syllable, as
•flebrer, pr^ferer, esperer.
8d. Those ending in -yen , ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^
\
4th, Those ending in -car or -ger.
E mute before a Final Syllable.
Verbs of the first conjugation having an e mute
in the syllable next before the ending of the infinitive
change that e mute to e, when, in the course of the
conjugation, the syllable following contains e mute,
lever, to lift.
PaESBXT Indicative. Past Defikitb
je ldv6. je levai,
tu IdTM.
etc
il leve.
FUTDRB.
nous levon&
Je leveral.
▼ous levez.
etc
Us levent.
CONDITIOXAt,
je leverais.
je levais.
etc
ta levais.
Imperative.
etc
Uve.
Fast Indbfinitb.
levons.
J'ai lev6.
levez.
Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 181
Exceptions : — Most verbs ending in -eler, as appeler,
and -eter, as jeter, double the 1 or the t, instead of
changing e mute to e, the effect on the pronunciation
being the same.
appeler, to call ; jeter, to throw.
Present Indicxtivb. Past Definitb,
appelle, jette. appelal, jetaL
appelles, jettes. Future,
appeUe, jette. appellerai, jettbraL
appelons, jetona. Conditional.
appelez, jetez. appellerais, jetterais.
appellent, jettent. Imperative.
Imperfect Indicatitb. appelle, jette.
appelais, jetals, appelons, jetons.
etc. appelez, jetez.
Acheter, to hiy^ geler, tofreeze^ and a few other verba
follow the rule for lever, instead of doubling 1 or t:
j'ach^te, tn achates, 11 achate, nous achetons, etc. ; j'ach^terai, etc.
je gele» tu g^les, il g^le, noug gelons, etc ; je gelerai, etc.
£ before a Final Syllable.
All verbs of the first conjugation having an 6 in
the syllable next before the ending of the infinitive
change that 6 into fe, when the following syllable con-
tains e mute, except in the future and in the condi-"
tionaL
cfl^rer, to celebrate,
pBE8E?rr Indicatitb. Past Dbfinitb.
je c6ldbre. je o^l6brai«
tn c^l^bres. etc
il celebre. Futcbb.
nous c61^broii8. je ceUbreraL
vous e616bres. ta o^Ubrtxai^
ils o^l^brent. etc.
182 Peculiarities of the First Conjugation
Imperfect Indicative. Conditional.
je c61ebrais, je cel6brerais,
ejtc. etc.
Past Indefinite. Imperative.
j'ai celebr6, celebre.
etc. celebrons.
celebrez.
Note carefully that there is no change of accent in the future oi
conditional of verbs having 6 in the penult.
mener,^ to guide, to lead, to take. preferer, to prefer,
amener, to bring (to escort hither). repeter, to repeat.
ramener, to bring hack. posseder, to possess.
emmener, to take awaj/. la bonne, the maid.
promener, to take out for a walk, a drive, etc. la fete, the festival, the birth-
se promener, to go for a walk, a drive, etc. day.
appeler, to call. la poup^e, the doll.
s'appeler, to be called, to be named. le cas, the case.
Jeter, to throw. le chiflfre, thefigure^ the num.'
acheter, to buy. her.
geler, to freeze. la glace, the ice.
esp6rer, to hope. ailleurs, elsewhere.
r6g^er, to reign. d' ailleurs, besides.
fort (adv.), hard, reri/.
1. Ma petite soeur prefere ces poup^es-ci k celIes-1^,
mais je trouve celles-la bien plus belles que celles-ci.
2. Est-ce que vous n'exagerez pas un peu ? 3. J'exagere
peut-etre quelquefois, mais je n'exagere pas dans ce cas-ci.
4. Qaand celebrerez-vous la fete de votre cousine ? 5. Je
pense que sa fete tombe le 13 du mois prochain. 6. Le
13 ! c*est un bien vilain chifPre ! Je prefererais le 12 ou
le 14. 7. D'ailleurs le 13 est un dimanche, nous eelebre-
rons cette f§te le 12. 8. Esperons que le temps sera beau ;
I'ann^e derni^re nous avons eu un temps tres orageux.
1 Distinguish carefully difference in meaning of mener and its com-
pounds and porter and its corresponding compounds: porter, to carry, to
bear; apporter, to bring; rapporter, to bring back; emporter, to carry
away.
Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 183
9. Vous ^tes bien content ce soir : il g^le tr^s fort, vous
patinerez demain. 10. Nous n'avons pas patine Phiver
dernier; il n'a presque jamais gele. 11. Oii achetez-vous
vos livres et vos plumes ? 12. J'achete mes livres, mes
plumes et mes journaux chez le libraire au coin de
notre rue. 13. Comment t'appelles-tu, mon enfant ?
14. Marie ! c'est un bien joli nom ; Marie, mene-moi pr^s
de ta maman. 15. La bonne prom^nera les enfants ce
soir ; ils ne sont pas prets maintenant. 16. N'est-ce pas
vous qui poss^dez tant de grandes maisons ? 17. Non,
monsieur, ce n'est pas moi, c'est raon frere.
1. Would they not prefer these books to those ? 2. Let
us hope that they will always be happy. 3. Do you
not exaggerate his fortune ? 4. I never exaggerate any-
thing ; he possesses many houses and lands. 5. I hope
you will not forget the book I lent your sister on Tues-
day last. 6. When will you celebrate ray birthday ?
7. [On] what day does it fall ? 8. On the 13th of the
month. I think it is also on a Friday. 9. Unfortunate
[man], we shall never celebrate your birthday ; choose
another day, if you please, but do not choose the 23d,
because we shall be too busy that day. 10. If you bring
your friends we will take them with us. 11. When will
the maids take the children out to walk ? 12. I shall
buy thos^ pictures for my mother. 13. Where are you
taking my brother ? 14. I am taking him to school
15. Til row away that pear, it is very bitter. 16. Guess
who called us when we Were out walking. 17. I hope
that we shall skate to-morrow. 18. Is it freezing a little
this evening? 19. I think it is freezing hard; it has
been freezing for [the last] twenty-four hours. 20. The
ice will be strong enough to-morrow.
184 Peculiarities of the First Conjugation
75
Verbs ending in -yer.
In verbs ending in -yer, the y becomes i before e
mute.
However, verbs ending in -ayer may keep the y thronghont oi
change to i before e mnte : payer, to pay, je paye or je pale, je payerai
or je paierai In verba in -eyer the y remains unchanged.
employer, to employ ^ to use.
Present Indicativb. Past Definite.
j'emploie. j'employai.
ta emploies. tn employas.
il emploie. U employa.
nous employons. nous employames.
vous employez. vous employates.
ils emploient. ils employerent.
Imperfbot Indicativb. Futurb.
j'employais, etc. j'emploierai, etc
nous employions, eta Conditional Present.
Past Indefinitb. f emploierais, etc
f ai employ^ Imperativb.
etc. emploie.
employons.
employez.
Verbs ending in -cer or -ger.
In a verb ending in -cer or -ger, c or g, being soft in
the infinitive, must be kept soft throughout the verb.
When, therefore, in any tense, e or g would be followed
by a or 0, a cedilla is placed under the c and a silent e ^
is placed aftei the & to keep them soft.
placer, to place ; pla^ant, ptaclng ; nous plaqons, we place,
manger, to eat f mangeant, eating ; nous mangeons, we eat,
1 Observe that the e inserted after g to keep it soft is merely an ortho<
graphical sign, and has no effect except on the quality of the g. See Intro*
daction, page 8.
Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 185
commencer, to begin. proteger, to protect.
Fbesent Indicatiyb.
Je commence. je protege.
ta commences. tn protdgpes.
tl commence. II protdge.
nous commenqons* nous prot^geona.
yeas commencez. vous prot^gez.
lis commencent. lis protegent.
Imperfbct Indicative.
je prot^geais,
etc.
Je commeni^ais,
etc.
nous oommenoioas,
etc.
Je commensal,
etc.
lis oommencdrent
Je commenoeraL
Past Definite.
Future.
nous prot^gions,
etc.
je prot^geaiy
etc.
lis prot^g^rent.
* je prot6gerai.
Conditional Present.
je protSgerais.
d6ranger, to disturb.
se d^ranger, to disturb one*B self, to be
disturbed,
obliger, to oblige.
le coin, the corner,
le devoir, duty, exercise (lesson), task.
sale, dirtff.
asses, rather^ somewhat.
Je commencerais.
appnyer, to support, to lean,
aboyer, to bark,
efiErayer, to frighten,
balayer, to sweep,
un balai, a broom.
annoncer, to announce,
prononcer, to ponounee,
menacer, to threaten,
corriger, to correct,
envoyer, to send. Future and conditional, irregular: j'enverrai,
j'enverrais.
1. Essayez ce crayon-ci, c'est mon meilleur. 2. Vrai-
ment, il est tvfes bon ; j'essaierai aussi votre plume.
3. Combien pay ez- vous vos plumes et vos crayons? 4. Je
paie tres cher les plumes et les crayons que j'ach^te chea
186 Peculiarities of the First Conjugation
le libraire du coin. 5. Nettoyez un peu cette table, elle
est toujours sale. 6. Monsieur, je nettoie cette table
tons les matins. 7. Ce vilain petit chien que vous
araenez toujours avec vous aboie presque tout le temps.
8. On dit que les chiens qui aboient ne mordent jamais.
9. Le proverbe est assez juste, mais votre chien a mordu
hier le doigt de Charles. 10. Appuyez, s'il vous plait,
ma chaise contre cette table. Merci. 11. Je mangeais,
je pense, lorsque vous etes entre. 12. Vous mangiez,
en effet, avec vos freres et vos soeurs, mais je n'ai de-
range personne. 13. Nous ne prononqons pas les langues
anciennes mieux que vous. 14. Si nous derangeons
votre fr^re, maintenant qu'il est occupe, il ne sera pas
content. 15. J'acheterai cette montre la semaine pro-
chaine ; je n'ai pas assez d'argent aujourd'hui. 16. Pro-
tegeons les malheureux. 17. Si vous menacez cet enfant,
il ne travaillera plus. 18. Ne menaQons personne.
(A) 1. You will frighten your mother if you break
that glass. 2. They would pay us this evening what
they owe us, if they had money enough. 3. She is very
lazy ; she does not employ her time well. 4. If you pay
my aunt before Saturday, I am certain that she will be
rather pleased. 5. Why does he not send that book
to his cousin ? 6. Why will you not send my letters to
your sister as soon as you receive them ? 7. Those dogs
bark all night. 8. Have you not cleaned my watch ?
9. Do not try his pen j it is a poor one. 10. My brother
was eating his breakfast, when my aunt came in this
morning. 11. He used to correct all my letters and all
my exercises. 12. Let us not dine before seven o'clock.
13. Let us always oblige our friends. 14. Formerly they
pronounced very well. 15. Why do you always disturb
Peculiarities of the First Conjugation 187
your uncle ? 16. When be was young he ate too often.
17. They announced the sad news to their friends as
soon as your letter arrived. 18. Don't disturb yourself.
(B) 1. What do we eat ? 2. Who is reigning now ia
England ? 3. Who throws my books out of (jpar) the
window when I am out ? 4. If you had a brother, who
would take him to school ? 5. Nobody. 6. Would n't
you ? 7. Do you skate ? 8. When ? 9. Shall you skate
to-morrow? 10. Did you skate last winter? 11. Is
it freezing now ? 12. Do we pronounce French well ?
13. Do you try ? 14. Do you know who sweeps this
room ? 15. Do you ? 16. With what do they sweep ?
17. Where do you buy books in this town ? 18. Where
do you buy yours ? 19, Who pays [for] them ? 20. Who
is calling us ? 21. [On] what day does your birthday
come (fall) ? 22, Who celebrates it ? 23. Do you like
ices ? 24. Is there any one here who does n't eat them ?
26. Do dogs frighten you when they bark ? 26. Do bark-
ing dogs (dogs that bark) bite ? 27. Shall you repeat
what I have told you ? 28. What 's your father's name ?
29. What 's yours ? 30. How do you employ your time ?
31. Do we always correct what we have written ? 32. Do
you go walking or riding ? 33. When I am in Europe,
what shall I send you? 34. At what time shall you get
up to-morrow mowiing? 35. Is your name Charles or
John? 36. Have you written these sentences well?
37. Are you sure? 38. Who told you so?
188 The Subjunctive Mode
76
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
General Statement of its Use.
(1) The subjunctive mode is rarely used in a principal
clause.^ It is used in a subordinate clause, when the prin-
cipal clause implies necessity, uncertainty, or emotion.
n faut qu'eUe soit panie.
It is necessary that she should be punished, or she must he punished. '^
Je ne croispas qu'il ait vu son fils, I do not think he has seen his son.
J'ai peur qu'eUe ne soit morte, / am afraid she is dead.
(2) If, however, the thought expressed in the prin-
cipal clause implies certainty or probability, the verb in
the subordinate clause is in the indicative. Compare :
Je pense que la sant6 est pr6f Arable a tons les biens.
I think healtli is prpfprahle to all riches.
Je ne pense pas que la sant6 soit pr6f Arable a tous les biens.
I do not think health is preferable to all i^lches.
Observe that the conjunction que, by which a sub-
junctive is generally introduced, itself governs no
mode. It is the thought contained in the verb of the
principal clause that determines the mode used in the
subordinate clause.
Present Subjunctive.
avoir Itre
que j'aie. que nous ayons. que je sois. que nous soyons.
que tu aies. que vous ayez. que tu sois. que vous soyez.
qu'il ait. qu'ils aient. qu'il soit. qu'ils soient.
Imperative.
aie, have, ayons, let us have, sois, be. soyons, let us be.
ayez, have. soyez, be.
1 For the subjunctive in principal clauses, see Lesson 86.
2 Instead of saying in English '' It is necessary that I should go, ^' *^ It is
necessary that he should work to win,'* etc., say "/ must go,'* *^ He must
work to win,** etc.
The Subjunctive Mode 189
Impersonal Verbs.
Impersonal verbs that do not imply certainty or
probability are followed by the subjunctive.
Subjunctive. Indicative.
il semble, it seems. il me (liii, nous, etc.) semble, it seems
il fant, ^ . . to me {to A/w, to us, etc.).
il est n^cessaire, j ^' il parait, it appears, it is evident, tt
il importe, 1 . . . transpires.
il est important,/* ** ^W^^ ^" • ^ r^sulte, ^ it follows,
il convient, ^ it is Jilting, it il s'ensuit, j Me result is,
il est convenable, | is proper. il est siir, "i . .
., ^ . . • . , -1 ^ ^ . ]it is sure, certain.
il vaut mieux, ^H is better, or il est certain, j
il est pr6f Arable, f preferable. il est Evident, it is evident, plain.
il se pent, \ it is possible, it il est d6montr6, it is proved.
il est possible, j mai^ be. il est clair, it is clear, obvious.
il est juste, it is right. il est manifeste, it is manifest.
il est faux, it is false. il est decide, it is decided.
U est bon, it is good. il est vrai, // is true.
il est essentiel, it is essential. il est probable, it is probable.
il est indispensable, it is indispens- il est vraisemblable, it is likely.
able. il est incontestable, it is incontestable.
il est urgent, it is urgent. il arrive, it happens,
il est temps, it is time.
il est heureux, it is fortunate.
n semble, it seems, is also freonently followed by the indicative.
This is the case when there is no doubt in the mind of the
speaker.
1. II faut que mon f rere ait ce livre aujourd'hui. 2. II
est urgent qu'il Fait. 3. II me semble que vous avez
eu tort daus cette discussion ; est-ce qu'on parle ainsi i
sa scEur? 4. J'ai eu tort, c*est vrai, mais il est certain
qu'elle m'a beaucoup derange. 5. II parait que sa mere
est malade depuis quinze jours. 6. Je leur ai sacrifi^
men tem,ps et mes ambitions ; faut-il encore quails aient
tout mon argent ? 7. Se peut-il que M. votre cousin soit
190 The Subjunctive Mode
encore ici apr^s cette alt'aire dont vous ine parliez hier ?
8. II est essentiel que j'aie de I'argent avant huit heures;
envoyez-le-moi. 9. Est-il indispensable que madame
votre mere ait cette lettre cette semaine ? 10. Oui,
mademoiselle, c'est urgent; il faut qu'elle ait tous les
details de I'affaire avant son depart. 11. II est clair
que vous avez sommeil ; couchez-vous vite. 12. II est
vrai que je suis fatigue car j'ai beaucoup inarche aujour-
d^'hui, et il est possible que j'aie sommeil. 13. II est
decide qu'on ne donnera pas a votre ami la permission
qu'il demandait. 14. II se peut qu'elle ait achete une
nouvelle maison. 15. II est probable qu'elle demeurera
tout pr^s de nous.
1. Is it possible that I am wrong ? 2. It is possible
that you are wrong, but it is probable that you are right.
3. Is it right that he should be punished ? 4. Yes, it is^
(c'est) right ; he has disobeyed his father and refused
his sister everything she has asked him for. 5. It
is right, then, that he be punished. 6. It may be
that your sister and her friend have already arrived.
7. I must have some paper, ink, and pens at once.
8. My father has been travelling for some time, and it
is possible that he is now in Paris. 9. It is time that
I should have news of him (some of his news). 10. She
must have her new dress to-night. 11. It is important
for her to have it, but must she have it ? 12. It is cer«
tain that she will not have it before to-morrow. 13. Is
it possible that they have not brought it ? 14. It is
evident that they have left it at home. 15. I think that
it is better that they have forgotten it; I am glad of it.
16. Must you have that money soon ? 17. Must you not
have it to-day ? >
The Subjunctive Mode 191
77
Formation of the Present Subjunctive.
There are two methods ^ of obtaining the present sub-
junctive from the primitive tenses (or principal parts).
Neither method is without exceptions, and neither
applies to avoir or etre.
First Method. Change -ant of the present participle
to -6. In regular verbs of the third conjugation, e
before v in the stem must be changed to oi.
donnaut : que je donne.
recevant : que je reqoive.
Second Method. Drop -nt of the third person plural
present indicative.^ This rule applies to all regular
verbs and to about twenty more of the irregular verbs
than are covered by the first method, while the present
subjunctive of only^two verbs, savoir and pleuvoir, may
be obtained by the first method and not by the second.
In other words, since the ending of the third person plural, -ent, is
silent, when we pronounce the third person plural present indicative of
most French verbs, we are also pronouncing the first person singular
present subjunctive.
lis donnent : que je donne.
Us recoivent : que je recjoive.
1 Teachers will state to their pupils which method is to be followed.
The other may be entirely ignored.
2 In the principal parts, give the first person singular only of the present
indicative, the pupil being required to know the tense so well that the third
perso)! plural is instantly ready for use in the formation of the present
subjunctive.
192 The Subjunctive Mode
Present Subjunctive of Regular Verbs. •
TERMINATIONS : -6, -cs, -6, -ioRS, -iez, -ent.
These are also the terminations for all irregular verbs, except
avoir and §tre (Lesson 76).
porter recevcir
que je porte. que je re9oive.
que tu portes. que tu recoives.
qu'il porte. qu'il receive,
que nous portions. que nous recevions.
que vous portiez. que vous receviez.
qu'ils portent. qu'ils roQoivent. ,
finir vendre
que je finisse. que je vende.
que tu finisses. que tu vendes.
qu'il finisse. qu*il vende.
que nous finissions. que nous vendions.
que vous finissiez. que vous vendiez.
qu'ils fiinissent. qu'ils vendent.
Using these four verbs as models^ he prepared to conjiir
gate the present svhjunctive of any of the regular verbs
previously given.
There is no future subjunctive. The present sub-
junctive is used to express both present and future
time.
1. On me dit qu'il est essentiel que vous arriviez a
Londres avant le ler avril. 2. II est bien important que
je finisse, le plus t6t possible, tout ce que j'ai deja com-
mence ; alors il sera possible que j'y arrive a temps
{in time). 3. Vous lui avez desobei : il est juste qu'on
vous punisse. 4. II est evident que Pon nous attendra.
5. 11 me semble qu'il n'est pas certain qu'on nous attende.
6. II est preferable que vous lui rendiez ce livre vous-
m^me. 7. II vaut luieux que nous restions ici ce soir
The Subjunctive Mode 193
8. II est temps que vous fermiez vos livres. 9. II
est juste que vous me payiez ce que vous me devez.
10. Est-il possible que je vous doive quelque chose ?
11. II est certain que vous m'avez emprunte dix francs,
il y a plus de six mois. 12. Se peut-il que vous I'oubliiez ?
13. II faut que nous nous le rappelions, n'est-ce pas ?
14. II est probable que ma soeur sera ici bientot. 15. II
importe pen qu'elle soit avec nous. 16. II vous semble
que j'ai tort, mais je vous prouverai le contraire.
1. Is it possible that you relate false stories ? 2. It
transpires that the story I was telling is not false. 3. It
is fortunate for you that it is true. 4. It seems as if you
worked well, but I am not sure. 5. It seems to him
that you are his friend. 6. It is possible that you are
mine too, but it seems to me that you are not. 7. It
has been decided at last that we will give you the first
prize. 8. Is it fitting that I should receive it ? 9. That
letter must be sent [express two ways] before 1 : 30.
10. We must begin as soon as she gets here. 11. Chil-
dren must obey their parents. 12. It is probable that
they will not always do it, and their parents must have
a great deal of patience. 13. It is urgent that she
answer the letter she received a few days ago. 14. It
is possible that you are poorer than I, but it seems to
me that you are much richer. 15. It is time for you
to go to bed ; it is eleven o'clock. 16. At what time
must I get here to-morrow morning ? 17. It is evident
that you study several hours a day. 18. It is good that
you prepare your lessons so well. 19. If my father
accepts your invitation, it will be possible for us to be
at your house on Saturday next.
13
194 The Subjunctive Mode
78
Negative and Interrogative Verbs.
(1) Verbs used negatively or interrogatively and im^
plying uncertainty are followed by the subjunctive with
the conjunction que ; if there is no doubt in the mind
of the speaker, the indicative is used.
1. Je crois qu'il est malade, I believe that he is ill.
2. Croyez-vous qu'il soit malade, do you believe that he is ill?
3. Je ne crois pas qu'il soit malade, / do not believe that he is ill,
4. II n'est pas certain qu'il soit malade, it is not certain that he is ill.
6. Oubliez-vous qu'il est malade, do you forget that he is ill?
6. Saviez-vous qu'il 6tait malade, did you know that he was ill?
7. Ne croyez-vous pas qu'il est malade, do you not believe that he is ill f
8. N'est-ce pas qu'il est malade, is nH he ill ?
Remarks on examples given above.
1. I do not know that he is ill, bat I do not doubt it.
2. I am asking for information because I am in doubt, hence the
subjunctive. If, however, I believed that he was ill and if I were
merely trying to find out if you also believed it, the indicative would
be used. Croyez-vous que je suis malade 1 l\ ne croit pas que je suis
ici. Croyez-vous que je feral cela % In these three examples there is
no doubt in the- mind of the speaker.
3. I do not believe he is ill — doubt of the strongest kind.
4. Impersonal verbs implying certainty or probability when used
negatively or interrogatively imply doubt and require the subjunctive,
n ne me semble pas qu'il soit malade, but ne vous semble-t-il pas qu'il
est malade 1 See 7 and 8.
5 and 6- I have no doubt as to his being ill.
7 and 8. A negative-interrogative calls for an affirmative answer.
Ne dites-vous pas qu'U a tort % Ne trouvez-vous pas que cette petite
fille est gentille %
(2) The subjunctive is not used after est-ce que?
n'est-ce pas que? nor generally after such verbs as savoir,
to know, f aire savoir, to let know, dire, to tell, apprendre, to
T%e Subjunctive Mode
195
learn y to hear, to inform^ informer^ to inform , when
they are used interrogatively or negatively, if there is
no doubt in the mind of the speaker.
The verb esperer takes the subjunctive only when
used negatively or interrogatively.
Croire (irregular), to believe, to think.
Present Participle. Past Participle.
croyant.
Present Indicative.
je crois.
tu crois.
il croit.
nous croyons.
vous croyez.
ils croient.
Past Indefinite.
j'ai cru.
trahir, to betray.
regretter, to regret.
' \ somewhat, rather.
un peu, j
cm.
Imperfect Indicativb.
je croyais.
Past Definite.
je eras.
Future.
je croirai.
• Conditional.
je croiraifl.
pr6tendre, to pretend.
de son mieux, one*8 best.
1. Mile, votre soeur espere, je crois, que vous lui en-
verrez Pargent que vous lui avez promis. 2. Je ne crois
pas que vous lui ayez prete le livre que vous lui reclamez.
3. Supposez-vous que nous osions jamais lui en parler ?
4. Oubliez-vous qu'elle est plus agee que nous ? 5. Si
vous etes puni, ne croyez pas que j'en sois la cause : je
n^ai parle de vous a personne. 6. Vous ne m'aviez pas
dit que vous etiez indispose: j'esp^re que vous vous portez
mieux. 7. N'esp^rez pas que je trahisse mon ami pour
vous faire plaisir. 8. Ne savez-vous pas que M. votre
frere est revenu de Paris ? 9. lis se flattent que je
r^pondrai a leur lettre, raais ils se trompent. 10. Elle
196 The Subjunctive Mode
ne croit pas que voiis preferiez mon livre au sien. 11. Je
vous deinande pardou. mais je vous assure qu'elle a ecrit
six lettres depuis mon arrivee. 12. Ke vous imaginez
pas que nous nous amusions ici sans vous; nous vous
regrettons beaucoup et nous parlous de vous a chaque
instant. 13. Je suppose que vous me defendrez si Pon
m'attaque. 14. Je ne pense pas que Ton vous attaque,
mais, si on le fait, je serai la et vous defendrai. 15. Je
n'espere pas qu'il reussisse, mais je pense qu'il travaillera
bien. 16. Croient-ils que je les attende ? 17. Oui, mon-
sieur, ils esp^rent que vous les attendrez.
(A) 1. She does not think that her father has come.
2. She thinks that her mother has come. 3. Does she
think that we have come ? 4. It may be that they have
come. 5. She must finish her work at once. 6. I do
not pretend that h6' is right, but I think you are wrong.
7. I hope you will answer your sister's letter; do you
forget she is ill ? 8. I do not forget that she is ill, but
I shall not answer her letter yet, 9. She thinks that
you have forgotten her. 10. I do not suppose you will
give her all that money. 11. She does not hope that
her father will give her any, but I think that he will.
12. 1 must have some paper, some ink, and a better pen.
13. Did you tell them that I would thank them myself ?
14. Don't you find [that] this water [is] very good ?
15. Do you believe that they are in London ? 16. Do
{est-ce que) you believe that {celd) ? 17. Is (est-ce que)
not that true ?
{B) 1. Do you think that this subject is an easy one ?
2. You think that this subject is somewhat difficult, do
you not ? 3. Don't you think that it ^s very interesting ?
4. Did you know that everybody believes that it is the
The Subjunctwe Mode 197
most difficult in the whole French grammar ? 5. Have
I told you that the French [people] themselves are not
always sure about it ? 6. Is it possible that I have not
told you that (cela) ? 7. Must we study it ? 8. You
hope that soon you will find it easier, don't you? 9. Do
you hope that I am wrong ? 10. Don't you think I am
right? 11. Do you think that English history is interest-
ing ? 12. Is it possible that French history is much more
interesting ? 13. Does (est-ce que) nobody know that we
are here ? 14. Does any one know that I have lent you
some money ? 15. Who told you that everybody knows
it ? 16. It seems to me that you have learned this lesson
well; does it seem to you that I am right? 17. Is it
right for you to believe that ?
79
Verbs of Emotion.
(1) Words or phrases expressing will, wish, command,
doubt, fear, expectation, prohihition, permission, coin-
plainly joy, sorrow, surprise, or any other emotion, are
followed by the subjunctive with the conjunction que:
Je d6sire que vous lui parliez, / wish you to speak to him,
Je defends que vous Tattendiez, / forbid you to wait for him,
Vouloir (irregular), to vnsh.
Present Participle. Past Participle.
voulant. voulu.
Present Ixdicative. Imperfect Indicative
je veux. je voulais. ,
tu veux. Past Definite.
il veut. * je voulus.
nous voulons. .^^ Future.
vous voulez. je voudrai
ils veulent.
198 The Subjunctive Mode
Past Indefinite. Conditional.
j'ai voulu. je voadrais.
je veux, / wish, want, command.
je veux bien, / am wlllinr/, consent.
je voudrais or je voudrais bien, / should like.
Notice the difference in meaning between the present indicative aua
the conditional of the verb vouloir.
II veut le faire, he wishes (wills^ means) to do it,
II voudrait le faire, he would like to do it.
Je veux etre k Paris avant le 1®' mai, / wish {intend) to be in Paris
before thejirst of May .
Je voudrais y §tre maintenant, 7 should like to be there now^ or /
wish I were there now,
(2) In French, the subjunctive is always 'ised after
verbs expressing wish or willy except only when both
verbs (that is, the verb expressing wish or will and the
verb depending on it) have the same person or persons
for subjects; in which case the second verb is put in
the infinitive.
Je veux que vous restiez ici, / wish you to stay here,
n veut rester ici, he wishes to stay here.
d6fendre, to forbid, ordonner, to command.
r^pliquer, to reply. exiger, to demand, insist,
souhaiter, to wish (to make a wish for), trouver bon, to approve.
douter, to doubt. trouver mauvais, to disapprove,
surpris, surprised,
1. Je doute qu'il reussisse. 2. Je ddsire que vous
m'attendiez. 3. II veut que nous lui obeissions sans re-
pliquer. 4. Vous ordonnez qu'on vous obeisse. 5. EUe
exige que nous vous attendions. 6. Je defends qu'on
le punisse. 7. Je suis surpris que vous lui parliez encore
apres ce qu'il a dit et fait contre vous. 8. Je regrette
The Sicbjunetive Mode 199
beaucoup que vous m'ayez attendu, mais je vous assure
que ce n'est pas ma faute. 9. Adieu, monsieur, je
souhaite que vous vous portiez bien. 10. Je desire que
vous m'accompagniez, mais je ne I'exige pas. 11. Voulez-
vous bien permettre que ma soeur et moi nous jouions
un peu ? 12. Je veux que vous restiez ici l*une et Pautre,
vous n'avez pas encore appris vos leqons. 13. Je voudrais
aller a la campagne, mais ce n'est pas possible. 14. Nous
doutons fort qu'il vous attende. 15. Ma mere est bien
aise que vous soyez enfin revenu. 16. Obeis, si tu veux
qu'on t'obeisse un jour. — ( Voltaire.)
1. They wish you to speak to me. 2. Do you wish
to speak to me ? 3. Does he wish me to speak to you ?
4. He wishes to speak to me. 5. Do you wish him to
speak to you about it ? 6. Do you not wish her to sing
that song ? 7. No, I want you to sing it yourself.
8. Does she wish to sing it ? 9. I hope she will reply
to my letter this week. 10. She forbids me to speak
to you. 11. Are you not surprised that your brother
has already come back ? 12. Do you insist upon my
being punished ? 13. I consent to your playing a little,
but you must stay here. 14. We wish we were in Paris.
15. J wish to go there next summer. 16. They wish
us to dine with them on Monday. 17. We regret that
you have not received our letter. 18. She doubts that
we shall arrive before her. 19. I want to work with
you, and I want you to work with me. 20. Did you
not know that I had met him? 21. Must I work all the
time? 22. It is not probable that you will work too
much.
200 The Suhjunctive Mode
80
Ne and the Subjunctive.
The following verbs meaning to fear, craindre, avoir
peur, and trembler, and the two verbs prendre garde (to
take care) and empeeher (to prevent, to keep from) not
only are 'followed by the subjunctive, but they also
require ne before it. (See page 205.)
Pai peur qull ne r^ussisse, I fear that he will succeed.
Emp§chez qu'il ne reussisse, prevent his succeeding.
But note that, after verbs of fearing used negatively
or interrogatively, ne is omitted.
Craignez-vous qu'il soit venu, are you a/raid that he has come f
Je Grains qu'il ne soit venu, / am afraid that he has come.
Je crains qu'il ne soit pas venu, / am afraid that he has not come,
Je ne crains pas qu'il soit venu, / a?n not afraid that he has come.
Je ne crains pas qu'il ne soit pas venu, / am not afraid that he has not
come.
Craindre (irregular), to fear.
Present Participle, craignaizt. Past Participle, craint.
Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative.
je crains. je craignais.
tu crains. t» i-^
i,u v,*aai«. Past Definite.
il craint.
xxi^iaiuu. je craignis.
^ nous craignons.
vous craignez. Future.
ils craignent. J® craindrai
Past Indefinite. Conditional.
j'ai craint. je craindrais.
le ballet, the note, d^couvert, discovered (past part.),
insulter, to insult. tranquiUe, tranquil^ calm.
soyez tranquiUe, rest assured, don't worry.
1. Je crains bien que vous ne vous soyez trorap^.
2. Je ne crains pas que vous perdiez votre belle montre,
vous n'etes plus un enfant. 3. Soyez trauquille, j'em-
The Subjunctive Mode 201
p^cherai qu'on ne vous derange. 4. Pr^ferez-vous que
je les punisse moi-meme ? 5. Je le ferai bien, si vous le
voulez, mais je crois qu'il vaut mieux que ce soit vous.
6. lis raeritent bien que nous les corrigions, mais ne
soyons pas trop sev^res. 7. Quoi ! vous souffrez qu'ou
vous batte ! un grand garqon comme vous ! 8. Trouvez
bon que je vous punisse quand vous le m^ritez: vous
m'en remercierez plus tard. 9. Je tremble que cette
affaire ne soit decouverte. 10. Ne craignez pas que je
vous afflige : je garderai tons mes chagrins pour moi seul.
11. Ne me parlez pas ainsi, j'aime mieux que vous me
grondiez. 12. Est-il possible que vous souffriez qn'on
vous insulte ? 13. Mon p^re n'aime pas que vous voya-
giez seul. 14. Trouvera-t-il mauvais aussi que nous
voyagions ensemble ? 15. Je voudrais vous accompagner,
mais je Grains bien qu'il ne s'y oppose; il veut que vous
restiez ici.
1. I fear you will lose the money which I have given
you. 2. But my sister does not fear that you will lose
it. 3. I am afraid you are wrong. 4. Are you afraid
that I have forgotten you ? 5. I shall not suffer (souf-
frirai) you to insult me. 6. I shall not punish her;
I much prefer that she ask my pardon. 7. We shall
prevent them from succeeding. 8. Do you disapprove
of her not answering your note ? 9. Do you approve of
their disobeying you? 10. I tremble lest you should
be discovered. 11. Do not fear that I shall be betrayed.
12. She requires {exige or veut) me to wait for her. 13. I
hope you are better. 14. We are glad you are better.
15. Does he know that you are much better to-day ?
16. They want us to take a walk together. 17. They
do not fear that we shall lose our way. 18. Take care
(^prenez garde) not to lose it.
202 The Subjunctive Mode
81
Subjunctive in Adjective Clauses.
(1) A relative pronoun (oil, in which , included) is
followed by the subjunctive whenever douht, uncer-
tainty, or purpose is implied.
Je cherche quelqu'un qui me rende service. •
I ajn looking /or some one who will oblige me.
But
J'ai on ami qui me rendra service.
/ have a friend icho will oblige me.
(2) The subjunctive is used after a superlative and
2AtQv first, last, and on/y, unless the thought is stated as
absolute fact. Accordingly, it is not used when the
relative clause is merely explanatory or when the
superlative is followed by de.
G'est le plus beau livre qu'on ait jamais 6crit.
It is thejinest book that was ever written.
G'est le premier (dernier, seul) homme qui I'ait fait.
lie is thejirst {last, only) man that has done it.
But
C'est le plus beau des livres que j'ai lus.
It is thejinest of the books that I have read.
La meilleure 61eve, qui etait malade, n'a pas gagn6 le prix.
The best pupil, who was sick, did not win the prize,
Connaitre (irregular), to know, to he acquainted vnth
Present Participle. Past Participle.
connaissant. connu.
Present Indicative.
je connais. nous connaissons.
tu connais. vous connaissez.
il connait. ils connaissent.
The Subjunctive Mode 203
Imperfect Indicative. Future.
je connaissais. je connaitrai.
Past Definite. Conditional.
je connus. je connaitrais.
Past Indefinite, j'ai connu.
Paraitre, to appear ^ is conjugated like connaitre.
1. Voil^ un beau cheval, c'est le plus bel animal que
j'aie jamais vu. 2. C'est, en tout cas, le plus beau des
chevaux qui etaient hier sur le champ de course. 3. Votre
cousine est la femme la plus heureuse que je connaisse.
4. Vous avez raison; c'est bien certainement la plus
aimable des femmes que je connais. 5. De ces trois
officiers, c'est le plus jeune que vous connaissez, n'est-ce
pas? 6. II y a peu d'hommes qui sachent supporter
Tadversite. 7. Cette " Histoire de France " est la meil-
leure de celles que j'ai dans ma bibliotheque. 8. C'est, je
crois, le seul livre serieux qu'ils aient chez eux. 9. J*ai
besoin d'une histoire qui soit interessante pour les en-
fants. 10. Cette menagerie est la plus grande qui soit
jamais venue ici. 11. Voici la plus belle de toutes les
menageries que j'ai vues. 12. J'irai dans un pays qui
soit bon pour la sant^. 13. Je connais un pays qui
est bon pour la sante. 14. Votre fr^re est le premier
qui soit arriv^. 15. Voila le meilleur ^l^ve qui se soit
jamais assis sur les bancs de cette ecole.
1. This is (voici) the most beautiful bird that we ever
saw. 2. Do not cut this rose, it is the only one we have
in our garden. 3. Give me back my French dictionary,
please; it is the best one I have ever seen. 4. It is always
the best books that I choose. 5. We are now looking
for a house where we shall be happy. 6. We have found
a house where we shall be happy. 7. That is a portrait
of his daughter, who died in 1900. 8. Is it the youngest
204
The Subjunctive Mode
of his daughters that is dead ? 9. Of these four ladies,
it is the tallest that I know. 10. Is n't she the happiest
woman you know ? 11. She is the happiest of the women
that I know here. 12. Of the women I know, she is the
happiest. 13. Is there a man who is content with (de)
what he possesses ? 14. I know a man who is never
unhappy, and yet (cependant) he possesses almost noth-
ing. 15. I have been visiting my friend, who is ill.
16. Everybody desires friends that are faithful.
82
Subjunctive in Adverbial Clauses.
(1) Certain conjunctions of purpose, condition, time,
etc., are followed by the subjunctive.
Compare the following lists of conjunctions taking respectively the
subjunctive and the indicative.
Subjunctive.
avant que, before.
jusqu'^ceque, ^^.^
en attendant que, J
afin que, "i
pour que, \so that, in order that.
de sorte que, I
au cas que, in case {that).
pourvu que, provided.
suppose que, suppose,
quoique \
bienque, Kalthough.
encore que, J
soit que • . . ou que, either , . . or»
non que, not (that).
sans que, without.
que,^ used for one of the above con-
junctions or for si, if.
Indicative.
aprds que, after.
pendant que, ^^^.^^_
tandis que, J
puisque, since.
parce que, because,
quand, j
aussitot que,"!
J' \^
des que, J
si, if.
tant que, so Jong as.
k mesure que, as, in propor*
tion as.
peut-etre que, perhaps.
comme, as.
que,i used for one of the
above conjunctions, except si.
\ as soon as.
1 For use of que see Lesson 87.
The Subjunctive Mode 205
(2) Three conjunctions require not only the subjunc-
tive, but also ne before it.
k moins que, unless. de crainte que,"
de crainte que,^ ^ ^ ,
i LA^r fear, lest.
de peur que, j ^
(3) The following conjunctive expressions also take
the subjunctive.
si (with adj. or adv.) . . . que, "k ,
quelque(with adj. or adv.) . . . que, J
qui que, whoever.
quoi que, whatever.
1. Je suis venu moi-meme afin que vous me racontiez
toute Faffaire. 2. II faut que tout soit piet avant que
M. votre p^re arrive. 3. II me gronde (soit) que j'aie
raison ou que j'aie tort. 4. Puisque vous Stes beaucoup
plus fort que moi, vous porterez les paquets. 5. Bien
que vous soyez beaucoup plus age que moi, j'ose dire qiie
vous avez tort et que c'est moi qui ai raison. 6. Nous
travaillerons jusqu'a ce que vous arriviez. 7. Pourvu
que j'aie votre approbation, je serai content. 8. Est-ce
que vous croyez que vous Pinsulterez sans qu'il vous
punisse ? 9. Suppose que votre chien me morde, est-ce
que vous croyez que je ne lui donnerai pas de bons coups
de pied ? 10. Je ne vous raconterai pas Phistoire, de
peur que vous ne la r^p^tiez a votre cousin. 11. Je lui
ai dit qu'il finisse son travail tout de suite. 12. 11
m'avait dit qu'il avait deja fini son travail. 13. Faites-
lui savoir que je veux le voir. 14. Le lion n^attaque
jamais Phomme a moins qu'il ne soit provoqu^.
1. I like him although he does not always obey me.
2. You must work until I am ready. 3. I do not think
he will reply to your letter before we arrive from the
country. 4. In case you need money, he will send you
all of his. 5. Since he has a great deal more than I,
206 The Subjunctive Mode
I will accept his offer. 6. He will not give me the
money he has promised me, unless I obey him. 7. I
shall not punish you to-day, although you deserve it.
8. He will go away (partira) lest we shall scold him.
9. You must be diligent so that your mother may be
pleased with you. 10. Although you have promised
me a holiday, you have not given it to me. 11. I shall
give you a beautiful book illustrated by Gustave Dore,
provided you win the first prize in (de) French. 12. I
shall not win that prize unless you help me a little.
13. She does not dare to come here, for fear you will
scold her. 14. She stayed at home until we had gone.
15. I shall not look for your ring until (before) you
look for it yourself. 16. He flatters us so that we may
forgive him for what he has done. 17. If you get here
before twelve and if (que) I am not ready, wait for me
until I have finished my work. 18. I hope you will not
wait too long. 19. Before he buys a house, he must
have another thousand dollars. 20. However rich one
may be, one never has money enough,
83
Present Subjunctive in Subordinate Clauses.
The most common uses of the present subjunctive
in subordinate clauses may be seen from the following
summary : —
Used after: Exceptions.
Impersonal verbs, Fact and probability.
Negative verbs, ^ No doubt in the mind of the
Interrogative verbs, j speaker.
Verbs of emotion, etc. Esperer (affirmative).
Superlatives, Followed by a genitive.
Certain relatives, ^ xt j u^ • v j
^ . . .' I No doubt or purpose implied.
Certain conjunctions, j
The Subjunctive Mode 207
Present Subjunctive of Irregular Verbs Already Used.
For rules for determining the present subjunctive of a verb, see
Lesson 77.
dire voir aller vouloir
que je dise. que je voie. que j'aille. que je veuille.
que tu dises. voies. ailles. veuilles.
qu'il dise. voie. aille. veuille.
que nous disions. vojrionB. allions. voulions.
que vous disiez. voyiez. alliez. vouliez.
qu'ils disent. voient. aillent. veuillent.
The present subjunctives of faire, savoir, craindre, and connaitre
are conjugated without change of stem : que je fasse, que je sache, que
je craigne, que je connaisse. In envoyer and croire the same changes
occur as in voir : que j'envoie, que je croie.
Distinction between savoir smd connaitre.
Savoir means to know through the mmd, to realize, to
have learnedy to know that something is so, to know how
to. It never has a person for its object and may be
followed by a conjunction or a verb.
Savez-vous votre leqon, do you know your lesson ?
Combien de langues sait-il, how many languages does he know f
Je sais qu'elle est ici, / know that, she is here.
II Bait lire et 6crire, he knows how to read and write.
Connaitre means to he acquainted with, to know hy sight
or by the other senses, to recognize. It may have a per-
son or thing for its object, but can never be followed by
a conjunction or a verb.
Nous connaissons de vue ce monsieur, toe know that gentleman hy sight.
Connaissez-vous les oeuvres de Lamartine, do you know Lamartine*8
woi'ks ?
Je connaiB le dictionnaire de Littr6, / know Littr^s dictionary.
1. II n*est pas absoUiment n^cessaire que j'y aille,
mais il est pr^f^rable dans mon intdrSt, et peut-Stre, aussi
208 The Subjunctive Mode
dans le votre, que je sois present a la discussion.
2. Adieu, raon ami; je souhaite que vous soyez toujours
heureux. 3. Merci ; j'espere que vous le serez aussi.
4. On me dit que votre cousine, Yvonne, est la jeune
fille la plus aimahle qu'on ait jamais vue. 5. De toutes
mes cousines, c'est certainement Yvonne qui est la plus
charmante. 6. Qui que vous soyez, il n'est pas con-
venable que vous soyez impoli. 7. Bien que vous soyez
devenu riche et que vous connaissiez bien du monde, il faut
que vous ne soyez pas trop fier, si vous voulez que I'on
vous aime. 8. II importe qu'il sache ce que vous avez
fait. 9. II est temps que vous le lui disiez. 10. Je
cherche un homme qui soit digne de grands honneurs,
11. Ne croyez-vous pas que je vous eonnaisse, Monsieur?
12. Doutez-vous qu'elle sache sa leqon? 13. 11 me
semble qu'elle Pa bien pr^par^e aujourd'hui, 14. II
parait que vous vous trompez quelquefois.
1. They do not believe that she knows it. 2. They
do know that she is acquainted with us. 3. If you go
for a walk with us, you must be ready before ten. 4. I
want you to see my friends when you are in Paris next
year; they will wish to see you, I am sure. 5. You
must send them a note before you call so that you will
find them at home. 6. If you do not do it, I am afraid
that they will not be there. 7. Is it not probable that
they will have come back from the shore before the first
of August? 8. Whatever you may say, I shall never
believe him to be guilty. 9. Do you think that he
knows it ? 10. Don't you think I know him better
than you do ? 11. We wish no one to fear us, but we
wish to be obeyed. 12. I hope you believe it. 13. I
doubt his sending them any money before we see him. .
14. Don't you know that it is not certain you will sue-
The Imperfect Subjunctive 209
ceed ? 15. Is there any one that is always happy ?
16. He is the best man I know. 17. He is also the
only man that I know well. 18. You say that because
you do not wish to appear proud of your friends.
84
The Use of the Tenses of the Subjunctive.
(1) After the present or future in the principal clause
or, in conversation, after the conditional, the present
of the subjunctive is used; after any other tense, the
imperfect subjunctive.
Je veux 1
Je voudrai Iqu'il le fasse.
Je Youdrais j
Je voulais
Je voulus
Je voudrais i
J'ai voulu
J'avais voulu
J*aurais voulu.
qu'U le fit.
(2) When the subjunctive is in a compound tense,
the tense of the auxiliary avoir or etre depends on the
tense of the verb in the principal clause,
Esp6rez-vous qu'il I'ait fait 1
Esp6riez-vou8 qti'il I'e^t fait %
(3) The imperfect subjunctive is avoided in French
whenever possible. If an infinitive construction cannot
be substituted, the present subjunctive is used.
Compare :
n empechait que nous n'arrivassions k temps.
II nous empechait d'arriver k temps.
Je voudrais que vous m'accompagnassiez.
Je voudrais que vous m'accompag^ez.
1 In a formal, dignified stvle.
14
210
The Imperfect Subjunctive
Imperfect Subjunctive.
The imperfect subjunctive of any French verb may
be formed by adding -se to the second person singular
of the past definite. There are no exceptions to this
rule. In all conjugations except the first, the first per-
son singular of the past definite may be used instead
of the second.
Past Definite.
1st person. 2d person.
Imperfect Subjunctive.
donuai,
donnas.
que je donnasse.
aUai,
alias.
que j'aUasse.
re§us,
requs.
que je re9usse.
eu8,
eus
que j'eusse.
fus,
fus
que je fusse.
avoir.
§tre.
donner.
que j'eusse.
que je fusse.
que je donnasse.
que tu eusses.
que tu fusses.
que tu donnasses.
qu'il etit.
qu'il fat.
qu'U donnat.
que nous eussions
que nous fussions.
que nous donnassions.
que vous eussiez.
que vous fussiez.
que vous donnassiez.
qu'ils eussent.
qu'ilg fussent.
qu'ils donnassent.
flnir.
recevoir.
vendre.
que je finisse.
que je requsse.
que je vendisse.
que tu finisses.
que tu requsses.
que tu vendisses.
qu'il finit.
qu'il reorlij written letters.
Votre sceur s'est-elle blessee 1 Oui, elle s'est bless6e au doigt.
Has your sister hurt herself 1 YeSy she has hurt her finger.
234 The Past Participle
Void les choses d^sir^es. Nous avons dejk fini.
Here are the things wanted. We have already Jinished.
La dame que j'ai eiit endue chanter est une de vos amies.
The lady that I heard sing is one of your friends.
Comment avez-vous trouv^ les chansons qu'elle a chantees ?
What did you think of the songs that she sung ?
Les chansons fran^aises que j'ai entendu chanter sont belles.
The French songs that I heaixl sung were beautiful,
lis se sont imaging des choses fausses.
They imagined untrue things.
Savez-vous quelles sont les choses fausses qu'ils se sont imaginees 1
Do you know what the untrue things are that they imagined?
II nous a donn6 une boite ; ou Ta-t-on mise 1
He has given us a box ; ivhere has it been put?
J'ai entendu dire, I have heard (that).
J'ai vu faire, / have seen done.
Se faire mal, to hurt one^s self.
Collective Nouns.
A collective noun representing the whole number of
the persons or things mentioned requires its verb, ad-
jective, and pronoun in the singular; otherwise the verb,
adjective, or pronoun is in the plural. In general,
collective nouns preceded by le or la take the singular ;
preceded by iin or nne, the plural.
Le comit6 s'est r6uni, the committee met.
Une douzaine de membres ^taient absents, a dozen members were
absent.
La foule des spectateurs que j'ai vue 6tait immense.
The crowd of spectators that I saw was immense.
Une foule d'enfants le suivaient par tout.
A crowd of children followed him everywhere.
La plupart and the adverbs of quantity (beancoup, etc.)
followed by a plural noun require the plural.
La plupart des enfants sont aimables, most children are lovable.
The Past Participle 235
Annee, journee, matinee, or soiree is used to express the
whole duration of the year, dayy morning, or evening,
with its attendant circumstances; otherwise, an, jour,
matin, or soir is used.
Study carefully the following examples : —
On travaiUe toute Vann^e, tonte la joum6e, toate la matinee, toute
la soiree.
A man works the whole year, all day long, all the morning, all the
evening.
On pale k un ouvrier sa joom^e.
A workman is paid for his day^s work.
On nous sonhaite one bonne et hear ease ann6e.
They wish us a good and happy year.
Des ann^es de s^cheresse (d'abondance).
Years of drought [of abundance) .
L'ann§e (la joarn6e) est belle (plaviease).
The year {the day) is fine (rainy).
L'ann^e prochaine mon fr^re aura vingt et an am.
Next year my brother will be twenty-one years old.
Tin 6v6nement a ea Ilea Tan 1870, tel joar, an matin, an loir.
An event took place in the year 1870, on such a day, one morning, one
evening.
Le solell se leve le matin et se coache le soir.
The sun rises in the morning and sets in the evenir^.
B 7 a trois ans (joars) que noas ne Tavons va.
It is three years (days) since we saw him.
n gagne douze mille cinq cents francs par an.
He earns twelve thousand five hundred francs a year.
Un joar de fete ; le joar de Tan ; tons les soirt (joart).
A holiday ; New Yearns day ; eveiy evening (day).
1. lis sont bien requs. 2. Elles sent venues. 3. lis
sont convaincus que j'ai eu tort de vous parler de Taffaire.
4 Ma m^re est enchant^e de vous revoir. 5. A peine
arrives a Paris, I'einpereur d'Allemagne et ses fils sont
alles au spectacle ; une grande foule de Parisiens les ont
vus passer. 6. Nous avons lu vos deux romans f ranqais.
236 The Past Participle
T. Les avez-vous finis ? 8. Nous avons lu toute la
journee, et nous comptons les finir ce soir. 9. Oil avez-
vous mis mes pantoufles ? 10. Je les ai raises sur une
chaise ; est-ce que vous ne les trouvez pas ? 11. La plu-
part des soldats se sont bien defendus. 12. Pendant
une annee entiere elles se sont defendu tout amusement.
13. Ces deux horames se sont querelles, mais apres ils se
sont donne la main. 14. J'ai entendu dire que madame
votre mere est revenue ce matin. 15. Qui a fait mal a
cette petite fille ? 16. Elle s'est fait mal elle-mSme.
17. Est-ce que vous vous rappelez cette pi^ce que nous
avons vu jouer un soir k la Comedie Franqaise? 18. Oui,
et je me rappelle aussi les acteurs que nous avons vus
jouer. 19. Est-il vrai que la vertu timide soit souvent
opprim^e ?
1. I have heard that your sisters have arrived.
2. Yes, they arrived yesterday morning. 3. A large
number (nombre, m.) of their friends came to see them
last evening. 4. The evening was a beautiful one. 5. I
received last Friday the letter you wrote me on Tuesday.
6. I have sent it to my sister. 7. Have you written
her? 8. Yes, but she hasn't answered me yet.
9. She has received your letter, I am sure, and she will
answer it as soon as possible. 10. I have kept most of
the letters she ever wrote me. 11. My cousins, Mary
and Jane, have often written to each other. 12. I have
seen their letters ; it seems to me that they are not very
interesting. 13. The books he dropped are mine.
14. Who dropped them ? 15. Who are those men T saw
walking in your garden ? 16. We always had a good
time at home when we were young. 17. What a fine
morning! 18. This gentleman's house has been closed
for a month ; his family has gone to the country or to
Aller, Devoir y and Faire 237
the seashore. 19. A crowd of children were running
and playing in the yard behind the school. 20. The
crowd of men and women who were watching the chil-
dren play was still larger. 21. What has happened ?
22. A poor old lady has fallen in the street in front of
our house. 23. Did you see her fall ? 24. I am afraid
she hurt herself.
94
AUer.
(1) The present or imperfect of aller followed by an
infinitive shows that the action is to take place imme-
diately.^
Je vaifl partir, / am Just (on the point of) starting,
Nous allions sortir, we were about to go out.
(2) Aller also means to Jit, to suit, to become.
Ce chapean ne vons va pas, that hat doe» not fit (or become) you.
Cela ne va pas, that won't do.
Aller au-devant de, to go to meet,
S'en aller, to go away, is conjugated like aller :
je m'en vais, je m'en allais, je m'en allai, je in*en irai,
je m'ea irais, que je m'en aille, que je m'en allasse.
Imperative : va-t'en, allons-nous-en, allez-vous-en.
Savoir and Pouvoir.
Savoir must be used instead of pouvoir in the sense of
to know how, to have learned, to.
Compare : H salt lire and 11 pent lire aujourd'hui.
Savez-vous danser ? and pouvez-vous danser ce soir 1
1 For other uses of aller see pajjes 153, 220.
238 AUer, Devoir , and Faire
Devoir.
Followed by an infinitive, devoir has many shades of
meaning.
Present. Je dois le faire, I am (intend, have) to do it.
Imperfect. Je devais le faire, / was to do it.
Past Indef. J'ai da^ , . . t i . , , -,
^ ^ , , vie faire, / had to do it.
Past Def. Je dus j
CoNDiT. Pres. Je devrais le faire, / ougld to do it.
CoNDiT. Past. J'aurais dii le faire, / ought to have done it.
If supposition is implied :
Vous devez §tre tres fatigu^, you must be, very tired {I suppose).
Vous avez dii etre bien content, you must have been well pleased.
The imperfect subjunctive (dus86-je, dcit-il, etc.) at the beginning of
a clause means even though :
Dus86-je 8tre blSm^, je vous soutiendrai, even though I should be
blamed, I shall support you.
DUt-elle en mourir, elle le fera, icere she to die for ity she will do it.
Faire.
(3) Faire followed by the infinitive means to cause, to
get, to have, or to order something done.
n m'a fait travailler, he made me work.
Nous ferons venir le m6decin, we shall send for the doctor.
Oui, faites-le venir, yes, have him come, send for him.
Je fais bEtir une maison, / am having a house built.
J'ai fait batir une maison, / have had a house built.
On le fera nommer capitaine, they will get him made a captain.
II s'est fait couper les cheveux, he has had a hair-cut.
J'ai fait faire un pardessus, / have had an overcoat made.
(4) When the infinitive used with faire has a direct
object, the subject of the infinitive is in the dative
case.i
1 The verbs laisser, entendre, voir, are usually followed by the same
construction as faire : Laissez lire les Aleves. Laissez-leur (or -les) lire
le franqais.
Aller, Devoir, and Faire 239
Je leur fais lire le francaia, / have them read French.
Je fais lire le fran^ais k mes 616ve8, / have my pupils read French.
Je le leur fais lire, / have them read it.
Faites-le-leur lire, have them read it.
But : Je fais lire mes 616ves, / have (make) my pupils read,
Je les fais lire, / have them read.
(5) Kecall impersonal use of faire to express the
state of the weather (Lesson 51): il fait chaud, froid^
beau, etc.
il fait jour, it is daylight. il fait du brouillard, it is foggy.
11 fait sombre, it is dark. 11 fait humide, it is damp.
il fait de la pluie, it is rainy. il fait sec, it is dry.
il fait de la poussiere, it is dusty, il fait frais, it is cool.
But : Le temps est beau, I'air est froid, etc.
(6) Observe also the following idiomatic uses of
faire:
se faire k, to accustom one's self to. faire peur k, to frighten.
d6f aire, to undo, to overthrow. ifdre piti6, to excite pity.
se d6f aire de, to get rid of. faire plaisir k, to afford pleasure to.
faire place k, to make room for. faire faiUite, to fail.
faire naufrage, to be shipwrecked.
faire iin voyage, to take a journey, faire un pas, to take a step.
faire un kilometre, un miUe, to walk a kilometer, a mile.
faire une promenade, un tour, un tour de promenade, to take a walk.
faire un tour de jardin, to take a turn in the garden.
aUer faire des emplettes, to go shopping.
faire le sourd, to pretend to he deaf, faire le diflicUe, to he particular,
faire le mort, to feign death, to keep hard to please.
still. faire I'enfant, to be childish.
1. D^p§chez-vous, nous nous en allons. 2. Vous vous
en allez ? Mais vous venez d'arriver. 3. Je ne sais ni
que dire ni que faire. 4. Monsieur, j'ai mal k la main
droite ; je n'ai pu ^crire mon th^nie, mais je sais tr^s
bien mes lemons. 5. Si vous pouviez le leur faire finir
240 Aller, Devoir^ and Faire
avant le 1^' du mois prochain, ils pourraient partir 1p
lendemain. 6. Vous devez §tre tr^s occupe. 7. Voufc
devriez le savoir. 8. Elle n'aurait pas du sortir sans
attendre ma permission. 9. Quand devez-vous partir
pour la campagne ? 10. Je I'ai fait venir chez moi, et je
lui ai fait ecrire une longue lettre, 11. Savez-vous que
vous nous faites peur'avec vos histoires de revenants;
allez-vous-en. 12. Quand cet enfant parle a son chien, il
dit toujours, " Va-t'en." 13. Nous allions faire une petite
promenade ce matin, mais il a commence a pleuvoir, et
nous avons du rester chez nous toute la matinee.
14. Yous avez du ^tre tres fach^. 15. Laissez-moi
sortir, je dois faire des emplettes avant le diner.
16. Qui vous a appris tout ce que vous savez ? C'est
lui. 17. Qui lui ? 18. Mon f rere aine ; je sais que
vous le connaissez depuis longtemps. 19. Comment
vont vos deux soeurs ? 20. Cette femme riche, dont on
vient de parler, ne fait que s'amuser tout le temps.
21. Comment vas-tu, mon cher petit ami ? 22. Voici un
joli livre de photographies j veux-tu que je te le fasse
voir?
(A) 1. She was to pay {rendre) us a visit to-day, but
we haven't seen her yet. 2. I am not surprised that
you haven't seen her; she had to go away over a week
ago. 3. Did they tell you that your friend Henry had
arrived in America safe and sound (sain et sav.f) ?
4. He has not gone there, so far as I know. 5. You
frighten these children with your faces {grimaces),
6. Those men were shipwrecked on the second of April,
1890. 7. I shall have him punished by {par) his father.
8. That man ought to have his hair cut. 9. Don't you
think it is far too long? 10. He says he will have it
cut to-morrow. 11. 1 should like to have a co9.t made.
AlleTy Devoivy and Faire 241
12. Shall I send for a tailor ? 13. I heard that his
uncle has failed, but I hope it 's not true. 14. Come
for a stroll in the garden, and you will see what beauti-
ful roses we have. 15. Show {faire voir) them to us.
16. No one can. tell how the thing happened. 17. She
can read and write, and she is only seven. 18. When
my brother was young, my father made him study every
evening. 19. He made all of his children do their
duty.
(J5) 1. How are you ? 2. I am very well, thank you ;
how are you (and you) ? 3. Really ? What is the
matter with you ? 4. What are you going to do now ?
5. Is this hat becoming to me ? 6. Do you think (find)
that it fits him better ? 7. When are you going away ?
8. Why do you go away so soon ? 9. We are going to
the theatre this evening ; can't you go (there) with us ?
10. You are busy ! What are you going to do ? 11. Are
you never at liberty ? 12. Would you like to go with
us ? 13. Can you speak Spanish ? 14. Have you ever
learned to read it ? 15. Can't you dance ? 16. Can
you not dance this evening ? 17. Do you owe him a
dollar ? 18. When are you to pay it ? 19. Ought you
to pay it soon ? 20. Ought you not to have paid it long
ago ? 21. Has he ever asked you for it ? 22. Don't
you think he needs it ? 23. You will give it to him at
once, won't you? 24. What kind of weather is it
to-day ? 25. Are n't you hard to please ? 26. Don't
you do anything but work ? 27. Do you like to go
shopping ? 2^. Do you get up before the sua rises ?
16
242 Formation of Tenses
95
Formation of Tenses.
The five tenses from which we may form the other
parts of regular verbs and of most of the irregular verbs
are called primitive tenses, or principal parts. They
are as follows : Infinitive, Present Participle, Past
Participle, Present Indicative, Past Definite.
By the use of + and — signs, the formation of tenses may be clearlj
shown by the following
r+ ai = :
' \+ ais =
Table.
Future.!
Infinitive, ^ , . ^ „ ,
' ' . Conditional Present.*
ant -f ons = 1st person plural Present
T^ ,. , Indicative.
Pres. Participle J . . ^
j — ant 4- ais = Imperfect Indicative.
I — ant + e = Present Subjunctive.
Past Participle : after avoir or Stre = Compound Tenses.
,^ -. n St person sing. = 2d person sing. Imperative.
Pres. Indicative J .^ / . "^ , / _, ^*= ..^
(^ (3d person plural — nt = Pres. S cbjunctive.)''
Past Def. : 2d person sing, -f se = Imperfect Subjunctive.
Example : Suivre, to follow,
- . rje suivrai, Future.
Suivre, I
\ je suivrais, Conditional Pres.
rnous suivons, 1st person plural Present Indicative.
Soivantji je suivais, Imperfect Indicative.
Present Subjunctive.
rnous suivons, is
t, \ je suivais, Impe
I que je suive, Pr
1 See page 102. ^ See page 191.
Formation of Tenses 243
'j'ai suivi, Past Indefinitb.
j'avais suivi, Pluperfect Indicativb.
j'eus suivi, Past Anterior.
j'aurai suivi, Future Perfect.
Suivi J j'aurais suivi. Conditional Perfect.
que j'aie suivi, Perfect (Past) Subjunctive.
que j 'eusse suivi, Pluperfect Subjunctive.
avoir suivi, Perfect Infinitive.
ayant suivi, Perfect Participle.
. (suis, Imperative.
^ \ (que je suive, Present Subjunctive.)
je suivis: que je suivisse, Imperfect Subjunctive.
Form the tenses of the following irregular verbs from
their principal parts :
Dormir, to sleep, dormant, dormi, je dors, je dormis.
Also: partir, to go out, sortir, to go awaji, servir, to serve, se re-
pentir (de), to repent, sentir, to feely mentir, to {tell a) lie^ s'endormir,
to go to sleep, etc., and their compounds.
Observe that the final consonant of the stem is dropped in the sin-
gular of the Present Indicative of these verbs : pars, sers, sens, etc.
Offrir, to offer, offrant, oflfert, j'offre, j'offris.
Also: souffrir, to suffer^ ouvrir, to open, couvrir, to cover, and their
compounds.
Prendre, to take^ prenant, pris, je prends, je pris.
Present Indicative. Present Subjunctive.
je prends. nous prenons. que je preune. que nous prenions.
tu prends. vous prenez. que tu prennes. que vous preuiez.
il prend. ils prennent. qu'il prenne. qu'ils preanent.
Also the compounds of prendre : apprendre, to learn, to teach, com-
prendre, to understand^ entreprendre, to undertake^ etc.
Plaindre, to pity, plaignant, plaint, je plains, je plaignis.
Also : se plaindre, to complain, and all verbs in -aindre, -eindre,
-oindre, such as craindre, to fear, peindre, to paint, eteindre, to extin-
guish, teindre, to tint, atteindre, to reach, oindre, to anoint, jolndre, to
join, etc.
244 Formation of Tenses
Naitre, to be horn, naissant, ne, je nais, je naquis.
Like connaitre and paraitre, this verb has i in the stem everywhere
before t.
Plaire, to please, plaisant, plu, je plais, je plus.
Third singular, present indicative, il plait.
Also : se taire, to he silent (no i in third sing., present indicative).
Vivre, to live, vivant, v6cii, je vis, je vecus.
Battre, to strike, battant, battu, je bats, je battis.
Also: se battre, tojight, combattre, to combat, etc.
Conduire, to conduct, conduisant, conduit, je conduis, je
conduisis.
Also all verbs in-uire (instruire, traduire, produire, introduire, etc.),
except luire, to shine (past participle, lui, and no past definite), and
nuire, to injure (past participle, nui).
Passive Voice.
(1) As in English, any tense of the Passive Voice of
a transitive verb is the same as the corresponding tense
of the auxiliary verb followed by the past participle of
the verb in question. See Appendix, page 330.
EUe est aim6e de tout le monde, she is loved by ex^eryhody.
Nous avons ete recus avec honneur, we were received with honor.
(2*) The passive is used far less frequently than in
English, its place being taken by on with the active or
by a reflexive construction.
On ni*a dit que ce n'est pas vrai, / have been told that it *« not true.
On leur a donn6 des livres, some books have been given to them.
La porte s'ouvre, mais personne n'entre, the door is opened, but no one
comes in.
Cela ue se dit pas, no one says that.
Formation of Tenses 245
1. Nous partirons pour Edimbourg le 27, nous arrive-
rons a Glasgow le 28, et nous en repartirons le 30 pour
rirlande. 2. Ne vous repentez-vous pas d'avoir offens^
un de vos meilleurs amis ? 3. Voici mon porte-monnaie ;
servez-vous-en, je vous prie. 4. N'ouvrez pas cette
fenetre ; j'ai peur d'un courant d'air. 5. En hiver je
souffre tou jours du froid. 6. Con naissez- vous beaucoup
de monde ici ? 7. Moi ? je n'y connais personne.
8. Madame N. est n^e k Dinan, en Bretagne, le 12 fevrier,
1881, d'une famille honnSte et ancienne. 9. Napoleon
naquit en 1769 et mourut en 1821. 10. II faut qu'on
prenne les choses comme elles viennent et les hommes
comme ils sont. 11. Apprenez ces vers par cosur.
12. La plupart des hommes estiment ce qu'ils ne com-
prennent pas. 13. Vous me promettez de faire cela,
n'est-ce pas ? 14. Qui est-ce qui vous permet de parler ?
16. Allez devant ; je suis k vous, et je vous suis.
16. Qui vivra verra. 17. De qui vous plaignez-vous ?
18. Desquels de ses amis se plaint-elle ? 19. Voici
I'atelier ou un grand artiste peignait. 20.' Cela ne plait
pas a tout le monde. 21. II parait que vous vous plai-
siez a Paris, lorsque vous y demeuriez. 22. Comment
traduit-on cette phrase? 23. Faites taire votre chien.
24. Ne comprenez-vous pas ce que je veux dire ?
25. Avez-vous jamais entendu ceci ? — je ne suis pas ce
que je suis; si j'etais ce que je suis, je ne serais pas ce
que je suis.
(A) 1. Take an umbrella, if you go out; it will rain
in less than (before) an hour. 2. Follow us; do not
follow them. 3. Take me to Mr. B's house ; I am to
see him on (^pour) business. 4. Those boys quarrel very
often. 5. I have forbidden them to fight. 6. Tell him
to hold his tongue. 7. Is it polite to say, " Hold your
246 Formation of Tenses
tongue'^ ? 8. My brother has been given a gold watch.
9. My grandfather always falls asleep while reading the
newspaper. 10. Let us not fall asleep while we are read-
ing ; we are too young to do that. 11. Your cousin is not
a reasonable man ; nothing pleases him. 12. I know that,
he always complains of everything. 13. Let us offer
these flowers to (our) mother ; they are the most beauti-
ful ones we have ever offered her. 14. But they are not
the most beautiful that have ever been given her.
15. If you wish us to open our books, please tell us at
what page we are to open them. 16. You niay open
them at page 196. 17. / know this man, but you have
never even seen him. 18. What [difference] does that
make ? 19. Don't be childish; put on your hat and go
and take a walk with them. 20. Alfred Tennyson was
born in 1810; Macaulay was born in 1800 and died in
1858. 21. They were great writers. 22. Michael
Angelo {Michel- Ange) and Rubens painted magnificent
pictures.
{B) 1. At what time do you start for school [in] the
morning ? 2. Do you understand what is said to you in
French ? 3. When French is spoken, do you translate
it into English or do you think in French ? 4. What
ought one to do ? 5. Do you wish to have the door
opened ? 6. Who opens it in the morning ? 7. Don't
you pity him ? 8. Do you know what you are saying ?
9. I am told that Benoit and Co. {Compagnie = Cie.) have
failed ; do you know anything about it ? 10. I was
told the same thing a few days ago ; do you suppose
it is true ? 11. How should one always behave {se coii-
duire) ? 12. What has been given you ? 13. Of what
do you complain ? 14. Do I complain of you ?
15. Have you a dog ? 16. Does it follow you 9
Relative and Interrogative Pronouns 247
17. Would it like to follow you everywhere ? 18. Can
you guess what I have in my hand ? 19. Do you want
me to tell you what it is ? 20. Has this book ever been
translated ?
96
Summary of Relative and Interrogative Pronouns.
Relative pronouns.
Nominative, qui, luho^ which, that.
/'de qui, of whom.
I dont, of whom, of which, whose.
' j duquel, de laquelle, ^ of whom, of which,
l^desquels, desquelles, J whose.
Dative, k qui, to whom.
auquel, k laquelle, ^
auxquels, auiqueUes,}'" '"*""'• '" «'*'''*•
Accusative, que, whom, which, that.
Interrogative pronouns.
Persons. Things.
Nominative.
qui 1 qui est-ce qui 1 who ? qu'est-ce qui 1 what ?
Genitive.
de qui 1 of whom ? de quoi ! of what ?
duquel 1 de laquelle 1 \®/ "^^''^^ duquel ? de laquelle 1 |o/ which
desquelsl desqueUesI j {oneis))! des quels 1 desqueUes 1/ (one{«))?
Dative.
k qui 1 to whom ? k quoi 1 to what ?
auquel 1 k laquelle 1 '\ to which auquel ? k laquelle? ^ to which
auzquelsT auzquelles! J (on6(s))? auxquels? auzquelleslj (one(5))?
ACCDSATIVE.
quil qui est-ce que 1 whom f que 1 qu'est-ce quel what f
quoil what? used alone as an
exclamation or as the object
of a verb understood.
For the use of these pronouns, refer to Lessons 17,
46, 53, 54, 55, 81.
248 Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns
Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns.
The following are adjectives only:
chaque, eachy every. certain, certain.'^
qnelque, some; pi., yew. different (e)s, )
quelconqne (after the noun) , whatever, divers, diverses, 3 '^^^^"*'
maint, manij a. mSme, sdf, same, even.
Also: quel . . . que (with subjunctive of 8tre),
quelque . . . que (with subjunctive), ) "" ^^^^^^'
For quelque as an adverb, see Lesson 82.
Chaque homme; il 7 a quelque temps; des livres quelconques;
maintes f ois ; une certaine histoire; diff^rentes (diverses) affaires;
Ja meme justice {the same justice); la justice meme {justice herse/f);
aujourd'hui meme ; quelles que soient ses id^es ; quelques amis qu'il
ait; quelque petites qu'elles soient.
The following are pronouns only :
chacun(e), each, each one. rien, nothing.
quelqu'un(e), some one, any one. personne, nobody.
quelques-uns (unes), some, few. on, one, people, etc. (Lesson 39).
quelque chose, something. autrui, ot/ters (with preposition only).
Chacun de ces hommes; on le dit; les betises que Ton dit; les
fautes d'autrui.
Quelqu'un, quelque chose, personne, and rien take de before an ad-
jective. Donnez-moi quelque chose de joli, give vie something pretty,
N'avez-vous rien de plus joli, have you nothing prettier f
The following are adjectives or pronouns :
aucun(e), \ ^^^ ^.^^ ,.^,b) *^^^^^)» ^f ^•
^^1(1«)' no, nobody. *^*^^' ''^''' ,
P^s un(e), J tout, toute, ^^.^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^
plusiers, several. tons, toutes, J
Aucune (nulle, pas une) femme ne le croit; sans aucune faute;
aucun d'eux ne I'accepte; j'en ai plusieurs; de tels hommes; des lits tels
quels {such as they are) ; monsieur un tel {Mr. So and So) ; tel pere,
I For position and meaning of certain, diflEerent, divers, and mgmCf see
page 35L
Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns 249
tel fils ; tou8 les hommes sont mortels ; c'est toat ; nous sommes toufi ^
ici; tous les deux (tous deux); Tun et 1' autre ; autres temps, autrei
moeurs {customs) ; il y en a d'autres ; vous autres soldats {you soldiers).
Tout, quite, wholly.
Tout used as an adverb varies for the sake of euphony
before a feminine adjective beginning with a consonant
or an h aspirate.
Elle est toute surprise, she is quite surprised.
Elles sont toutes honteuses, they are greatly ashamed.
But: Elle est tout aimable, she is very agreeable.
Tout poll qu'il est, however polite he is.
Observe indicative.
Sol (rarely used), oiie's self^ himself,
Sol, the disjunctive form of se, generally refers to
on, chacun, personne, etc., and is used only with a prep-
osition.
Chacun pour sol, every man for himself.
On est heureux lorsqu'on est content de soi.
One is happy when one is satisjied with one's self.
1. A vez-vous encore le inoindre doute ? Aucun.
2. Tout ^leve aime un raaitre aimable. 3. Chaque ^leve
de cette classe I'admire. 4. Chacun a sa maniere de
voir. 5. On ne doit pas se raoquer d*autrui. 6 D^autres
preudraient cela d'une autre faqon. 7. II n'y a personne
qui n'en soit fach^. 8. II n'y a pas une personne
qui n'en soit fach^e. 9. Nous sommes tous 4 vous,
10. Nous sommes tout a vous. 11. EcoutezI qu'on me
laisse tout seul ! 12. Ces messieurs sont tout prets.
13. Le crime traine apr^s soi des remords. 14. La
valeur, tout h^roique qu'elle est, ne suffit pas pour faire
^ 8 pronounced when touB is a pronoun.
250 Relative and Interrogative Pronouns
des heros. 15. Toute ville a ses ooutumes. 16. Toutes
les villes de la France ont quelque chose d'interessant.
17. Toute confiance est dangereuse, si elle n'est pas eutiere.
18. Pouvez-vous traverser la chambre sans rien regarder?
19. Lisez avec beaucoup de soin les quelques pages qui
suivent. 20. Qui que ce soit qui vous Tait dit, il s'est
troinpe. 21. On ne fait pas toujours ce qu'on doit
faire.
{A) 1. He has been waiting here a long time for
some one. 2. We Americans are never content with
what we possess. 3. Give me any (a) book what-
ever. 4. Do you think she is quite happy ? 5. A cer-
tain man was speaking to me about various things, and
he asked me what I have just asked you. 6. No man is
perfect. 7. What were you looking for in the kitchen ?
8. I was looking for something to eat. 9. Something
good, I suppose. 10. Such is the kindness of this
gentleman, that we no longer need anything. 11. Who-
ever [see page 205] you may be and whatever you may
do, your duty is to obey the law (loi, f.), 12. Whatever
your intentions [f.] may be, you must not forget the
rights of others. 13. Has he no fault ? 14. Both are
guilty. 15. Every man is mortal. 16. Did you ever
see such a man ? 17. Every friend that he used to
have has forgotten him. 18. I know nobody more
agreeable than his wife. 19. We have heard that said
many a time, biit we do not believe it. 20. His brothers
are quite happy. 21. His sisters are quite sad.
(^) 1. Whom have you met to-day? 2. What are you
going to do now? 3. What are you thinking of?
4. Did I ask you of whom or of what you are thinking ?
5. Has any one found a key ? 6. 1 thank you for
Position of Adjectives and Adverbs 251
returning it to me ; did you find it yourself ? 7. The
woman whose son died yesterday is very poor, is she
not ? 8. Is n't the one whose sons are living, poorer
still ? 9. Who is it that you are working for ?
10. What do you write with ? 11. Do you wish me to
give you what I have in my pocket ? 12. Who is the
boy I saw you speaking to this morning? 13. Is he
the one you were telling me about yesterday ? 14. What
is this book ? 15. Whose is it ? 16. What color is
it ? 17. Which of these books are yours ? 18. Which
is the best ? 19. What is that ? 20. What is a cat ?
21. Whose friend is that man ? 22. However rich
people may be, are they always sure of being happy ?
23. Who says that ? 24. Have you nothing new to
tell us ?
97
Position of Adjectives.
Adjectives generally follow their nouns, especially :
(1) Adjectives denoting a physical quality : — shape,
color, taste, etc.
Tine table ronde ; une maison blanche ; un homme boiteux {lame) ;
une femme malade; de I'ean froide (chaude, fraiche) ; one oran^
douce; la tete et les pieds nas {head and feet bare).
Note that like demi in demi-heure, half-hour^ nu is invariable before
the noun : nu-tete, bareheaded ; nu-pieds, barefooted.
(2) Adjectives denoting nationality, religion, or office.
La langue f ranqaise ; on prStre catholique ; un ministre protestant ;
on d6cret imperial.
252 Position of Adjectives and Adverbs
^3) Adjectives taken in a literal rather than in a
figurative sense.
un abime prof ond, a deep abyss. un profond silence, a deep silence.
un cheval noir, a black horse. un noir soupQon, a dark suspicion.
une maison ch^re, an expensive house, une chere amie, a dear friend.
une histoire vraie, a true story. une vraie histoire, a regular yarn.
For other adjectives with meanings varying according to position,
see page 351.
(4) Present or past participles used as adjectives.
une personne charmante ; un garden obeissant ; une porte f enn6e ;
le Paradis perdu; une bataille perdue.
(5) In an exclamation and in the expression plus . . .
plus, the more . . . ,the more, etc., the adjective stands
after the verb.
Que le temps est beau, how beautiful the weather is !
Plus on est riche, moins on est heureux, the richer a man is, the less
happy he is.
Observe use of de after que, how many, how muck !
Que de fois je Tai ytl, how many times 1 have seen him I
ADVERBS.
Adjectives used as Adverbs.
An adjective used as an adverb is invariable.
parler bas (haut),^o speak low (loud). tenir bon, to stand firm.
chanter juste (faux), to sing in (out of) tune, aller droit, to go straight.
sentir bon (mauvais), to smell good (bad). arret er court, to stop short.
viser haut, to aim high. voir clair, to see clearly.
n Ta fait expres, he did it purposely.
Formation from Adjectives.
To form an adverb from an adjective, add -ment to the
masculine if the adjective ends in a vowel ; if it ends iu
a consonant, add -ment to the feminine.
Position of Adjectives and Adverbs 253
poll, poliment, politely. doux, doucement, gently.
facile, facilement, easily. cruel, cruellement, cruelly.
For further rules and exceptions, see Appendix, page 353.
Position.
When used with an infinitive, mieux, bien, mal, jamais,
toujours, pas, plus, and trop generally precede the verb.
(See Lesson 58.)
mieux 6crire, bien parler, mal prononcer, ne jamais se tromper, ne
pas rire, ne plus manger, trop courir.
Observe that regularly both parts of the negative
stand before the infinitive. Personne and que follow.
EUe voudrait ne parler k personne, she would like to speak to nobody.
Je crois n'en avoir que deux, / thmk I have only two.
Comparison.
(6) Adverbs are compared like adjectives (Lesson
44), except that in the superlative le is invariable.
souvent ; plus souvent ; le plus souvent.
(7) The adverbs bien, mal, peu, corresponding to bon,
mauvais, petit, are irregularly compared :
bien, well. mieux, better. le mieux, the best.
mal, badly, ill. pis, ivorse. le pis, the untrst,
peu, little. moins, lens. le moins, the least.
de mal en pis, /row bad to worse.
taut mieux (pis) pour moi, so much (all) the better (worse) for me.
(8) The before a comparative is not expressed in
French.
Plus on est riche, plus on a de souoii, the richer a man is. the more
cares he has.
Plus il travaiUe, moins il r^ussit, the more he works, the less he sue
254 Position of Adjectives and Adverbs
(9) Than before a tense of the indicative is expressed
by que . . . ne.
Nous sommes plus riches que vous ne pensez, we are richer than you
think.
Elle est plus studieuse qu'elle ne Tetait autrefois, she is more studi-
ous than she was formerly.
But, if the first clause of the sentence is negative or interrogative,
or if there is an adverb between que and the verb, the ne is left out.
N'agissez pas autrement que vous parlez, do not act otherwise than
you speak.
Croyez-vous qu'un homme puisse etre plus heureux que vous I'etes
depuis trois mois ? Do you think that a man can he happier than you
have been for the last three months?
Elle est plus malheureuse que lorsqu'elle demeurait chez vous, ^e
is more unhappy than she was when she lived with you.
S'asseoir, to sit down.
Present Participle, c'asseyant. Past Participle, assis.
Present Indicative.
jd m'assieds, tu t'assieds, il s'assied, nous nous asseyons, vous vous
asseyez, ils s'asseyent.
Past Definite, je m'assis. Future, je m'assi^raL
Present Subjunctive.
que je m'asseye, que tu t'asseyes, qu'il s'asseye, que nous nous
asseyions, que vous vous asseyiez, qu'ils s^asseyent.
Imperative, assieds-toi, asseyons-nous, asseyez-vous.
seoir, to suit, to become, asseoir, to seat. 8tre assis, to be sitting.
1. Donnez-vous la peine de vous asseoir. 2. Qui s'est
assis le premier ? 3. Me voila assis ; maintenant je suis
pr§t*a regarder tout ce que vous voulez me f aire voir.
4 Oil voulez-vous que je m'asseye maintenant? Par
terre ? 5. Quoiqu'il soit empereur, il a commis plus de
Position of Adjectives and Adverbs 255
crimes que le dernier miserable enfernie dans ses prisons.
6. Je crains, mon ami, que vous n^exag^riez un peu votre
connaissance du franqais; j'ai decouvert plus de dix
fautes dans votre derniere lettre. 7. J'aime k croire
que vous ne les avez pas faites expr^s. 8. J'ai cruelle-
ment souft'ert du froid tout le temps qu'a dure Fexpedition
malheureuse. 9. II me semble que votre oncle est beau-
coup plus riche qu'il ne Petait il y a six ans. 10. Je
sais qu'il n'est pas moins riche qu'il P^tait Pannee der-
niere. 11. Croyez-moi, plus vous vous abstiendrez de
ces bruyants plaisirs, plus vous serez heureux. 12. Vous
avez fait plus de progr^s que je ne Pesperais. 13. Nous
nous sommes assises pour nous reposer quelques minutes,
et on nous a apport^ tout ce qu'il y avait de bon dans la
maison. 14. Asseyez-vous la immediatement. 15. Qui
a lu Le Eoman d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre ? 16. II y a
dans cette ville quatre prStres catholiques et plusieurs
pasteurs protestants.
1. This man acts better than he speaks. 2. He is
richer than people think. 3. The distance is less^ than
you pretend. 4. Is there any one ill at your house ?
5. Do you wish to sit down or do you wish us to sit
down ? 6. Where are you going to sit ? 7. Fortu-
nately, some of the ladies are already seated. 8. Let us
all sit down here at this little round table and take some
coffee. 9. Have you no better coffee ? 10. Bring us
some cold water too, please. 11. That gentleman has a
bottle of red wine. 12. She is a far more charming
woman than she used to be. 13. Really, you rarely see
a woman more worthy of being loved. 14. She is also
more learned than I had thought. 15. The more you
attack ^ tim, the more we shall defend him. 16. The
1 Adjective. « Future of attaqner.
256 Negation
richer a man is, the less free he is. 17. We are all glad
that wars ^ are becoming less numerous than they used
to be. 18. He reads better than he writes, but that is
not saying 2 much. 19. Can't he write better? 20. Try
not to write badly. 21. What beautiful roses ! how
good they smell ! 22. Have you seen our new servant ?
23. My doctor has advised me not to read any more at
night. 24. Get away now ! you will not have anything
more. 25. I beg you not to say that. 26. I believe
he says it purposely.
98
Negation.
(1) The use and position of the most common negar
tive expressions have already been noted : ne . . . pas,
rien, personne, etc.
Elle ne me le donne pas. Ella n'a plus d' argent.
Elle n'a pas chante. Elle n'a guere d'esprit.
Elle n'a rien dit. N'a-t-elle ni plumes ni crayons 1
Elle n'a vu personne. Que fait-elle % Rien.
Elle n'a que des amis. Qui voit-elle ] Personne.
Plus d' argent, no wore money.
For position of negative adverbs used with the infinitive, see page 253.
(2) For the use of ne without pas or point, see Les-
sons 80 and 82 ; also (9) of the preceding lesson.
Ne is also commonly used alone as a negative :
{a) With the verbs pouvoir, oser, cesser, savoir, and
sometimes bouger, to stir^ when they are not especially
emphatic.
Je ne sais que f aire, / donH know what to do,
Je ne bougerai de 1^, / shall not stir,
Je ne puis le faire, / cannot do it.
1 guerre (f.)- ^ vouloir dire.
Negation 257
But generally pas is used with the form je peiLX : Je ne penz pas le
faire. Ne is always alone in je ne saurais (je ne peux pas) and je
ne sals quel.
{h) In a subordinate clause when the principal clause
is negative in meaning.
Je n'ai rien qui ne vous appartienne, / have nothing that belongs to you,
(c) After si used negatively and meaning unless,
J'irai le trouver, si vous n'y aUez vous-mlme, / shall go and Jind
him, ij^ you do uof go {u7iless yon go) yourself.
(d) After que beginning a negative sentence and
meaning 2vhi/, or after qui in exclamations.
Que n'est-il venu, why did n't he come f
Que ne lui avez-vous dit tout ce qui s'est passe 1 Why did rCt you
tell him all that took place ?
Compare with use of pourquoi, which asks for the reason, while
que . . . ne is exclamatory iji meaning.
{e) After depuis que or 11 y a . . . que, followed by
the past indefinite with a negative.
H y a dix jours que je ne I'ai vu, it is ten days since I saiv him, or /
have n't seen him /or ten days.
If the verb is not in the past indefinite, pas or point
must be used.
n y a dix jours que nous ne nous parlous pas, we have not spoken
to each other /'or ten days.
n y avait dix jours que nous ne nous par lions pas, we had not
sjjoken to each other for ten days.
(/) After peu s'en faut, or after 11 s'en faut negative or
interrogative.
Peu s'en faut qu'il ne le fasse, he comes very near doing it.
Vl ne s'en faut pas (de) beaucoup qu'il ne r^ussisse, he cornea very
near succeeding.
258 Negation
Oui and si, yes ; non, no.
Oui assents, but si disputes a negative.
Vous etes pr§t, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, monsieur. You are ready ^ are
you not ? Yes, sir.
II n'est pas ici. Si, madame, il est ici. lie is not here. Yes^
jnadam, he is here.
Vous n'avez plus d'argent. Mais si, j'en ai beaucoup. You have n«
more money. Why yes, I have a great deal.
Fartez-vous toujours pour la Suisse ? Non, monsieur. Are you stiH
planning to start for Switzerland ? No, sir.
Cultiv^e the habit of using monsieur, madame, mademoiselle, much
more frequently than in English, especially with yes and no, which are
rarely heard alone in France.
Observe the use of que before oui, si, or non, after verbs of saying,
thinking, etc.
Dites-vous que oui ou que non I Moi, je dis que oui. Do you say
yes or no ? / say yes, •
Ne . . . que and seulement, only.
Only may be expressed by ne » . . que when it refers
to the complement of a verb.
Je n'en ai que deux, ^
J'en ai deux seulement,}^ """^ ""'^ "^-
II ne fait que jouer, \ . . , , ,
II joue seulement. J ^^ '^'^' ""'^'"^ '^^P'"^-
But Venez seulement, only come.
Deux seulement, s'il vous plait, only two, please.
Seulement mes amis y assisteront, only my friends will he present,
1. Plus d'argent, done plus d'arausement. 2. N'im-
porte; j'aime raieux ne pas m'aniuser. 3. Moi aussi.
4. J'aime k croire que vOus n'avez pas repet^ ce que je
vous ai dit il y a quelques jours. 5. Je n'ai dit mot a
personne, et je n'en parlerai pas de ma vie. 6. EUe n'en
parlera pas non plus. 7. Ni moi non plus. 8. Ecoutez
Negation 259
seulement, vous apprendrez beaucoup. 9. Seulement
votre frere est arrive ce soir. 10. Vous n'Stes done pas
allee k oe bal, mademoiselle ? 11. Si fait, j^y suis all^e.
12. Rien n'emp^che d'etre naturel tant que Peuvie de le
paraitre. 13. Voulez-vous bien rie pas bailler (yawn) ?
14. Est-ce que vous vous rappelez ce que dit Maxime ?
— " Mon nom n'est pas plus k vendre qu'k louer."
15. C'est quand on lui a offert une femme riche en
echange de son titre. 16. II n^avait pas d'amis ; 11
n'avait que des connaissances. 17. Est-ce que vous
n'avez des connaissances que dans cette ville ? 18. Qui
de nous n'a ses defauts ! 19. Que ne nous a-t-il appeles
k son secours ? 20. Pauvre ou non, elle est toujours
. lieureuse. 21. L^honnete homme ne trorape jamais
personne. 22. Nous le ferons non seulement pour lui,
mais aussi pour ses amis. 23. II n'y a rien que cet
enfant ne sache. 24. C'est un enfant terrible probable-
ment. 25. Je viens de recevoir de leurs nouvelles ; ils
se plaignent de ne pas vous voir. 2^. Main tenant ils ne
sont que sept. »^
1. How many men came when you did (= with you) ?
2. There were only three. 3. Only three ? 4. You
have n't met any of them yet, I suppose. 5. Yes, I have
met one. 6. He has no more money. 7. He has no
more money than you, you mean (vouloir dire), 8. Yes,
of course (hien entendu), 9. I have told her never to go
out in the evening without inviting me to accompany
her. 10. He likes nobody, and nobody likes him.
11. He prefers not to be agreeable. 12. Neither his
parents nor his brothers will defend him. 13. They
dare not do it. 14. They know that they would be
wrong to do so. 15. They give him no money, but he
never ceases to ask them fc some. 16. It is more than
260 The Use of De
SIX months since they gave him any. 17. Do not say
anything about it, because it may not be true. 18. Why
did n^t you say that sooner ? 19. He will certainly
punish the children who do not obey him. 20. I say
no; he never punishes anybody. 21. This boy reads
French better than he writes it. 22. I think not, sir.
23. I say yes ; what I said is absolutely true. 24. He
ought to read well; that is all he does all day long.
25. Yes, he does nothing but read. 26. I told you that
so as not to deceive you. 27. Let us say no more about
it ; let 's forget it ! 28. There are things one can never
forget. 29. For ten days I haven't thought of it one
single time. 30. It is only seven o'clock; you have
time to do that. 31. We cannot eat; we are neither
hungry nor thirsty. 32. Nor they either. 33. When
we go for a walk together, you do nothing but run; I
cannot walk so fast. 34. There is nothing he does not
try to do to please us.
99
The Use of De.
(1) We have seen de used as of or from, as some or
any in the partitive article, as than before a numeral,
hy denoting measure, in after a superlative, and with
the infinitive after certain verbs.
n est loin d'ici. Elle est plus grande que moi de deux pouces.
Avez-vous de la monnaie ? La plus haute de la ville.
Plus de cinq cents. Permettez-moi de parler.
(2) De is also used in the sense of hy after certain
verbs used in the passive, such as etre aime, hai (hated),
craint, estiiDe, honore, vu, regarde, aper^u, suivi, accom-
pagne, precede, etc.
The Use of Be
261
Par may also be used with these verbs and throws
the emphasis upon the performer of the action.
They say she was seen by every*
body.
I ask by whom she was seen.
She is loved by everybody.
She is loved by her children.
The general is followed by his troops.
He is followed by the troops of the
enemy.
On dit qu'eUe a 6t6 vue de tout le
monde.
Je demande par qui elle a ete vue.
EUe est aimee de tous.
Elle est aimee par ses enfants.
Le general est suivi de ses troupes.
U est suivi par les troupes enne-
mies.
(3) De means with after a large number of adjectives
denoting source , separation, feeling y etc., such as: absent,
plain, libra, malada, content, hanreux, fiar, siir, fach^, surpris,
convert, etc.
EUe est ravie de votre succ^s, she is delighted with {at) your success.
(4) Observe also the following uses of de :
le chemin de Tours, the road to Tours.
la ville de Paris, the city of Paris.
le royaume de Suede, the kingdom of Sweden,
un homme de talent, a man of talent.
quelque chose de beau, something beautiful.
rien de plus beau, nothing more beautiful.
tout ce qu'il y a de plus beau, the most beautiful.
avoir Pair de, to appear.
dependre de, to depend upon.
blamer de, to blame for.
feliciter de, to congratulate upon.
se m§ler de, to attend to,
(se) rire de, to laugh at.
se moquer de, to make fun of.
remercier de, to thank for.
se souvenir de, to remember.
se nourrir de, j
, ? to Live on.
vivre de, )
jouir de, to enjoy.
se re jouir de, to rejoice at.
profiter de, to profit by.
s'approcher de, to apjn-oach.
savoir gr6 de, to be grateful for.
se douter de, to suspect.
se passer de, to do without.
s'emparer de, to take possession of.
s'agir de, to l>e a question of.
se repentir de, to repent {of),
se soucier de, to care about.
mourir de faim, etc., to starve, etc.
connaitre de vue, to know by sight.
pleurer de coldre, to weep with
anger.
262 The Use of De
faire de, to do with.
faire signe de la main, to make a sign with the hand, .
mourir de la main de, to die by the hand of.
c*en est fait de, it 's all up with. de bonne heure, earhj.
que de, how many ! how much ! de bon appetit, with a good appe-
de trop, too many, in the way. tite.
de plus, besides. de mon temps, when I was young.
de ce c6t6, on this side. du vivant de, during the lifetime of.
de part et d' autre, on the part of de cette maniere, in this way.
both. jamais de la vie, necer (emphatic).
de toutes parts, on all sides. le lendemain de, the day after.
tenir de son pere, to take after his father.
si j'6tais de vous, if I were in your place.
changer, to change [transform).
changer de chapeau, to change one's hat.
changer d'avis, to change one's mind.
changer — en — , to change — into —
manquer, to fail, lack, icant.
manquer de respect k, to be lacking in respect for.
mon ami me manque, / miss my friend.
j'ai manqu6 le train, / lost the train.
pr^s de, near (time or place). faute de, /or want of.
aupres de, beside (place or com- hors de, out of
parison ) . le long de, along,
d'apres, according to, after, from. vis-k-vis de, opposite to.
1. L'eloquence est uii art tres serieux, destine a iu-
struire, a reprimer les passions, a corriger les moeurs, et
a soutenir les lois. 2. La condition des comediens etait
infame chez les Romains, et honorable chez les Grecs.
3. II a de son cote quelque chose a dire, il me semble.
4. De mon temps les choses ne se passaient pas ainsi.
5. All moment ou la course des chevaux va commencer,
toute la foiile se range des deux cotes de la rue.
6. Moliere, a dix ans, etait orphelin de mere. 7. II s'en
faut de beaucoup que vous soyez aussi age que votre
frere. 8. Ce malade n^a rien mange depuis quatre
iours. 9. La tragedie du Cid est de Corneille. 10. Get
The Use of Be 263
homme-1^ est aime de tous ceux qui le connaissent;
celui-ci est aime par ses voisins. 11. La grande salle
se reraplit de monde. 12. II a paye son audace de sa
liberte, et enfin de sa vie. 13. Pour former I'imparfait
de I'indicatif, on change la terminaison -ant du participe
present en -ais, 14. Une troisi^me personne est toujours
de trop. 15. Tantale mourut de soif. 16. On a peint
ce beau tableau d'apr^s nature. 17. Apr^s la pluie le
beau temps. 18. Adieu, charmant pays de France!
*(J) 1. I remember you. 2. Do you remember him
(Her, it) ? 3. If I were in your place, I would n't do it.
4. Those children have light hair and blue eyes ; they
all take after their mother. 6. The old beggar (mendi-
ant) was always followed by his little dog. 6. The
beggar was driven away by our dog. 7. Go and change
[your] hat. What for ? 8. Some one has hurt this
child. 9. Who has hurt him ? 10. Nobody ; he is cry-
ing with anger. 11. What is it [all] about ? 12. Dur-
ing my father's lifetime that never happened. 13. I
rejoice at your good fortune; shall I congratulate you
on it? 14. That depends; on what? 15.1 do not
need to tell you that. 16. Come nearer (approach) the
table. 17. Let us cross the street; there are fewer
people on the other side. 18. That makes no difference ;
I prefer to walk on this side. 19. The teacher that died
yesterday was loved by everybody, especially by her
pupils. 20. That old man is so miserly (avare) that he
does without a Christmas tree (arbre de Noel). 21. I
don't care. 22. It is not polite to say that.
(^B) 1. Do you remember me ? 2. Do you think I re-
member you ? 3. Do I blame you for your mistakes ?
4. Ought we to profit by the mistakes of others ?
6. Do you repent for what you have done ? 6. At what
264 The Use of 1
time does the train for start ? 7. Do you get up
early ? 8. Do you enjoy playing ? 9. What do we
live on ? 10. Do you take after your father or your
mother ? 11. Are you proud of it ? 12. Do you know
that lady ? 13. Only by sight. 14. Why do you
make fun of your friends ? 15. Have you nothing
better to do ? 16. May I congratulate you on what has
happened ? 17. Have n't you anything new to tell us ?
18. Are you surprised at it ? 19. Are you glad of it ?
20. Can some of these sentences be expressed in more
than one way ? 21. Express Van dix-huit cent soixaiite
in another way.
100
The Use of A.
Besides the uses of a already given (tOy at, in, with
infinitives, etc.), we may also note the fallowing :
(1) After many adjectives such as accoutume, attentif,
sourd, docile, superieur, etc.
(2)- With the definite article to denote a physical
quality, a hahit, the dress, etc.
un homme au regard timide, a man with a timid look,
une femme aux cheveux chttains, a woman with dark-hrown hair,
du potage au lait, milk soup.
(3) Between two nouns to denote use, purpose, jLt-
ness, or style.
une machine k coudre, a sewinrj -machine,
un couteau a papier, a paper-knife,
un bateau k vapeur, a steamboat,
un moulin k vent, a windmill.
du papier k lettres, letter-paper.
tta fer k chaval, a korse-shoe.
The Use of 1
2^
Compare un pot k fleurs, a Jlower-pot, with un pot de fleurs, a jxd
of flowers ; un verre k vin, a wineglass, with un verre de vin, a glass
of wine; etc.
(4) Observe also :
croire k, to believe in.
penser k, to think of,
rever k, ) , » ^
' > to dream of,
songer k, >
assister k, to be present at,
toucher k, to touchy to meddle with.
prendre gout k, to take a liking for.
prendre part k, to sliare in.
prendre plaisir k, to take pleasure
in.
fouler auz pieds, to trample under
foot.
aller k toute vapeur, to go at full
steam.
vendre k la livre, to sell by the
pound.
fait k la main, made by hand.
c'est k vous k (de) parler, it^s
your turn to speak.
en vouloir k, to have a grudge
against, to dislike.
§tre k I'heure, to be on time.
k votre montre, by your watch,
c'est-k-dire, that is to say.
k ce soir, good-bye until this eve-
ning.
an revoir, ) good-bye until I have
> the pleasure of see-
au plaisir, ) {ng yp^ again.
le 5 mars, au soir, on the evening
of March 5th.
k dessein (expres), purposely,
k tort, wrongly.
k haute voix, aloud,
k Toiz basse, in a low tone.
k merveille, wonderfully,
au plus, at the most.
au plus vite, as quickly as possibU,
au eontraire, on the contrary,
au fait, indeed ; in fact.
k droite (gauche), on (or to) the
right {lefl).
comme k T ordinaire, as usual,
k genoux, on ones knees, kneeling,
au doigt, on the finger,
k mes d^pens, at my expense,
k bon marchd, cheap,
k I'ceil nu, with the ncJced eye,
8tre k la mode, to be in style,
k table, to {at) the table.
au rez^e^1iaQ886e, on the gr^mnd
floor.
au premier (6tage), on the first
story.
k travers, across^ through,
k cdt6 de, l)eside.
k I'exception de, except,
au delk de, beyond.
au-dessus de, above,
au-dessous de, below,
au lieu de, instead of,
autour de, around,
^«^~' [help!
aueecours! )
au voleur ! thieves ! or stop thief!
au feu ! fire !
k Tassassin ! murder !
k la bonne henre ! ail right ! good!
k nous deux, monsieur I now, sir!
2€6 The Use of A
a and de.
servir, to serve. jouer, to play,
servir k, to be {used) for. jouer k tin jeu, to play a game,
servir de, to serve as or instead of. jouer d'un instrument, to play an
se servir de, to make use of. instrument.
marier, to marry ^ give in marriage. jouer aux cartes, k la balle, au
se ma.rier, to get married. cache-caclie ; jouer du violon,
se marier k (avec) ) to marry, take de la fliite, jouer (or toucher)
epouser, ) in marriage. du piano.
Interjections of frequent use are :
aliens ! corns ! en avant ! forward !
voyons ! look here ! gare ! look out !
tiens ! indeed I courage ! cheer up !
tenez! hold! h^las! alas I
par exemple ! the idea I
1. Prenez la peine de vous mettre a table, monsieur.
2. Marie, apportez-nous trois verres a vin et trois tasses
a the; nous resterons ce soir dans la salle k manger.
3. Est-ce que vous consentez a lui donner ce joli papier k
lettres ? 4. Non, certainement, je ne le lui donnerai
pas. J'en ai besoin moi-meme. 5. Je placerai sa
photographic au-dessus de ce tableau, et la votre au-
dessoiis. 6. II fait froid aujourd^hui; il n'y a que deux
degres au-dessus de zero. 7. Mon oncle a marid sa fille
la semaine derniere, et j'ai assiste aux noces. 8. Avec
qui s'est-elle mariee ? 9. Avez-vous jamais lu La Dame
aux Camelias ? 10. Je I'ai lu et jo Pai vu jouer par
Mme. Bernhardt. 11. Etes-vous accoutume k voir les
pieces franqaises ? 12. Preferez-vous les comedies ou
les tragedies ? 13. Vous avez vu les deux Coquelins,
n'est-ce pas ? 14. Je n'ai pas vu Coquelin aine, mais
j'ai vu Coquelin cadet plusieurs fois. 15. Get accident
a ete fatal atoutes mes esperances. 16. Quel dommage !
17. A-t-il gagne ou perdu a faire cela ? 18. Comment !
The Use of 1 267
il touche du piano ? 19. On peut toucher du piano et
§tre honn^te homme. 20. Courage, camarade, le dia-
ble est mort!
{A) 1. That beautiful child with large black eyes and
black hair is my little nephew. 2. Here are some books
I bought cheap; I paid only two dollars apiece for them.
3. It strikes me they were dear. 4. There are a great
many windmills in Holland. 5. Don't touch ! 6. We
are amusing ourselves at your expense. 7. Butter is
always sold by the pound. 8. How much does it cost a
pound ? 9. What kind (espece, f .) of boat is that ?
10. It is a steam-boat. 11. It arrives at ten o'clock and
it is on time, to-day, as usual. 12. What is that gray-
haired man doing ? 13. He is selling flower-pots.
14. Beyond the Alps lies (se trouver) Italy. 15. One
must always be ready to die for one's country {patrie, f.).
16. His friends are deaf to all his prayers (priere, f.)
17. They used to share in his good fortune, but now that
he is unfortunate, that is to say, now that he is poor,
they never come to see him. 18. They used to take
pleasure in his company. 19. It seems to me they avoid
meeting him. 20. Alas, how true that is! 21. On the
contrary, sir, his old friends do not neglect him; they
often go to his house, but he is never at home. 22. It
is thought that he keeps his door locked purposely.
23. It is probable that he is too proud to see them.
(B) 1. Do you like to read aloud ? 2. Why don't you
work a little instead of playing all the time ? 3. Did
you ever find a horse-shoe when you were (while) out
walking? 4. When you go home do you turn to 'the
right or to the left ? 5. Do you live on this side of the
street ? 6. Have you any letter-paper to lend me ?
7. What instrument do you play ? 8. Is it easy to learn
268 The Use of A
to play the piano ? 9. What is a sewing-machine for ?
10. Are you always attentive to what is being said to
you ? 11. Who is the gentleman with the broad
shoulders ? 12. Do you believe in ghosts ? 13. AVho
has ever been present at a wedding ? 14. What time is
it by your watch ? 15. What is a pen used for ?
16. When you travel do you find that the trains are
always on time? 17. Explain to us the difference be-
tween adieu and au revoir, 18. If we were playing
cards and if I said to you C^est a voics, would you under-
stand what I meant ? 19. Do you live on the first or
second story ?
101
The Prepositions En and Dana.
En has a vague and general meaning and is rarely
used with the definite article ; dans has a precise and
limited meaning and takes an article.
Observe : en prison, dans cette vieille prison ; en danger, dans un
grand danger ; en voiture, dans une belle voiture ; en France (pas en
Angleterre), dans la France (pas hors de, outside of, la France) ; docteur
en philosophie or en medecine, but docteur or bachelier es lettres, es
sciences (es contraction of en les) ; en haut, upstairs, en bas, downstairs,
en I'air, in the air.
Also: agir en chr6tien. en prince, to act lil-e a Christian., lil-e a
prince ; il a parle en maitre, he talked like a master, but il m'a trait6
de prince, he treated me as if I were a prince,
A, dans, and en.
A la maison, at home, dans la maison, in the house (pas hors de la
maisou) ; k Paris, at or in Paris, dans Paris, inside of Paris ; k la ville,
in the citfi (not in the country), dans la ville, inside the city, en ville. in
town (not at home).
Some Prepositions of Time or Place 269
Depuis, pendant, pour, dans, en, in expressions of time.
Depuis marks the beginning of a period of time; pen-
dant, its whole duration, and is often omitted ; pour, the
time allotted for an action ; dans, the time at the eud of
which an action will take place ; en, the time taken to
perform the action,
II 6tait k Rome depuis huit jours, he had been in Rome a week.
n y est rest6 pendant quinze jours, he stayed there a fortnight.
U 7 est alio le lendemain pour trois moil, he went there next day for
three jnonths.
II partira dans une semaine, he will go in a week,
II finira son travail en trois jours, it will take him three day$ioJinUh
his work.
D^s, k partir de, and depuis.
"Dhs^ from, since, no later tJian, and k partir it, from
— on, are used only of time ; depuis is used of either
time or space.
D^s le 1^'* Janvier, depuis avant-hier, k partir de ee jour ; d^ demain,
no later than lo-monow, h, partir de demain, from to-ivorroic on ; depoii
Paris jusqu'au Havre, /rom Paris to Havre; depuis le premier jusqu'
au dernier, y/om the first to the last.
Vers and envexs.
Vers expresses direction or time; envers, feeling or
behavior.
II est all6 vers la ville, he went towards the city ; vert troii heoret,
about three o'clock ; cruel envers les pauvres, harah to the poor.
Observe also :
a vrai dire, to tell the trnth. regarder par, to look through,
pour aiusi dire, so to speak. par le temps qu'il fait, in this weather.
pour affaires, on business. entre les mains de, in the hands of,
dans rile, on the island. chez les Franqais, among the French,
dans I'escalier, on the stairs. en m§me tempi, at the same time.
boire dans, to drink fron. jusqu'ici, hitherto.
270 Some Prepositions of Time or Place
Form from the principal parts all the tenses of the f oh
lowing irregular verbs :
Fuir, to flee y fuyant, fui, je fuis, je fuis.
Vetir, to clothe, vetant, vetu, je vets, je vetis.
Valoir, to be worth, valant, valu, je vaux, je valus.
PRESENT INDICATIVE. FUTURE, je Vaudial.
je vaux. nous valons. present subjunctive, que je vaille.
tu vaux. vous valez.
il vaut. ils valent.
Boire, to drink, buvant, bu, je bois, je bus.
present subjunctive, que je boive.
Suffire, to be enough, suffisant, suffi, je suffis, je sufiis.
Vaincre, to conquer, vainquant, vaincu, je vaincs, je vainquis.
In the verb vaincre, c is cliauged to qu before every vowel except u.
Also convaincre, to convince,
1. We shall start for the country to-morrow morning
at 7.45. 2. We intend to come back to the city about
nine in the evening.' 3. If you will not be here before
that time, I think I will dine in town. 4. Do you wish
me to wait for you at the station ? 5. I have done all I
could to convince him. 6. Now it is possible to go to
Chicago in eighteen hours. 7. Mr. N. will start for
England in a fortnight ; he has to go there on business.
8. I have explained all that to you once ; that is suffi-
cient. 9. Look out of the window, please, and tell me
what you see. 10. I can see nothing at all in this
weather, that is to say, nothing very interesting.
11. Nothing but rain, I suppose. 12. To tell the truth,
it has done nothing but rain during the last two or three
weeks. 13. You mean two or three days, do you not ?
14. Does it seem to you as if I exaggerate ? 15. Yes,
many times. 16. We had our breakfast upstairs this
morning. 17. AVhat [difference] does that make to me ?
18. It makes no difference (nothing). 19. We must be
Some Prepositions of Time or Place 271
polite towards everybody. 20. Try, and you will con-
quer all these difficulties. 21. Do you know Mrs. M. ?
22. I have just had the pleasure of making her acquaint-
ance. 23. You must have known her by sight for a
long time. 24. How well she sings, doesn't she?
25. How much patience one must have with pupils that
do not work! 26. Almost everybody drinks wine while
travelling in France. 27. Do you drink coffee from a
glass, or from a cup ? 28. That 's enough to make you
laugh, isn't it? 29. [He] laughs (fut.) best (well) who
laughs (fut.) last. 30. Better (is worth) late than
never. 31. How is it (comment cela se fait'll) that you
know nothing of what has happened ? 32. When you
write to him, give (make) him my regards (friendships).
REVIEW EXERCISES
1. 1. Fresh water ; the dry land ; old newspapers ;
her blue ribbons; what beautiful sweet flowers ! 2. You
will need courage. 3. I have a headache this evening;
I can neither sing nor play. 4. We have no jewels, but
our friends have some. 5. What friends ? 6. Those
who live in that fine new house. 7. Whose is it ? 8. It
is theirs; their father gave it to them, 9. Tell me
whom you have seen to-day. 10. What ! you have seen
her? 11. I have never read those books, but I have
read these, and I like them better than any others I
know. 12. I found a great many there. 13. Let us not
speak of it to her or to them. 14. My father and mother
left England on the 1st of May, 1891. 15. Columbus
{Colomh) was an Italian. 16. He served the King of
Spain faithfully. 17. Naturally, we think that he car-
ried off a great victory by discovering the new world.
18. Cardinal Mendoza was a faithfiM friend of Columbus,
and often invited him to his house. 19. I should like
you to go for a walk with me at twenty minutes to three.
20. He loves nobody, and nobody loves him.
2. 1. Nobody is ever forgotten. 2. We must not be-
lieve all that is said. 3. Do you doubt my having suc-
ceeded ? 4. I do not doubt your succeeding some (one)
day. 5. We do not wish to tell him all our business,
although he is our uncle. 6. Why don't you wish him
to know what has happened ? 7. We fear he will refuse
to let us do what we desire. 8. I hope you will not try
Review Exercises 273
to deceive him. 9. We want more money. 10. You
will be obliged to write all this before you go. 11. If
you wish to go soon, you must work as fast as })Ossible.
12. You must be very hungry after so long a walk.
13. Wait till we come back. 14. How many favors (ser-
vices) he has done (rendered) me ! 15. You make (ren-
der) him very happy by saying that. 16. I see what
you are doing ; stop it at once. 17. How pleasant that
remembrance must be to you ! 18. Hun and tell him
we have arrived. 19. When you go to get your hat,
kindly bring me mine. 20. Can't you get along
without it?
3. ' 1. If you would like to know those gentlemen, I
should be glad to present you to them. 2. You ought to
introduce me to her; it was a friend of mine that intro-
duced her to you, was it not ? 3. Do you wish to go
with me or do you wish me to leave alone ? 4. Why
does that boy beat his dog so ? 5. He beats it to make
it obey him. 6. What do you think of that ? 7. What
have you to tell us ? 8. Walk as far as the house or
until you meet him. 9. This gentleman must be a pro-
fessor of modern languages. 10. Yes, he is my brother's
professor of French. 11. They have gone to France, to
Paris. 12. Have you a postage stamp (timbre-poste, m.)
for me ? 13. We understand nearly every word he says.
14. Do you know those ladies ? 15. We know their
names. 16. What makes your friends laugh? 17. This
tea is almost cold ; bring me another cup of it 18. How-
ever interesting our books may be, they do not make us
forget our absent friends. 19. I should like to spend a
few days in Scotland next summer. 20. We visited
that magnificent church on the very day of our arrival
(arriveBy f.).
18
274 Review Exercises
4. 1. Some men are esteemed by everybody, even by
their enemies. 2. Did you tell them that I should be
here on Monday ? 3. What do you do on Sunday ?
4. We shall always be ready to go to church at a quarter
past ten. 5. What makes you wait so long ? 6. Let us
start right away. 7. Napoleon III. was born April 20,
1808. 8. He became emperor in 1852. 9. How good
that flower smells! 10. Speak louder, please. 11. Why
don't ^ you study more ? 12. We used to have • live
horses ; we have sold two and now we have only three.
13. When you began to study music, how many lessons
did you have a week ? 14. When shall we have the
pleasure of seeing you again ? 15. As soon as our
friends have gone. 16. What are they playing now at
the Theatre-FranQais ? 17. When we reach Paris, we
shall look for a house near the Champs-Elysees.
18. How sick you look ! 19. Go to bed early this even-
ing. 20. 1 want you to get up before six.
5. 1. I have lost my new silk umbrella. Why, no,
there it is I 2. Would you dare to use any of his books,
if you needed them ? 3. When you are ready to go to
Europe next year, remember me. 4. I have a great
many addresses to give you. 5. This man bores (erh-
nuyer) everybody with his stories. 6. What a tiresome
man ! 7. Our neighbors are always in style. 8. Why
do you never shut the door ? 9. When we lived in New
York, we met him very often. 10. As soon as we reach
Liverpool, we must send letters to our friends in America.
11. Always reflect before acting. 12. Next time I shall
not accept your excuses. 13. I would do it if I could.
14. Could n't you do it if you would ? 15. You ought
not to have asked that. 16. You have not answered his
letter yet. 17. I shall answer it to-morrow. 18. Serve
Review Exercises 275
as at once ; we are in a hurry. 19. We do not live to
eat; we eat to live. 20. Follow us; do not follow
them.
6. 1. Those gentlemen wear gloves in summer as well
as in winter. 2. You must keep on writing until you
can show me a page written well enough to satisfy (satis-
/aire) me. 3. I make a great many mistakes, it is true,
but I write better than you think. 4. That makes me
smile (soui'ire), 5. Be silent ! 6. Does he know how
to play chess (echecs) ? 7. That is a game he has never
learned. 8. I have heard that it is the most difficult of
all games. 9. They had just left when their friends
arrived. 10. What do your friends do during the
holidays (vacances) ? 11. Do you need anything ?
12. What ? 13. I am looking for a few souvenirs that
will please my friends. 14. Although we were very
tired, we could not sleep last night. 15. It was too
cold perhaps. 16. We were not cold. 17. Louis XIV.
was seventy-seven years old when he died. 18. One day
I gave some money to a blind [man], but he gave it back
to me, saying, "I do not take Canadian pieces." 19. He
was n't blind ; he was deaf and dumb {sourd-muet),
20. It is easy to learn these rules, but it is still easier to
forget them.
7. 1. Do you think that French is easy to learn ?
2. His health is very good now ; it is far better than it
was formerly. 3. I am very glad of it. 4. Everybody
is mistaken sometimes. 5. Our servant has gone to (the)
market {marche, m.). 6. Where are the letters I told
you to write ? 7. I finished them long ago. 8. Whom
do you see coming? 9. I can't see any one now,
10. Our examinations (exameii, m.) are always very
hard. 11. That is the most beautiful song I have ever
276 Review Exercises
heard sung. 12. He has promised to spend two or three
weeks at our house, provided his father consents to it,
13. If I were sure that he would consent, I should invite
a few other friends to come at the same time. 14. Is
there nobody that can tell me what I ought to do ?
15. When we were in Europe last year, we received a
great many letters from our friends, which (ce qui) made
us very happy. 16. I do not know whether we shall re-
ceive so many, now that we have come home again.
17. You talk too loud; do you think I am deaf ? 18. I
do not think you are. 19. Don't you know that I am
not ? 20. I do.
8. 1. Tell us something new. I don^tknow anything
new to tell you. 2. If we had a few francs (of) more,
we should have money enough to buy that little gold
watch. 3. It costs ten francs too much. 4. How long
is that chain ? 5. It is twenty inches long. 6. Can't
you remember anything ? 7. If you are neither hungry
nor thirsty, do not wait for us any longer. 8. Are n't
you afraid you will be hungry before one o'clock ?
9. I am not. 10. We wish we had something good to
eat. 11. It is possible we may find something at the
station. 12. We almost missed the train. 13. It was
your fault. 14. I don't care. 15. You ought to be
ashamed of your conduct. 16. Do not scold me;
this is {c'est aujourd^Jmi) my birthday. 17. This little
girl has learned to write well. 18. How old is she?
19. She is only seven. 20. Who wrote to tell you of
our friend's death ?
9. 1. Walk in front of me, I beg of you. 2. It is
your place to go first. 3. What (quoi de) more fortu-
nate than what happens to you ? 4. " What a lot of
books ! " he said to me. 5. What do you find in these
Review Exercises 277
woods ? 6. Nothing but tall trees. 7. I often used to
go to the little old white church when I was in the coun-
try. 8. Let us speak to him about it when he comes.
9. France is a beautiful country ; its inhabitants speak
French. 10. Brittany (la Bretagne) is perhaps the most
interesting part of the whole country. 11. Tell us,
please, what that signifies. 12. Whicli of those two
churches do you admire the more ? 13. Whoever (it may
be that) did that, he will never come back. 14. The
books of which he spoke to you are in the dining-room.
15. Where is the little boy to whose father you gave a
franc ? 16. I don't know anything about it. 17. We
know what you are thinking of. 18. Which of those
knives are the heaviest ? 19. You will see him as
you go from here. 20. 1 know I shall, unless I start
too late.
10. 1. What is your name ? 2. My name is Arthur :
what is yours ? 3. However great kings may be, they
are what we are. 4. Whose is this cane ? 5. It *s not
mine, for I have mine. 6. It must be one of his. 7. It
is possible that it belongs to that gentleman with whose
son you were just speaking. 8. Don't keep it; give
it back to him. 9. What is the matter with him?
10. Nothing, so far as I know. 11. He was not afraid
it would rain^ he was afraid that he would find there
a certain person he did not wish to see. 12. They
have nothing to live on. 13. That is probably because
they have spent more money than they have earned.
14. WTiat is that to you ? 15. It ^s all the same to me.
16. It would be better for him to do it. 17. Have you
ever seen anything like [it]? 18. No, I never have.
19. He did his best to please us. 20. It does not
matter.
278 Review Exercises
11. 1. Everybody has left. 2. Finish writing yout
letter at once. 3. Have you counted these sentences ?
4. How many are there ? 5. The sun is shining for
every one. 6. In summer the days are longer than in
winter. 7. The museum of the Louvre in Paris is the
largest and most beautiful one in Europe. 8. Don't you
hear the noise in the street ? 9. Have n't you heard
what it is ? 10. I have never even heard of it.
11. He never hears (has news) from his niece, unless
he writes to her. 12. If you had put that book on
my desk, it would be there still. 13. This is more
than I need. 14. My life is at stake. 15. Shall we
walk or ride this morning? 16. As you please (fut. of
vouloir). 17. The English travel a great deal on the
Continent, although they do not like to cross the Chan-
nel. 18. If you had ever crossed it yourself, you would
not blame them. 19. I have done so more times than
you think. 20. You are not to repeat to any one what
you have been told. 21. They must be sorry to know
of your illness. 22. Come and pay (make) us a visit
soon. 23. Before he went away, he told me he would
be back in a week. 24. Do not speak to us now ; we
are reading something very interesting. 25. Do not
read so loud; there is some one sick in the next room.
2Q>, We have not seen each other for ten ou twelve years.
27. Many things have happened since you saw her.
28. ISTame the most interesting French books you have
ever read. 29. Only rich people put up at that hotel.
30. These sentences are much easier to write than you
pretend.
Heview Exercises 279
n.
Sentences selected from college entrance examinations.
1. 1. Come and see me Monday, the twenty-second
of June. 2. He will give you some books if you obey
him. 3. She came to me saying, ** Give me some red
roses." 4. We often think of you and your sick friend.
5. Who is it ? What is it ? Tell me of what you are
thinking. Whom do you see ? What does he say ?
6. What is electricity {electricite) ? I don't know what
it is. 7. In which house does he live, the wooden one
or the marble one ? 8. Here are his two new books ;
which do you prefer ? 9. I saw him go out two hours
ago. It is now five o'clock. 10. Don't let him see
them. 11. Make him read it. He has written it him-
self. 12. What you say is true, I have heard it said.
13. Sit down if you please, he will come soon. 14. Give
them some. Give it to them. Don't give any to him
or to her. Present me to them. 15. He introduced
himself to us. 16. What tine apples ! Give me six.
17. Two thousand seven hundred and ninety-one men
were killed in that battle. 18. He was hungry and
stole a dollar from that old lady. 19. How well he
sings ! How beautiful it is ! 20. Have the windows
closed, it is cold to-day.
2. 1. I wish he would come. I must see him at once.
2. I am afraid they will come without hats. 3. He has
hurt himself. They say he broke his arm. 4. The
prettiest child in town has yellow hair and blue eyes.
5. Whose is that ancient book ? Is it yours or your
brother's ? 6. Please give this pen and paper to your
280 Heview Exercises
friend, and tell him to keep them till to-raorrow.
7. Has any one come ? No one has come. 8. Have
you any letters for me ? I have two, and there is also
a package for you. 9. It will be mine before to-morrow.
10. You must not do it. 11. I do not think he did it.
12. He has hurt his foot. 13. Let us eat, drink, and
be merry. 14. The man whose house you will see.
15. His wife was at the same time his friend. 16. George
Washington was born on the twenty-second of February,
seventeen hundred and thirty-two. 17. 1 have more
money than he has, because he has none at all. 18. Al-
though he did it, he will not do it again. 19. When
can I see you ? 20. I shall be at home to-morrow even-
ing at seven o'clock ; bring your friends, and I will
take you all to tlie theatre.
3. 1. Have you written the letter which I dictated to
you this morning ? 2. I have written it and I have sent
it to the person to whom it was addressed. 3. Was
there an answer to it ? No, there was not. 4. Have
they been waiting for us long ? 5. I believe they
have been waiting since ten minutes to three. 6. Where
are they now ? 7. They are all in the dining-room.
8. Well, let them come in, I am ready to see them.
9. Do you know what they want ? 10. They want to
speak to you about their work. 11. What is the matter
with you ? 12. What are you about ? 13. If he would
but do it ! 14. Mind your own business. 15. The story
goes that he did it. 16. I happened to be near him
at the time. 17. You had better not do that again.
18. How long is it since you have heard from him ?
19. It is all up with me. 20. Stand still.
4. 1. What is that to him ? 2. It is in vain for you
to do it. 3. I shall not be able to go with you unless
Review Exercises , 281
you return with me. 4. They would like to take the
king prisoner. . 5. You read much, but you say nothing.
6. I shall soon know French. 7. If he or she had given
them the letter yesterday, I should already have received
it. 8. It is true. 9. What is true ? 10. It is true
that the king is dead. 11. You must go away from
here. 12. There are six or seven men in that room,
but I do not see any bey there. 13. If. she were to
speak quickly (rapidement), I should not answer her.
14. Do not come with me, but go away. 15. Tell me
what I ask you. 16. Ask your father for it. 17. Ask
them who is with them. 18. I shall not be able to give
it to him. 19. I give it to you. 20. What have you
given him ?
5. 1. I shall go to France. 2. You must know your
lesson. 3. I shall know it (i, e, the lesson). 4. I want
you to do it. 5. I ought to give him some. 6. I was
here when he came. 7. Must you go so soon ? 8. I
should take him there if he would go. 9. It is better
that you should give it to her. 10. What have I done
to make you detest me ? 11. Whenever I see her I am
happy. 12. If I saw them I should be happy. 13. I do
not think he will do it. 14. They did not want him to
have it done. 15. Let us eat all we can. 16. I have
already called him and I am calling him now. 17. 1 work
as much as he does. 18. What is more rare {exquis)
than a day in June ! 19. He says that this book is a
better one than that book, and yet I like that one better.
20. Should we have had to do it ?
6. 1. I cannot tell you how glad I should be to see
him. 2. It was not worth doing. 3. I should have
wanted him to come. 4. He would have to go. 5. Al-
282 Review Exercises
though I am young, I am brave. 6. Do what you can,
and never mind what people say. 7. I want you to
come with me to my father's house. 8. It would be
better for him not to do it. 9. Tell him that he may
come with us, if his father is willing. 10. Should you
not have done it before ? 11. I have not many more
sentences {phrase) to write. 12. I am afraid you are
tired. 13. Which season do you like best ? 14. Give
me some apples. I have no apples. 15. Have you my
pens ? No, I have not seen them. 16. Did your sister
go with you? No, she remained with my mother.
17. The weather is very fine for the season, is it not ?
18. Did you look at the ice on the lake in passing ? Yes,
the ice is good, and we can soon skate. 19. Do you like
to skate ? Yes, but I cannot go skating this evening.
20. I must stay at home.
7. 1. You can amuse yourself reading. 2. I have
left all my books at school. 3. If I had them, I should
prepare my lessons for to-morrow. 4. If I do not pre-
pare them, the master will not be pleased. 5. If you
wish to study, I will lend you my books. 6. If you
were to lend them to me I should be very glad ; I should
study the whole evening. 7. I do not wish to lose my
time. 8. Where is the pen I gave you yesterday?
9. I do not know what I did with it. 10. He died in
eighteen hundred and seventy-nine, while his parents
were living in Europe. 11. I see what you are doing.
12. What am I doing ? 13. Go to her and speak to her.
14. Do not speak to her. 15. Do not speak to him or to
her. 16. I beg you not to do it. 17. I must see what
will result from it. 18. You and he are always good
friends. 19. Time is money. 20. He is the only man
who can do it.
Review Exercises 283
8. 1. While I was eating, he came in. 2. As soon as
I had finished drinking, I went out of the house.
3. When will this cruel war be over? 4. He does not
distinguish what is mine from what is his and what is
hers. 5. He is my old friend. 6. I have told you of
the one I have always called and still call my brother.
7. He had to do it. 8. Have you any good friends ?
9. Do you prefer this book or that one ? 10. Let us go
away. 11. I told him never to give me any. 12. If he
does it I shall be happy, but not if she does it. 13. I
have been looking for you for three days. 14. Ask her
for it now or never speak of it to her. 15. Neither gold
nor silver can make us happy. 16. You understand
what I mean. 17. I am the only one older than he.
18. You have got to do it. 19. As I was calling him,
he came out of the house. 20. As soon as I had called
him, he came out of the house.
9. 1. I do not think that he will be able to do it.
2. You and I will walk together. 3. I made the ac-
quaintance this morning of a man who asked me if I
believed in the central fire. 4. Columbus conceived
that by going towards the west he could reach the East
Indies. 5. He believed the earth to be round, which
was then a new idea. 6. He thought, however, that it
was much smaller than it really is. 7. Whatever the
sun may be, it is not inhabited. 8. I fear you may not
be welcome here. 9. Things are going from bad to
worse. 10. I think very highly of him. 11. What is
he up to now? 12. However skilful he may be, he
will not succeed. 13. There is no day which does not
give proof of it. 14. What do I care? 15. I fell in
with a man who made me fall into the water, and so we
fell out. 16. There is no cause for laughter. 17. So
284 Review Exercises
much the better for you. 18. Say what you thiuk.
19. I came, I saw, I conquered. 20. He has never done
anything worth while.
10. 1. You see what it is to be a stranger. 2. No
traveler, so far as I know, has mentioned it. 3. Hardly
had he spoken when the carriage stopped. 4. Up to
that time, few people had left the city. 5. We are to
read that book together, are we not ? 6. Have you ever
read it before ? 7. 1 read it about a year ago, when I
was at my uncle's; but T have forgotten the subject.
8. I do not know anybody who is willing to do it.
9. He who has overcome his passions has won (remporter)
a great victory. 10. Every one for himself. 11. I do
not know what you are thinking of. 12. Wait until he
has come. 13. He writes better than he speaks.
14. What is the use of that ? 15. Speak of anything
whatsoever. 16. I am surprised that he did not bow to
(saluer) that gentleman. 17. I asked them if she would
come to-day, but they would not answer. 18. Seventy
and twenty-three make ninety-three (write out the nurri'
hers in full). 19. I am working only to help you.
20. I thank you most heartily for all your kindness.
(a) I came to Cambridge a week ago and met your
brother. He took me to his room in college and then
asked me to accompany him to his home, where we
should find the rest of the family. You were not there,
but I had the pleasure of seeing your father, mother,
and two sisters. After talking for some time, your
brother and sisters and I went for a walk, during which
they showed me many interesting things.
(h) The fatal day arrived at last. Inglesant had
passed a sleepless night; he had not the slightest fear of
death, but excitement (emotioii) made sleep impossible.
Review Exercises 285
He thought often of his brother, but he had learned that
he was in Paris alone ; and even had he been in England
(^Angleterre) he felt no especial desire to see him. Mary
Collet he thought of night and day, but he knew it was
impossible to obtain permission to see her, and he was
tired of fruitless requests. He was weary of life and
wished the excitement over, that he might be at rest.
It struck him that the greatest harshness {durett) was
used towards him: his food {noinrriture) was poor and
no one was admitted to him. But he did not wonder at
this.
286 Selections for Reading
^^
SELECTIONS FOR READING.
1. Un Drdle de Prisonnier.
,,;j " A moi,^ a moi ! mon capitaine, criait iin soldat, k
^ ^ moi I je tiens un prisonnier. — Eh bien, lui dit le capi-
taine, am^ne-le. — Je ne demande pas mieux;^ mais il
ne veut pas me laisser aller."
■>. ■ .
2. Comment on devient Mar^chal de France.
Le marechal Lefebvre ' avait un caraarade de regiment
qui vint le voir un jour et qui admirait, non sans un
sentiment d'envie, son bel hotel, ses belles voitures, sa
nombreuse livr^e,* ses magnifiques appartements, tout
le train enfin d'un grand dignitaire de Pempire : '^Par-
bleu, lui dit-il, il faut avouer que tu es bien heureux,
et que le ciel t'a bien traits ! — Veux-tu, lui repondit le
marechal, avoir tout cela ? — Oui, certainement. — La
chose est tres simple: tu vas descendre dans la cour de
mon hotel ; je mettrai a chaque fenetre deux soldats
qui tireront sur toi. Si tu echappes aux balles, je te
donnerai tout ce que tu m*envies. C'est comme cela
que je Tai obtenu."
3. L'Op^ration Inutile.
Un officier anglais ay ant rcQu une balle dans la jambe,
fut transports chez lui, ou deux medecins furent appelSs.
1 Help!
2 / ask nothing better ^ or, I wish I could
8 Pronounced Lefevre.
* His great number of servants.
Selections fcyjrjjiead^g |V 287^
Pendant huit jours'^ils nS^fijMtrf que ^ 3bnder et fouiller
la ijjjg^ L'officier, qui^oufFrait beaucdup, leur deinanda
c/qu'ils cherchaient : " Nous cherchonl la balle qui vous
a blessd — C'est trop fort! ^ s'dcria le (patient, pourquoi
ne le disiez-vous pas plus t5t? je Pai dans ma poche/j/^,^v-^
4. A Quoi Sert^ La Vaccine?
Un homme tr^s cr^dule disait qu'il n'avait pas de con-
fiance dans la vaccine. " A quoi sert-elle, ajoute-t-il ; je
connais un enfant beau comme le jour, que sa famille
avait fait vacciner... eh bien! il est inort deux jours
apr^s... — Comment! deux jours apr^s?... — Oui... il est
tomb^ du haut d*un arbre, et s'est tu^ raide... Faites
done vacciner vos enfants apr^s celal"
5. Scdne d'Omnibus.
La sc^ne se passe* dans un omnibus, k Paris. Deux
vieilles dames sont assises Tune a cot^ de I'autre. L'une
veut que la portiere soit ferm^e, Tautre la veut ouverte.
On appelle le conducteur pour decider la question.
"Monsieur, dit la premiere, si cette fenStre reste ou-
verte, je suis sure d'attraper un rhume qui m'emportera.
— Monsieur, si on la ferme, je suis certaine de mourir
d'un coup d'apoplexie." Le conducteur ne savait que
faire,* lorsqu'un vieux monsieur, qui jusque 1^ s'^tait
tenu tranquille dans un coin de la voiture, le tira d'em-
barras. "Ouvrez done la portiere, mon cher ami, cela
fera mourir Tune; puis vous la fermerez, cela nous
d^barrassera de Tautre, et nous aurons la paix."
* They did nothing hut. « Of what ute it,
« That is too much ! < Takes plact,
* Did not know what to do.
288 Selections for Reading
6. Le Docteur Abernethy,
Le docteur Abernethy etait bien connu par son laco-
nisme. II detestait les longues consultations et les de-
tails inutiles. Uue dame, connaissant cette particular! te,
se presente chez lui pour le consulter sur une grave bles-
sure qu'un chien lui avait faite au bras. Elle entre sans
rien dire, decouvre la partie blessee, et la place sous les
yeux du docteur. M. Abernethy regarde un instant, puis
il dit : " Egratignure ? — Morsure. — Chat ? — Chien. —
Aujourd'hui ? — Hier. — Douloureux ? — Kon."
Le docteur fut si euthousiasme de cette conversation,
qu'il aurait presque embrass^ la dame.
II n'aimait pas non plus qu'on vint le d^ranger la nuit.
Une fois, qu'ii se couchait a une heure du matin de fort
mauvaise humeur, parce qu'on ^tait venu le faire lever ^'
k minuit, il entendit la sonnette retentir. " Qu'y a-t-il ?
s'dcria-t-il avec colore. — Docteur... vite ! vite !... Mon
fils vient d'avaler une souris. — Eh bien, dites-lui d'avaler
un chat et laissez-moi tranquille ! " fit ^ le docteur, en se
recouchant.
7. Swift et le Domestique
Un jour un ami de Swift lui envoya un magnifique
turbot. Le groom charg^ de la commission s'etait d^ji
maintes fois acquitte de pareils messages sans avoir
jamais rien requ de Swift. Fatigue d'une besogne aussi
pen lucrative, il d^posa brusquement le poisson sur une
table en s'ecriant : " Voici un turbot que vous envoie mon
maitre. — Plait-il ? * repartit aussitot Swift. Est-ce ainsi
1 Some one had come to call him up.
« Said,
* What do you say t
Selections for Reading 289
que tu remplis tes fonctions ? Tiens, prends ce si^ge ;
nous allons changer de r6le, et tSche, une autre fois, de
mettre a profit ce que je vais t'enseigner." Swift alors
s'avance respectueusement vers le doinestique, qui s'^tait
assis dans un large fauteuil, et lui dit, en lui pr^sentant
le turbot: "Monsieur, je suis charg^ par mon tnaitre de
vous prier de bien vouloir accepter ce petit cadeau. —
Vraiment ? reprit effrontement le valet, c'est tr^ aiinable
k lui; et tiens, mon brave garQon, voici trois francs pour
ta peine."
Swift s'empressa de cong^dier le groom.
8. Le Cheval Trop Court.
Lalande, musicien de la chapelle de Versailles, ^tait
connu comme un homme jovial et qui airaait beaucoup
le plaisir. Jeune, il lui prit en vie, pendant la semaine
sainte, d'aller figurer k Longchamps.^ 11 va trouver
Mousset, loueur de chevaux, retient un cheval richement
caparaQonne, et donne neuf francs k compte sur dix-huit,'
le prix convenu. Sorti de Pecurie, il rencontre un ami
qui lui parle d'une par tie de Longchamps, dans sa voi-
ture avec deux amis. "Si seulement, dit Lalande, je
pouvais retirer les neuf francs que je viens de donner I
En tout cas, allons ohez Mousset, et nous verrons... M.
Mousset, montrez-moi encore une fois le cheval que je
vous ai lou^. — Monsieur, le voici. — Savez-vous, mon-
sieur Mousset, que ce cheval-14 est bien court ? — Com-
ment, Monsieur, bien court? — Mais certainement..."
Puis s'adressant a son ami: "Voili bien ma place, voili
la tienne, voil^ celle de Daigremont... Mais ou done se
1 To go and cut ajigure at Longchamps, a race^oane outside of Paris.
2 Nine francs on account, out of eighteen.
19
290 Selections for Reading
placera Mondonville, et cependant il vient avec nous ?— ^
Comment, Monsieur, vous montez a quatre ? ^ — Mais
oui. — Tenez, voila votre argent ; allez chercher un cheval
ailleurs; je ne loue pas le mien pour qu'on Tereinte."
* 9. Junot et Bonaparte.
Un jour, pendant le siege de Toulon^ un commandant
d'artillerie, venu de Paris depuis peu de jours pour
diriger les operations du siege, demanda au lieutenant
du poste un jeune sous-officier qui eut en meme temps
de Paudace et de I'intelligence. Le lieutenant appelle
aussitot La Temioete^ et Junot se pr^sente. Le com-
mandant fixe sur lui cet oeil qui semblait dejk connaitre
les hommes. "Tu vas quitter ton habit,' dit le com-
mandant, et tu iras la, porter ces ordres." II lui indi-
quait de la main un point plus ^loign^ de la cote, et lui
expliqua ce qu'il voulait de lui. Le jeune sergent devint
rouge comme une grenade, ses yeux etincelerent. " Je ne
suis pas un espion, r^|)ondit-il au commandant; cherchez
un autre que moi pour executer ces ordres." Et il se
retirait. " Tu refuses d'ob^ir ? lui dit Pofficier sup^rieur
d'un ton severe ; sais-tu bien k quoi tu t'exposes ? — Je
suis pret a obeir, dit Junot, mais j'irai la ou vous m'en-
voyez avec mon uniforme, ou je n'irai pas.'' Le com-
mandant sourit, en le regardant attentivement. " Mais
lis te tueront ! reprit-il. — Que vous importe?* Vous
ne me connaissez pas assez pour que cela vous fasse de
la peine, et quant k moi, Qa m'est egal... Allons, je pars
comme je suis, n'est-ce pas ? '' Alors il mit la main dans
i You mean to ride four together t
2 The Tempest, a nickname given to Junot.
8 You are to change your clothes,
* What is that to you?
Selections for Reading 291
sa giberne. ^' Bien ! avec nion fusil et ces drag^es-U,*
du moins la conversation ne languira pas, si ces messieurs
veulent causer."
Et il partit en chantant. Apres son depart: "Com-
ment s'appelle ce jeune homme ? demanda Pofficier
superieur. — Junot. — II fera son chemin." Alors le
commandant inscrivit sou nom sur ses tablettes. On a
facilement devine que Pofficier d'artillerie ^tait Napoleon.
Peu de jours apr^s, se retrouvant k cette m6me bat-
terie, Bonaparte demanda quelqu^un qui eut une belle
Venture; Junot sortit des rangs et se pr^senta. Bonar
parte le reconnut pour le sergent qui avait d6j^ fix^ son
attention. II lui temoigna de Tint^ret, et lui dit de se
placer pour ^crire sa lettre sous sa dict^e. Junot se mit
sur Pepaulement m^me de la batterie.^ A peine avait-il
termini sa lettre, qu'une bombe lanc^e par les Anglais
delate k dix pas, et le couvre de terre ainsi que la lettre.
"Bien, dit en riant Junot, nous n'avions pas de sable
pour secher I'encre." Bonaparte arreta son regard sur le
jeune sergent; il etait calme et n'avait pas mdme tres-
sailli. Cette circonstance d^cida de sa fortune.
10. La Plus Grande Ganache de rEmpire.
Un jour Napoleon, fort m^content k la lecture d'une
d^peche de Vienne, dit k Marie-Louise, "Votre p^re
est une ganacheP Marie-Louise, qui ignorait beaucoup
de termes frauQais, s'adressa au premier chambellan :
** L'empereur dit que mon p^re est une ganache^ que veut
dire cela ? '" A cette demande inattendue, le courtisan
balbutia que cela voulait dire un homme sage, de poids,
1 Thut iugar-plums; that is, the cartridges.
3 The vti'y crest of the fort.
3 What does that mean t
292 Selections for Reading
de bon conseil. A quelques jours de la/ et la m^moire
encore toute fraiche de sa nouvelle acquisition, Marie-
Louise presidait le conseil de famille. Voyant la discus-
sion plus animee qu'elle ne voulait, elle interpella, pour
y mettre fin, M. K...., qui, a ses cotes, ^ bayait aux cor-
neilles.* "C'est a vous a nous mettre d'accord dans
cette occasion importante, lui ^it-elle; vous serez notre
oracle, car je vous tiens pour la plus grande ganache de
Pempire.'^
11. Joseph H et le Sergent.
L'empereur Joseph II n'airaait ni la representation ni
Pappareil. Un jour, rev§tu d\ine simple redingote bou-
tonn^e,* accompagn^ d'un seul domestique k cheval^ et
sans livr^e, il ^tait alle, dans une caliche a deux places qu'il
conduisait lui-meme, faire une promenade du matin dans
les environs de Vienne. Com me il reprenait le chemin
de la ville, il fut surpris par la pluie.
II en etait encore ^loigne, lorsqu'un piston, qui re-
gagnait aussi la capitale, fait signe au conducteur d'arr^
ter, ce que Joseph II fait aussitot. " Monsieur, lui dit le
militaire (car c'etait un sergent), y aurait-il de Pindiscr^
tion k vous demander une place k c6te de vous ? cela ne
vous ggnerait pas prodigieusement, puisque vous Stes seul
dans votre caleche, et menagerait mon uniforme que je
mets aujourd'hui pour la premiere fois. — Menageons
votre uniforme, mon brave, lui dit Joseph, et mettez-vous
\k. D'oii venez-vous? — Ah! dit le sergent, je viens de
1 A few days ajlerwards,
2 At her side,
8 Was gaping at the crows, that is, was staring into the air.
4 Dressed in a plain frock coat^ buttoned up close,
fi On horseback.
Selections for Beading 293
chez un garde-chasse de mes amis,^ ou j'ai fait un fier
dejeuner. — Qu'avez-vous done mang^ de si bon ? —
Devinez. — Que sais-je,^ iiioi; une soupe k la bi^re? —
Ah ! bien, oui, une soupe ; mieux que qa. — De la chou-
croute ? — Mieux que qa,. — Une longe de veau ? • — Mieux
que qa, vous dit-on. — Oh ! ma foi, je ne puis plus deviner,
dit Joseph. — Un faisan, men digne homme, un faisan
tir^ sur les plaisirs* de Sa Majesty, dit le camarade en
lui frappant sur le genou. — Tir6 sur les plaisirs de Sa
Majesty, il n'en devait Stre que meilleur.* — Je vous en
r^ponds.''
Comme on approchait de la ville, et que la pluie tom-
bait toujours, Joseph demanda k son corapagnou dans
quel quartier il logeait, et ou il voulait qu'on le descendlt.
"Monsieur, c'est trop de bont^, je craindrais d'abuser
de... — Non, non, dit Joseph, votre rue ?" — Le sergent,
indiquant sa deraeure, demanda k connaitre celui dont il
recevait tant d'honnetet^. "A votre tour, dit Joseph,
devinez. — Monsieur est militaire, sans doute ? — Comme
dit monsieur. — Lieutenant ? — Ah ! bien, oui, lieutenant;
mieux que qa. — Capitaine ? — Mieux que qa. — Colonel,
peut-etre ? — Mieux que Qa, vous dit-on. — Comment ! s'^
crie le sergent, eu se rencognant aussitSt dans la caliche,
seriez-vous feld-mar^chal ? — Mieux que qa. — Ah I mon
Dieu, c'est I'empereur! — Lui-m6me, dit Joseph, se d^
boutonnant pour montrer ses decorations." II n'y avait
pas moyen de tomber k genoux dans la voiture; I'inva-
lide * se confond en excuses et supplie Tempereur d'arrd-
ter pour qu'il puisse descendre. " Non pas, lui dit
Joseph ; apr^s avoir mang^ mon faisan, vous seriez trop
1 A gnme-keeperj a friend of mint, * TIow do I know?
^ Aloinofvral. * The pleature grounds^ tht prtstrvti,
* There ought to he nothing better.
• The veteran*
294 Selections for Reading
heureux de vous d^barrasser de raoi aussi promptement ;
j'eiitends bien que vous ne me quittiez qu'k votre porte."
Et il Py descendit.
FOUR FABLES BY LA FONTAINE
La Cigale et la Fourmi.
La cigale ayant chants
Tout V^t^,
Se trouva fort depourvue * •
Quand la bise f ut venue ^ :
Pas un seul petit niorceau
De mouche ou de vermisseau.
Elle alia crier famine
Chez la fourmi sa voisine,
La priant de lui preter
Quelque grain pour subsister
Jusqu'a la saison nouvelle.
*^ Je vous paierai, lui dit-elle,
Avant Tout/ foi d'animal,
Interet et principal.''
La fourmi n'est pas pretense :
C'est \k son moindre defaut.*
" Que faisiez-vous an temps chaud ?
Dit-elle a cette eraprunteuse.
— N"uit et jour a tout venant ^
Je chantais, ne vous deplaise.®
— Vous chantiez ? j'en suis fort aise.
Eh bien ! dansez maintenant.''
1 Found herself greatly in need.
2 When the north wind (i. e. winter) had come,
• Out for aout. 6 To every one that came,
* The least of her faults, 6 May it not displease you.
Selections for Reading 295
Le Corbeau et le Renard.
Maitre * corbeau, sur un arbre perch^,
Tenait en son bee un fromage,
Maitre renard, par I'odeur alleche,'
Lui tint a pen pr6s ce Ian gage : •
"He! bonjour, monsieur du* corbeau !
Que vous etes joli ! que vous me semblez beau I
Sans mentir, si votre ramage*
Se rapporte a votre plumage,*
Vous etes le phdnix "^ des botes de ces bois."
A ces mots le corbeau ne se sent pas de joie ; •
Et, pour montrer sa belle voix,
II Guvre un large bee, laisse tomber sa proie.
Le renard s'en saisit, et dit : " Mon bon monsieur,*
Apprenez que tout flatteur
Vit aux depens de celui qui I'^coute :
Cette leQon vaut bien un from age, sans doute.**
Le corbeau, honteux et confus.
Jura, mais un peu tard, qu'on ne Pj prendrait plus."
1 A title given to barristers, solicitors, and attorneys.
2 Allured^ attracted.
« Expressed himself somewhat after this manner,
* A title of honor.
» Song.
• Corregponda to your plumage.
7 The fabulous bird that when burnt would rise again from its aahes.
8 Js beside himself vjith joy ,
9 Fellow,
10 That no one would ever catch him that wa$ again.
296 Selections for Beading
La Grenouille qui veut se falre aussi Grosse que le BcBuf,
Une grenouille vit un boeuf
Qui lui sembla de belle taille.^
EUe, qui n'etait pas grosse en tout comme un oeuf,
Envieuse, s^etend, et s^enfle, et se travaille*
Pour egaler Fanimal en grosseur ;
Disant : " Regardez bien, ma soeur ;
Est-ce assez ? dites-moi ? n'y suis-je point encore ?
— Nenni.^ — Wy voici done ? — Point du tout. — M'y voila?
— Vous n'en approchez point." La ch^tive p^core *
S'enfla si bien qu'elle creva.
Le raonde est plein de gens qui ne sont pas plus sages :
Tout bourgeois veut b&tir comme les grands seigneurs.
Tout petit prince a des ambassadeurs,
Tout marquis veut avoir des pages.
Le Rat de Ville et le Rat des Champa.
Autrefois le rat de ville
In vita le rat des champs,
D'une faQon fort civile,
A des reliefs d'ortolans.*
Sur un tapis * de Turquie
Le convert se trouva mis.'
Je laisse a penser la vie
Que firent ces deux amis.
1 Fine size.
2 Tries as hard as she can,
* Not by any means.
* The poor little creature,
fi Scraps of ortolans, — a bird considered a table delicacy in France.
* Turkish caipet.
7 The table was set.
/Selections for Reading 297
Le regal ^ f ut fort hounete,
Kien ne manquait au festin;
Mais quelqu'uu troubla la fete
Pendant quails ^talent en train.*
A la porte de la salle
lis entendirent du bruit :
Le rat de ville d^tale j •
Son camarade le suit.
Le bruit cesse, on se retire ;
Rats en campagne* aussitSt;
Et le citadin de dire : ^
" Achevons tout notre rot.*
— C'est assez, dit le rustique ;
Demain vous viendrez chez moi.
Ce n'est pas que je me pique '
De tous vos festins de roi :
Mais rien ne vient ra'iaterrompre;
Je mange tout a loisir.
Adieu done. Fi du plaisir
Que la crainte peut corrompre 1 "
1 The feast.
2 In the midst of it,
* Scampers away.
* Back at their business,
fi Historical infinitive : says,
* Our roast, called generally /« rAti,
^ That I can boast.
298 Selections for Beading
La Marseillaise.
ROUGET DE L'ISLE (1760-1836).
Aliens, enfants de la patrie,
Le jour de gloire est arrive !
Centre nous de la tyrannie
L^etendard sanglant est leve.
Entendez-vous dans les campagnes
Mugir ces feroces soldats ?
lis viennent j usque dans nos bras,
ifigorger nos fils, nos compagnes!
Aux armes, citoyens I forraez vos bataillons !
Marchons, marchons !
Qu'un sang irapur abreuve nos sillons I
APPENDIX OF FORMS AND RULES.
I. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Before a consonant or
A aspirate.
Before a vowel or
h mute.
Before aU
nouns.
Masculine,
Feminine.
Masc. or Fern,
the
le
la
V
les
of the, or)
from the^
du
dela
del*
des
to the, at the,
au
kla
kl'
aux
THE NOUN.
n. The gender of inanimate objects.
A short and satisfactory rule for the gender of French
nouns is as follows :
Nouns having the following terminations are femi-
nine : —
ale, ole, ule ; ore, dre, eur;
rre, lie, ie, 16 ; 6e, ue, ion ;
be, ce, de ; fe, ne, pe ;
se, te, t6 ; ve, he, aison.
As catli^drale, 6cole, nature, favenr, terre, conversation^ ol^mence,
cit6, beauts, moiti6, marcbe, maison, liaison.
All other nouns are masculine.
As port, cheval, caf6, crime, village.
There are, of course, exceptions to this rule, but it holds good in 95
cases out of 100.
Observe that the rule does not apply to nouns evidently denoting
males, as prince, homme, etc. ; or to nouns evidently denoting females,
as princesse, dame, etc.
300
Appendix
III. Formation of the feminine in nouns representing
animate beings.
Kouns representing animate beings usually have a
particular form for each sex, and their feminine, like
the feminine of adjectives, is more or less regularly-
formed :
un Fran^ais,
on Frussien,
nn jardinier,
un baron,
un jumeau,
un 6poux,
un compagnon,
a Frenchman,
a Prussian t
a gardener,
a baron,
a twin,
a husband,
a companion,
une Franqaise.
une Prussienne.
une jardiniere,
une baronne.
une jumelle.
une 6poase.
une compagne.
(1) Those ending with an e mute are the same for
both genders :
un Busse,
a Russian,
une Russe.
un esclave,
a slave,
une esclave.
un artiste,
an artist,
une artiste.
PRINCIPAL EXCEPTIONS.
un abb6,
an abbot,
une abbesse.
un Ene,
on ass.
une Snesse.
un comte.
a count,
une comtesse.
un hote,
a host,
une hotesse.
un maitre,
a master.
une maitresse.
un negre,
a negro,
une n6gresse.
un pretre,
a priest.
une pretresse.
un Suisse,
a Swiss,
une Suissesse.
un tigre,
a tiger,
une tigresse.
un traltre,
a traitor,
une traitresse.-
(2) Substantives ending in -eur and derived from a
present participle change -eur into -euse:
le danseur (from dansant), the dancer, la danseuse.
le plaideur (from plaidant), the suitor, la plaideuse.
la buveur (from buvant), the drinker, la buveuse.
Formation of the Feminine of Nouns 301
(3) Substantives ending? in -tear, and which are not de-
rived from a, present participle, change -teur into -trice:
Taccusateur,
I'acteur,
rinstitnteur,
the accuser,
the actor f
the teacher,
raccusatrioe.
Pactrice.
rinstitatriee.
Add to these : le d6biteur, debtor ; rinspecteur, the inspector .• rez6-
cuteur, the executor; rinventeur, the inventor; le pers6cuteur, tne
persecutor.
(4) Some in -eur change it into -eresse for the feminine, such as :
Tenchanteur, the enchanter, I'enchanteresse ; le p6cheur, the sijiner, la
pecheresse ; le vengeur, the avenrjer, la vengeresse ; le d6fendeiir, the
defendant, la defenderesie ; le chasseur, the hunter, la ohasieresse. —
Chanteur has two feminines, chanteuse and cantatrice : the latter is
used only of professional singers. Empereor makes imp^ratrice ; gou-
verneur, gouvemante ; serviteur, servante ; compaguon, oompagne ;
h^ros, heroine ; dieu, deesse ; due, duchesse. T^moin is used for both
genders, and also auteur, poete, philosophe, peintre, juge, guide, etc.,
and even possesseur, successeur, and professeur. Ange, angel, is
always masculine.
(5) Some nouns originally feminine keep that gender, even when
applied to man : la dupe, the dupe ; la sentinelle, the sentry ; la recrue,
the recruit; la victime, the victim ; la personne, the person ; la ganache,
the blockhead ; la connaissance, the acquaintance, etc.
(6) Some names of animals form their feminine irregularly:
le boiler.
the ram.
la brebis.
le bouc,
the he-goat.
la ch6vre.
le cheval,
the horsey
la jument.
le mouton.
the sheep,
la brebis.
le sanglier,
the wild boar.
la laie.
le singe,
the monkey.
la guenon.
le canard,
the duck.
la cane.
le chat,
the cat,
la chatte.
le mulet,
the mule,
la mule.
le perroquet,
the parrot,
la permcho.
le loup,
the wolf.
la lonve.
le dindon,
the turkey,
la dinde.
le boeuf ,
the ox.
la vache.
lecoq,
the cock.
la poole.
302
Appendix
(7) Most of the names of animals have only one form for both
genders : such are :
ALL MASCULINE.
le castor, the heaver. le eigne, the swan.
le chameau, the camel.
r^cureuil, the squiirel.
r616phant, the elephant.
le leopard, the leopard.
le hibou, the owl.
le vautour, the vulture,
le merle, the blackbird,
le saumon, the salmon.
ALL FEMININE.
la balelne, the whale. I'alouette, the I arte.
la girafe, the giraffe.
la panth^re, the panther,
lliy^ne, the hyena.
la souris, the mouse.
rhirondelle, the swallow.
la perdrix the partridge,
la pie, the magpie,
la tortue, the tortoise.
To all these nouns, when we wish to determine the sex, we add
m^le or f emelle : la panth^re m^le, la panthere femelle ; I'^lephant
mEle, r^l^phant femelle.
(8) Some nouns are of double gender; for example :
un(e) artiste, an artist, un(e) esclave, a slave.
iin(e) enfant, a child, un(e) camarade, a comrade.^
Tm(e) malade, a patient, un(e) propri6taire, an owner.
(9) A number of nouns change their meaning according to the
gender ; the following are a few of them ;
[asculine.
Feminine.
booh.
Uvre,
pound.
page {attendant),
page,
page {of a book).
veil,
voile,
sail.
turn, trick,
tour,
tower.
post, position,
poste.
post-office.
pendulum.
pendole,
clock.
critic,
critique.
criticism.
politician,
politique.
politics.
handle.
manche,^
sleeve.
mode, mood.
mode.
fashion.
cabin-boT/,
mousse.
moss.
guide.
guide.
rein.
stove.
poSle,
frying-pan.
A La Manclic
), the English ChanneU
Formation of the Plural
303
IV. Formation of the plural.
Nouns and adjectives form their plural by adding s to
the singular: Lesson 31.
Exceptions. — (1) Nouns and adjectives ending in s,
X, z, in the singular, are the same in the plural : Lesson
31.
(2) Nouns and adjectives ending in -au or -eu take x
in the plural : Lesson 31.
But the noun landau, a landau (sort of carriage), and the adjective
bleu, hluCy take s in the plural.
(3) Nouns and adjectives in *al change al into aux;
Lesson 31.
But 8 is added in the plural to the nouns bal, carnaval, chacal, r^gal,
and to the adjectives amical, fatal, final, glacial, initial, matinal, naval,
p6nal, th6£tral, and a few others seldom used.
(4) The following nouns ending in -ail change all into
le baU,
the lease,
les bauz.
le corail.
the coral.
les coraux.
r^mail,
the enamel.
les 6mauz.
le soupirail.
the air-hole.
les soupirauz.
le travail,
the work, the labor.
les travaoz.
le vitraU,
the glass window,
les vitrauz.
-B6tail, cattle, has no plural ; bestiauz is the plural word for cattle,
(5) Seven nouns ending in -ou take x :
le bijou.
the jewel,
les bijouz.
le caillou,
the pebble,
les caillouz.
le chou,
the cabbage.
les chouz.
le geuou,
the knee.
les genouz.
le hibou,
the owl.
les hibouz.
le joujou,
the toy,
les joujouz.
lepou.
the louse,
les pouz.
304 Appendix
(6) Aieul, ciel, and ceil, generally make ai'eux, ancestors; cieux,
heavens; yeux, e^e.
aider, to help.
aimer, to like,
s'amuser, to amuse
one*s self.
appeler, to call,
s'appliquer, to apply
apprendre, to learn , to
teach.
s'appreter, to prepare
one's self
aspirer, to aspire,
assigner, to summon,
assujettir, to compel.
s'assujettir, to submit.
s'attacher, to be deter-
mined.
S'attendre, to expect,
autoriser, to authorize.
s'avilir, to stoop.
avoir, to have.
balancer, to hesitate,
se borner, to confine
one^s self
chercher, to seeky to
try.
commencer, to begin.
se complaire, to de-
light in.
concourir, to concur.
condamner, to con-
demn.
condescendre, to con-
descend,
consentir, to consent.
consister, to consist in
conspirer, to conspire.
consumer, to ruin
one's health.
contribuer, to contrib-
ute,
convier, to invite,
coiiter, to cost,
decider, to persuade.
se decider, to decide.
desceudre, to stoop.
destiner, to destine^ to
design,
determiner, to induce.
se determiner, to deter-
mine, to resolve.
devouer, to devote,
disposer, to prepare, to
fii.
se disposer, to -prepare.
dresser, to train,
employer, to employ,
to occupy,
encourager, to encour-
age.
engager, to induce.
s'engager, to bind
one's self
s'enhardir, to make
bold, to venture.
enseigner, to teach.
s'entendre, to know
how.
s'etudier, to apply one^i
self.
exceller, to exceL
exciter, to urge,
s'exercer, to exercise
one's self
^xhorter, to exhort.
s'exposer, to expose
one's self
se fatiguer, to fatigue
one's self,
gagner, to gain by,
habituer, to accustom,
se hasarder, to venture,
hesiter, to hesitate.
instruire, to instruct,
inviter, to invite, to ask.
se mettre, to set about y
to begin,
B>'oh^i\\\Q\', to persist in
occuper, to occupy, to
employ.
s'occuper, to he en-
gaged.
s'offrir, to offer, to
stand forth.
s*opiuiatrer, to he obsti-
nate.
parvenir, to succeed in.
passer, to spend in.
pencher, to lean.
penser, to think of.
perseverer, to perse*
vere.
persister, to persist.
se plaire, to delight.
plier, to bend.
porter, to induce*
List of Verbs requiring A hefore an Infinitive 351
prendre plaisir, to take
pleasure in.
preparer, to prepare.
se preparer, to prepare
one's self.
.pretendre, to aspire.
provoquer, to provoke.
reduire, to reduce.
se refuser, to refuse
one^s self, not to
admit.
renoncer, to renounce.
se resign er, to resign^
to submit one^s self.
se resoudre, to re-
solve.
reussir, to succeed.
servir, to serve.
songer, to think of.
suffire, to be sufficient.
tarder, to delay ^ to he
long.
travailler, to loork, to
study ^ to endeavor.
se tuer, to kill one's
self to take much
trouble.
venir, to chance, to
happen.
viser, to aim, to aspire.
vouer, to devote.
se vouer, to devote, to
apply one^s self.
XXVIII, Adjectives which change their signification ac-
cording as they are placed before or after the noun.
Bon. \Jn homme bon, a good man; un boii homme, a simple
man; un bon mot, a pun; une bonne parole, a good icord.
Brave. Un homme brave, a brave man; un brave homme, a
worthy man.
Certain. Une chose certaine, a positive thing ; une certaine chose,
a particular thing.
Cher. Mon cher ami, my dear friend; une maison ch^re, a costly
house,
Commun. Une voix commune, a common voice; d'une commune
voix, unanimously.
Dernier. Le mois dernier, last month; le dernier mois, the last
month (of the year, of my stay in London, etc.).
Different; divers. Les differentes (diverses) choses, various
things; les choses differentes (diverses), different things.
Faux. Une fausse clef, a skeleton key ; une clef fausse, a wrong
key ; une fausse porte, a secret door ; une porte fausse, a false
door,
Furieux. Un f urieux raenteur, a terrible liar ; un homme f urieux,
an enraged man.
Galant. Un galant homme, a well-bred man ; un homme galant,
a man polite to ladies.
352 Appendix
Gentil. Un gentilhomme, a noUeman; un homme gentil, a de*
lightful, polite man.
Grand. Un grand homme, a great man; un homme grand, a tall
man. But if, after grand homme, some other external quali-
ties are added, it means tall: C'est un grand homme blond, bien
fait. In like manner if, after un hoimne grand, aome moral
qualification is added, grand does not refer to the size : Un
homme grand dans ses desseins. Le grand air, noble manners;
Tair grand, a noble look.
Haut. Le haut ton, an arrogant manner ; le ton haut, a loud voice.
Honnete. Un honnete homme, an honest man ; un homme hon-
nete, a polite man.
Mauvais. Le mauvais air, vulgar appearance; Pair mauvais, ill-
natured look.
M^chaiit. Une m^chante ^pigramme, a poor epigram; une ^pi-
gramme m^chante, a wicked epigram.
Meme. La meme femme, the same woman; les rues memes,
even the streets, or the very streets.
Mortel. Un mortel ennemi, c deadly enemy; Phomme mortel,
mortal man.
Neuf . Un habit neuf, a new-made coat ; un habit nouveau, a coat
of new fashion ; un nouvel habit, another coat,
NoTLveaa. Le nouveau vin, wine different from that which was
drunk before, newly broached wine ; du vin nouveau, toine newly
made.
Pauvre. When placed before the noun, it has the various signi-
fications which the word poor has in English : assister un
pauvre vieillard, une pauvre veuve, un pauvre homme, means to
assist one in poverty ; le pauvre enfant, les pauvres innocents,
le pauvre animal, are term* of endearment ; un pauvre orateur,
de pauvre vin, are terms of contempt. When placed after the
noun it always signifies poverty : un homme pauvre, a needy
man.
Petit. Un petit homme, a little man ; un homme petit, a mean
man. Observe that petit has its natural meaning when placed
before the noun, its figurative, when placed after. It is the
reverse with grand.
The Adverb 353
Plaisant. Un plaisant conte, an unlikely^ absurd tale ; un conte
plaisant, an amusing story. Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous
man; un homme plaisant, a humorous man.
Propre. Mon prop re habit, nip own coat; un habit propre, a
clean coat.
Seul. Un seul homme, a single man; un homme seul, a man alone.
Triste. Un triste homme, a poor kind of a man; un homme
triste, a sorrowful man.
Vilain. Un vilain homme, a disagreeable man; un homme fort
vilain, an ugly man.
XXIX. THE ADVERB.
Formation of adverbs from adjectives.
Most adjectives may be made into adverbs by adding
-ment :
(1) To the masculine, if it ends with a vowel : poll,
poliment ; sage, sagement.
Exceptions. — Impuni makes impun^ment ; prodigue, prodigale-
ment; traitre, traitreusement. Aveugle, conforme, enorme, incom-
mode, opiniatre, and uniforme change e mute into 6 : aveuglement, etc.
(2) To the feminine, if the masculine ends with a
consonant:
Pur, purement; franc, f ranchement ; sec, s^chement; oomplet,
completement ; heurenx, heureusement ; actif , activement.
Exceptions. — Gentll makes gentiment. Commun, confus, diffus,
•xpres, importun, obscur, precis, profond, end in -6ment instead of
-ement : commun^ment, confusement, etc.
The adjectives beau, nouveau, fou, mou, being derived from bel,
nouvel, fol, mol, are considered as ending with a consonant, and make
bellement, nouvellement, follement, moUement.
(3) If the masculine ends in -ant or -ent, nt is changed
into -mment, and the last two syllables are pronounced
amant : mechant, mechamment ; prudent, prudemment.
Exceptions. — The three adjectives lent, present, v6b6ment, make
lentement, presentement, v^h6mentement.
23
EXTRACTS FROM AN ORDER REGARDING
THE CHANGES IN
FRENCH SYNTAX A?^D ORTHOGRAPHY
Adopted hy the Minister of Public Instruction, February, 1901,
Le Ministre de PInstruction publique et des Beaux-Arts,
Vu Particle 5 de la loi du 27 fdvrier, 1880 ;
Vu I'arrete du 31 juillet, 1900 ;
Le Conseil superieur de I'lnstruction publique entenda,
Arrete :
Article 1^^ — Dans les examens ou concours dependant du
Minist^re de I'lnstruction publique, qui comportent des epreuves
speciales d'orthographe, il ne sera pas compte de fautes aux candi-
dats pour avoir use des tolerances indique'es dans la liste annexes
au present arrete.
La meme disposition est applicable au jugement des diverses
compositions redigees en langue fran9aise, dans les examens ou
concours dependant du Minis tere de I'lnstruction publique qui
ne comportent pas une epreuve speciale d'orthographe.
Pluriel des noms propres. — La plus grande obscurity
regnant dans les regies et les exceptions enseignees dans
les grammaires, on tol^rera dans tons les cas que les noms
propres, precedes de Particle pluriel, prennent la marque
du pluriel. Ex. : les Comeilles comme les Gracques, —
des Virgiles (exemplaires) comme des Virgiles (editions).
II en sera de meme pour les noms propres de personnes
designant les oeuvres de ces personnes. Ex. : des Meis*
soniers,
Pluriel des noms empruntSs k d'autres langues. —
Lorsque ces mots sont tout a fait entres dans la langue
frangaise, on tolerera que le pluriel soit forme suivant la .
r^gle generale. Ex. : des exeats comme des deficits,
354
Modifications in Syntax 355
Noma composes. — Les memes noms composes se ren-
coiitreiit aujourd'hui tantot avec le trait d'union, tantot
sans trait d'unioii. 11 est inutile de fatiguer les enfants
a apprendre des contradictions que rien ne justifie.
L'absence de trait d' union dans Pexpression pomme de
terre n'empeche pas cette expression de former un verita-
ble mot compost aussi bien que chef-d^ceuvre, par exemple.
Ces mots pourront toujours s'ecrire sans trait d'union.
Article partitif . — On tolerera du^ de la, des, au lieu de
de, partitif, devant un substantif precede d'un adjectif.
Ex. : de ou du hon pain, de honne viande ou de la bonne
viande, de ou des bons fruits,
Adjectif construit avec plusieurs substantif s. — Lors-
qu'un adjectif qualificatif suit plusieurs substantifs de
genres ditferents, on tolerera toujours que I'adjectif soit
construit au masculin pluriel, quel que soit le genre du
substantif le plus voisin. Ex. : appartements et chambres
meubles. On tolerera aussi I'accord avec le substantif le
plus rapproche. Ex. : un courage et une foi nouvelle.
Nu, demi, feu. — On tolerera Paccord de ces adjectifs
avec le substantif qu'ils precedent. Ex. : mc ou nus pieds,
une demi ou demie heure (sans trait d^union entre les
mots), feu ou feue la reine,
Adjectifs num^raux. — Vingt, cent. La prononciation
justifie dans certains cas la r^gle actuelle, qui donne un
pluriel k ces deux mots quand ils sont multiplies par un
autre nombre. On tolerera le pluriel de vingt et de cent,
m^me lorsque ces mots sont suivis d'un autre adjectif
numeral. Ex. : quatrevingt ou quatrevingts dix hommes ;
quatre cent ou quatre cents trente hommes,
Le trait d'union ne sera pas exige entre le mot d^sig-
nant les unites et le mot d^siguant les dizaines. Ex.;
dix sept.
356 Modifications in Syntax
Dans la designation du millesime, on tolerera mille an
lien de mil^ comme dans Texpression d'un nombre. Ex.:
Van mil huit cent quatre vingt dix ou Van niUle huit cents
quatre vingts dix.
Tout. — On tolerera Taccord du mot tout anssi bien de-
vant les adjectifs feminins commenQant par une voyelle
ou par une h muette que devant les adjectifs feminins
commenQant par une cdnsonne ou par une h aspiree. Ex. :
des personnes tout heureuses ou toutes heureuses / V assent
blee tout entiere ou toute entiere.
Trait d'union. — On tolerera Pabsence de trait d'uniou
entre le verbe et le pronom sujet plac^ apr^s le verbe.
Ex.; estil?
Accord du verbe quand le sujet est un mot collectif. — -
Toutes les fois que le collectif est accompagne d'un com-
plement au pluriel, on tolerera I'accord du verbe avec le
complement. Ex. 2 un peu de connaissances suffit ou suf'
fisent,
C'est, ce sont. — Comme il rfegne une grande diversity
d'usage relativement a I'emploi r^gulier de i^est et de ce
sont, et que les meilleurs auteurs ont employe (^est pour
annoncer un substantif au pluriel ou un pronom de la
troisieme personne au pluriel, on tolerera dans tons les
cas I'emploi de c^est au lieu de ce sont, Ex. : dest ou ce
sont des montagnes et des precipices.
Participe pass^. — II n'y a rien a changer k la rfegle
d'apres laquelle le participe passe construit comme epi-
th^te doit s'accorder avec le mot qualifie, et construit
comme attribut avec le verbe etre ou un verbe intransitif
doit s'accorder avec le sujet. Ex. : des fruits gates ; ils
sont tombes ; elles sont tombees.
Pour le participe pass^ construit avec I'auxiliaire avoir,
lorsque le participe passe est suivi soit d'un infinitif, soit
Modifications in Syntax 357
d'un participe present ou pass^, on toMrera qu'il reste
invariable, quels que soient le genre et le nombre des
complements qui precedent. Ex.: les fruits que je me
8uis laisse ou laisses prendre ; — les sauvages que Von a
trouve ou trouves errant dans les bois, Dans le ca5 ou
le participe passe est prdced^ d'une expression collective,
on pourra k volonte le faire accorder avec le collectif ou
avec son complement. Ex.: la foule d^hommesquefai
vue ou vus.
Ne dans les propositions subordonnees. — L'emploi de
cette negation dans un tres grand nombre de propositions
subordonnees donne lieu k des regies compliquees, diffi-
ciles, abusives, souvent en contradiction avec Fusage des
ecrivains les plus classiques.
Sans faire de regies differentes suivant que les proposi-
tions dont elles dependent sont affirmatives ou negatives
ou interrogatives, on tol^rera la suppression de la nega-
tion ne dans les propositions subordonnees dependant de
verbes ou de locutions signifiant:
Empecher, defendre, eviter que, etc. Ex. : defendre
qu^on vienne ou qu^on ne vienne;
Craindre, desesperer, avoir peur, de peur que, etc. Ex. r
de peur quHl aille ou quHl n^aille ;
Douter^ contester, nier que, etc. Ex. : je ne doute pas
que la chose soit vraie ou ne solt vraie.
On tol^rera de meme la suppression de cette negation
apres les comparatifs et les mots indiquant une comparai-
son : autre, autremeht que, etc. Ex. : Vannee a ete meil-
leure qu^on Vesperait ou qu''on ne Vesperait ; les resultats
sont autres qu^on le croyait ou qu^on ne le croyait.
De m^me, apr^s les locutions cb moms que, avant que.
Ex. : a moins qu^on accorde le pardon ou qu^on n^accorde
le pardon.
VOCABULARY
Fran^ais' Anglais
ac
a, has. il y a, there is, there
are; ago.
k, to, at, in.
abandonner, to abandon.
abeille, /. bee.
abhorre de, abhorred by.
abondant, -e, abundant.
d'abord, at first.
aboyer, to bark.
abreuver, to water, to soak.
absent, -e, absent.
absolument, entirely, abso-
lutely.
s'abstenir (de), to abstain
(from).
abstinence, /. abstinence.
abuser, to abuse, to deceive.
accepts, -e, accepted.
accepter, to accept.
accis, m. fit, attack.
accident, m, accident.
accompagner, to accompany.
accord, m. agreement.
accoutumer, to accustom.
accueil, m. reception, wel-
come.
accueiliir, to receive, to wel-
come.
accuser, to accuse.
achete, -e, bought.
acheter {k), to buy from.
achever, to finish.
acier, m. steel.
acquerir, to acquire.
s'ac quitter, to perform.
acte, m. act.
actif, active, active.
action, /. engagement, action.
English-French
ac
a, an, un, une.
to be able, pouvoir.
about, environ, pr^ de.
around, autour de.
absent, absent, -e.
absolutely, absolument.
to abstain, s'abstenir (de).
absurd, absurde.
abundant, abondant, -e.
to accept, accepter,
to accompany, accompagner.
according to, selon.
on account of, k cause de.
to accuse, accuser,
to accustom, habituer.
to act, agir.
active, actif, active,
acute, aigu, -e.
359
ad
Frangais'Anglais
al
adjectif, m. adjective.
admettre, to admit.
admirer, to admire.
adresse, /. address.
adresser, to send to. s'ad-
resser (k), to address.
adverbe, m. adverb.
adversite,/. adversity.
affaire, /. affair, matter.
affliger, to afflict, to distress.
affreux, -se, frightful.
afin de, in order to (vnth infin.).
afin que, so that {tdth suhjunc).
Afrique, /. Africa.
^ge, m. age. moyen ^ge, Mid-
dle Ages.
Hge, -e, old, aged.
agi, behaved.
agir, to act, to behave.
agneau, m. lamb.
agreable, pleasant, agreeable.
aide, /. help.
aieul, m. grandfather; aieuls,
m. grandfathers; aieux, m.
ancestors.
aigu, aigue, sharp, acute,
aiguille, /. needle,
ailleurs, elsewhere, d'ailleurs,
besides.
aimable, amiable, kind.
aimer, to like, to love, aimer
mieux, to prefer.
ain6, -e, elder, oldest,
ainsi, thus, so.
aise, bien aise, glad.
all6, -e, gone.
all€cher, to allure.
Allemagne, /. Germany,
allemand, -e, German.
aller, to go.
aliens! come I
allumer, to light, to kindle,
allumette, /. match.
almanach, m. almanac.
ad
English-French
al
address, adresse, /.
to address, adresser, s'adres-
ser h.
to admire, admirer, to —
one's self or each other,
s'admirer.
to admit, admettre.
adverb, adverbe, m,
to advise, conseUler.
affair, affaire, /.
to affirm, affirmer.
to be afraid, avoir peur, crain-
dre.
Africa, 1' Afrique,/.
after, apr^s.
afternoon, apr^s-midi,/.
afterwards, ensuite.
again, encore, de nouveau.
against, contre.
age, kge, m.
aged, ^ge, -e.
agitated, 6mu, -e.
ago, il y a.
agreeable, aimable, agreable.
ale, bi^re, /.
all, tout, -e, tons, toutes. not
at all, pas du tout, point,
to allow, permettre.
almost, presque.
alone, seul, -e.
already, d^]k.
also, aussi.
360
al
Fran^ais-Anglais
ap
alors, then, at that time.
les Alpes, /. the Alps.
ambition,/, ambition.
teie,/. soul, spirit.
amener, to bring (a person),
am6ricain, -e, American.
Am^rique^/. America.
ami, m., amie, /. friend.
amiti^, /. friendship.
amusant, -e, amusing.
amuser, to amuse, s'amuser,
to enjoy one's self.
amusement, m. fun.
an, m. year.
ananas, m. pineapple.
ancien, ancienne, old, ancient.
anglais, -e, English.
Angleterre, /. England.
animal, m. animal.
anim6, -e, animated.
ann^e, /. year. Tannic der-
nier e, /. last year.
annoncer, to announce.
aoiit, m. August.
apercevoir, to perceive,
apopiexie, /. apoplexy.
appareil, w. form, display,
appartement, m. rooms,
appartenir, to belong.
appeler, to call, to summon.
s'appeler, to call one's self,
to be called.
app^tit, m. appetite,
appliqu^, -e, diligent,
s'appliquer, to apply one's self,
apport^, -e, brought,
apporter, to bring,
apportez-moi, bring me.
apprendre, to learn, to inform,
appris, -e, learnt.
approbation, /. approbation,
s'approcher de, to go up to,
to come near.
approuver, to approve,
appui, m. support,
appuyer, to support, to rest oft.
al
English-French
ap
although, quoique, bien que.
always, tou jours,
ambition, ambition,/.
America, I'Am^rique,/.
American, am^ricain, -e.
amiable, aimable.
among, parmi.
to amuse, amuser.
amusing, amusant, -e.
an, un, une.
ancestor, aieul, plur. aieux.
ancient, ancien, -ne.
and, et.
anecdote, anecdote, /.
anger, colore, /.
angry, f4ch^, rageur, -euse.
to get angry, se f^cher.
animal, animal, w.; b^te, /.
to announce, annoncer.
answer, r^ponse, /.
to answer, r^pondre {k).
any, du, de la, de 1', des;
en.
any one, quelqu'un.
anything, quelque chose,
anjrwhere, quelque part,
apiece, la pi^ce.
to appear, sembler, parattre.
appetite, app^tit, m,
apple, pomme, /.
361
ap
aprfes, after, afterwards (time
only). apr^s-demain, the
day after to-morrow, aprfes-
midi, /. afternoon.
arbre, m. tree.
architecte, m, architect.
ardemment, eagerly.
ardoise, /. slate.
argent, m. money, silver.
argument, m. argument.
Aristote, m, Aristotle.
arracher, to tear out, to pull up.
arreter, to stop.
arrive, -e, arrived.
arrivee, /. arrival.
arriver, to arrive, to happen.
arroser, to water.
article, m. article. — defini,
definite article; — indefini,
indefinite article.
Frangais'Ariglais
at
artillerie, /. artillery.
Asie, /. Asia.
assemblee, /. assembly, meet-
ing.
asseoir, to seat, s'asseoir, to
sit down.
assez, enough; rather, some-
what.
assiette, /. plate.
assigner, to assign.
assis -e, seated, sitting.
assister k, to be present at.
assurer, to aflSrm, to maintain.
atelier, m. workshop, studio.
attaquer, to attack.
attendre, to wait (for) ; ex-
pect, se faire — , to be long
in coming.
attentif, attentive, attentive.
attention, /. attention, notice.
to approve, approuver, trouver
bon.
April, avril, m.
architect, architecte, m,
architecture, architecture, /.
arm, bras, m.
arm-chair, fauteuil, w.
army, armee, /.
arrival, arrivee, /.
to arrive, arriver.
arrived, arriv6, -e.
article, article, m,
artist, artiste, m. or f.
as, comme. as . . . as, aussi
. . . que. as for, quant a.
as many, as much, autant.
as soon as, d^s que, aussitot
que. as usual, conmae a
Tordinaire.
English-French
at
ashamed, honteux, -se, to be
— , avoir honte.
Asia, TAsie, /.
to ask, to ask for, demander.
to — back, redemander.
to — pardon, demander
pardon a.
to assassinate, assassiner.
to assure, assurer,
astonishing, etonnant, -e.
at, k, at last, enfin. at once,
tout de suite, at present, a
present.
to be attached to, se tenir k,
to attack, attaquer.
to attend to, se m^ler de; soi-
gner.
attention, attention, /.; {good
care), bons soins, m.
362
Fran^ais-Anglais
attentivement, attentively,
attirer, to attract; to drag,
attraper, to* catch,
au, to the, at the. au moins,
at the least,
aucun, -e, any.
audace, /. audacity,
au-devant, before.
aujourd'hui, to-day.
auparavant (advS), before,
auquel, k laquelle, auxquels,
auxquelles, to which, to
whom.
aussi, also, as; at beginning of
a clause, therefore, and so.
aussit6t, immediately, at once,
aussitot que, as soon as.
autant, as much, as many,
auteur, m. author.
automne, m. autumn,
autre, other,
autrefois, formerly,
autrement, otherwise.
Autriche, /. Austria.
autrichien, m. -enne, /. an
Austrian.
aux, to the, at the.
il y avait, there was, there were.
avaler, to swallow.
plus avanc^, better ofif.
avancement, m. promotion.
avancer, to advance.
avant (prep, of time), before.
avant-hier, the day before
yesterday.
avec, with,
avenue, /. avenue,
avertir, to warn, to notify,
aveugle, blind,
avocat, m. lawyer,
avoir, to have,
avouer, to confess, to admit,
avril, 7n. April,
ayant, having.
bagage, m. luggage,
bague, /. ring,
baisser, to stoop, to lower,
bal, m. ball, dance, party,
balai, m. broom,
balayer, to sweep,
balbutier, to stammer,
balle,/. ball, bullet,
balustrade,/, railing.
banane, /. banana.
at
English-French
ba
attentive, attentif, -ve.
audacity, audace,/.
August, ao(it, m.
aunt, tante, /.
Austria, TAutriche, /.
Austrian, autrichien, -ne.
author, ecrivain, auteur, m.
auttmin, automne, m.
avenue, avenue, /.
to avoid, ^viter.
bad, mauvais, -e; vilain, -e.
bad boy, mauvais sujet, m.
badly, mal.
bag, sac, m. travelling — ,
sac de nuit,
baggage, bagage, m.
baker, boulanger, m.
ball, balle, / (plaything); bal,
m. (dancing party),
banana, banane, /.
$62
ba
Frani^ais-Anglais
be
banc, m. bench.
bas, basse, low. au bas, at
the foot.
bataille, /. battle.
bataillon, m. battalion,
bateau, m. boat, bateau k
vapeur, steamer.
bdtir, to build,
b^ton, m. stick,
batterie, /. battery,
battre, to beat, to flap, se
battre, to fight,
battu, -e, beaten.
beau, bel, belle, beautiful, fine,
handsome.
beaucoup, much, many, a great
deal, plenty.
beau-frfere, m. brother-in-law.
bee, m. beak.
Belgique, ^. Belgium,
belle-soeur, /. sister-in-law.
benin, -igne, benign, kindly,
besogne, /. task, job.
besoin (avoir), to be in need,
to need.
b^te, /. beast, animal.
ba
English-French
be
barber, coiffeur, m,
bargain, march^, m.
to bargain for, marchander.
to bark, aboyer.
barn, grange, /.
basket, panier, m.; corbeille,/.
battle, bataille, f.
to be, etre. {health), se porter,
aller. — well, se porter
bien. — ill, se porter mal.
— afraid, avoir peur. —
ashamed, avoir honte.
— cold, avoir froid. —
himgry, avoir faim. — off,
s'en aller. — right, avoir
raison. — sleepy, avoir som-
meil. — thirsty, avoir soif.
— in want, avoir besoin.
— warm, avoir chaud. —
wrong, avoir tort.
bear, ours, m.
to bear, porter,
beast, b^te, /.
to beat, battre.
beautiful, beau, belle.
because, parce que. because
of, h cause de.
to become, devenir.
become (part.), devenu, -e.
bed, lit. m. to go to — , se
coucher.
bee, abeille, /.
been, 6t6.
beer, bi^re, /.
before (prep, of time), avant;
(prep, of place), devant, en
presence de; (adv. of time),
auparavant; (conj.), avant
que; (followed by an infin.),
avant de, avant que de.
to begin, commencer, se mettre
k.
beginning, commencement, m,
to behave, agir.
behind (prep, of place), derrifere.
to believe, croire.
Belgiiun, la Belgique.
to belong, appartenir, ^tre k,
bench, banc, m.
benign, b^nin, -igne.
364
be
Frangais'Anglais
bo
b^te (adj.), stupid.
beurre, m. butter.
b^vue, /. blunder.
biblioth^que, /. library.
bien, well, very, a great many,
most; much, quite; indeed.
eh bieni well I bien aise,
glad,
bientot, soon.
bi^re, /. beer,
bijou, m. jewel,
billet, m. note.
bise, /. north wind.
blUmer, to blame.
blanc, blanche, white.
bl6, m. wheat.
bless^, -e, wounded.
blesser, to wound,
blessure, /. wound.
bleu, -e, blue.
boeuf, m. ox.
boire, to drink.
bois, m, wood, grove.
boite,/. box.
bolter, to limp, to walk lame.
bombe, /. bomb.
bon, bonne, good, kind.
bonheur, m. happiness, pleas-
ure.
bonhomme, m. fellow, '' little
man.''
bonne, /. maid, servant, nurse-
maid.
bont6, /. goodness.
bord, m. edge, bank, shore,
au bord de la mer, at the
coast.
bottine, /. boot.
be
English-French
bo
besides, d'ailleurs.
best (adj.), le meilleur; (adv.),
le mieux.
better (adj.), meilleur; (adv.),
mieux.
better off, plus avanc^.
to be better (health), se porter
mieux, aller mieux. to be
worth more, valoir mieux.
to betray, trahir. to — one's
self, se trahir.
between, entre.
to bid, commander, dire,
big, gros, -se.
bill, billet, m.
billion, billion, m.; milliard, m.
bird, oiseau, m.
birthday, f^te, /., f^te de nais-
sance.
to bite, mordre.
bitter, amer, -^re.
black, noir, -e.
blackboard, tableau noir, m.
to blame, blamer. — one's
self or each other, se bl&mer.
to bless, b(^nir.
blind (adj.), aveugle.
blue, bleu, -e.
to blush, rougir.
boarding-school, pension, /.
boat, bateau, m.
body, corps, m.
boldness, audace, /.
bonnet, chapeau, m.
book, livre, m.
bookseller, libraire, m.
boot, bottine,/. r
born, n6, -e.
365
tX)
Fran^ais'Anglais
ca
bouche, /. mouth.
boucle d'oreille, /. earring,
boulanger, m. baker.
bouquet, m. bouquet,
bourgeois, m. shopkeeper.
bourse, /. purse, la Bourse,
stock exchange,
bout, m. end, extremity.
bouteille, /. bottle,
bouton, m. button.
bracelet, m. bracelet,
bras, m. arm.
brave, brave; honest,
braver, to brave, to defy,
brebis, /. sheep, ewe.
bref, br^ve, short, brief.
Bresil, m. Brazil.
Bretagne, /. Brittany.
bride, /. bridle.
broche, /. brooch.
brosse, /. brush,
brosser, to brush,
brouillard, m. fog.
bruit, m. noise, report, rumor,
briiler, to burn.
brun, -e, brown.
brusquement, rudely, bruskly.
bruyant, -e, noisy, boisterous.
bu, -e, drunk.
5a (a familiar contraction for
cela), that. 5a et 1^, here
and there.
cabaret, m. tavern.
cache, -e, hidden.
cacher, to hide, to conceal.
cadeau, m. present.
cadet, -te, younger, junior.
caf6j m. coffee.
bo
English-French
by
to borrow, emprunter {k),
bottle, bouteille,/.
bought, achet^, -e.
bouquet, bouquet, m,
box, boite, /.
boy, gargon, m.
bracelet, bfafeelet, m,
Brazil, le^j^sil.
bread, paJH^.
breadth, flHpur, /.
to break, cSfer.
to breakfast, dejeuner.
breast, poitrine, /. ; sein, m.
bridge, pont, m.
brief, bref, br^ve.
to bring, amener, apporter.
bring me, apportez-moi. to
bring back, ramener.
broad, large.
brooch, broche, /.
broom, balai, m.
brother, fr^re, m.
brother-in-law, beau-fr^re, m.
brown, brun, -e.
to brush, brosser.
to build, b^tir.
building, edifice, m,; batiment,
m.
business, affaires, /. plur,
busy, occupe, -e.
but, mais. but for, sans.
butter, beurre, m.
button, bouton, m.
to buy, acheter.
by, par. byfar,de beau coup, by
that road, par cette route.
ca
Frant^ais-Anglais
ce
cage, /. cage.
cahier, m. copy-book, note-
book.
caisse, /. box.
caisse d'^pargne, savings-bank.
caliche,/, carriage.
calme, calm.
camarade, m. comrade.
campagne, /. country; cam-
paign, k la campagne, in
the country.
canadien, -enne, Canadian.
canif, m. penknife.
canne, /. cane.
caparagonn^, caparisoned.
capitaine, m. captain.
capitale, /. capital.
captiver, to captivate; to take
up.
car {conj.), for.
carafe, /. carafe, decanter.
cargaison, /. cargo.
carr6, -e, square.
cas, m. case, circumstance,
en tout cas, at any rate.
casque, m. helmet.
casser, to break.
cath^drale, /. cathedral.
cause, /. cause, k — de, on
account of, because of.
causer, to talk, to chat.
causeur, talkative.
ce, cet, cette, this, that, ce
qui, ce que, what (rel.). ce
sont, they are, those are.
ceci, this (thing).
c6der, to yield, to give way or
place. — le pas, to give
precedence.
cela, that (thing).
c^l^hre {adj.), celebrated, fa-
mous.
celebrer, to celebrate.
celle, /. that, this, celle-ci,
this, this one. celle-U, that,
that one.
ca
English-Freyich
ce
cabbage, chou, m,
cage, cage, /.
cake, gateau, m.
to call, appeler. to — one's
self, s'appeler. to — on,
passer chez.
calm, tranquille.
can {to he able), pouvoir; {to
know how), savoir.
Canada, le Canada.
Canadian, canadien, -enne.
cane, canne, /.
cannon shot, coup de canon, m.
to captivate, captiver.
carafe, carafe, /l
care, soin, m. good care, bons
soins.
to care about, se soucier de.
carpenter, char pen tier, m.
carpet, tapis, m.
carriage, voiture, /.
to carry, porter, to carry off,
em porter, reniporter.
case, cas, m.
cat, chat, m.; chatte,/.
to catch cold, s'enrhumer.
to cease to, cesser de.
to celebrate, c^lfebrer.
celebrated, adj. c^l^bre.
cent, sou, m.
367
ce
FrancaiS'Anglais
ch
celles, /. those, these, celles-
ci, these, celles-1^, those.
celui, m. that, this, celui qui,
he who. celui-ci, the latter,
this, this one. celui-1^, that,
that one.
cent, hundred.
centime, m. centime, about
one-fifth of a cent.
cependant, however, mean-
while.
certain, -e, certain.
certainement, certainly.
ces {adj.), these, those.
cesser, to cease.
c'est, he is, she is, it is.
cet, cette. See ce.
ceux, m. those, these, ceux-ci,
these, the latter, ceux-li,
those, the former.
chacun, -e, each, every one.
chagrin, m. grief, trouble.
chagrin, -e, sad, vexed, sorry.
chaine, /. chain.
chaise, /. chair.
chaleur, /. warmth, heat.
chambellan, m. chamberlain.
chambre, /. room.
champ, m. field. — de course,
race-course.
changement, m. change,
changer, to change,
chanson, /. song.
chanter, to sing.
chapeau, m. hat.
chapelle, /. chapel,
chaque, each, every,
charger, to load, to charge.
Charles, m. Charles.
charmant, -e, charming,
charm^, -e, delighted,
charpentier, m. carpenter,
chasse, /. hunt,
chasser, to drive, to hunt,
chasseur, m. huntsman,
chat, m. chatte, /. cat.
chaud, -e, hot, warm, avoir
chaud, to be warm,
chauffer, to warm,
chemin, m. way, road,
cher, ch^re, dear.
cherch6, -e, looked for, sought,
chercher, to look for, to seek,
to try to find.
Chersonese, /. Chersonese,
ch^tif, -ive, paltry,
cheval, m. horse.
cheveux, m. pi. the hair,
chez, at, in, or to, the house of.
chien, m. dog.
ce
English-French
certain, certain, -e.
certainly, certainement.
chain, chaine, /.
chair, chaise, /.
chalk, craie, /.
to change, changer.
to charge, accuser de.
Charles, Charles, m.
ch
charming, charmant, -e.
chat, causer.
cheap, a bon marche.
cheek, joue, /.
cheer, three cheers! vivel
cheerful, gai, -e.
cheerfully, gaiement.
cheese, fromage, m.
368
ch
Francais-Aiiglais
CO
chififre, m. number.
Chili, m. Chili.
Chine, /. China.
choisi, -e, chosen.
choisir, to choose.
choix, m. choice.
chose, /. thing, autre — , /.
something else.
choucroute, /. sour-crout.
ci, here.
ciel, rn. heaven, sky.
cigaie, /. grasshopper,
cinq, five.
cinquante, fifty,
cinqui^me, fifth.
circonstance, /. circumstance,
cirque, rn. circus,
ciseaux, m. pi. scissors,
citadin, m. townsman.
citoyen, m. citizen.
civil, -e, polite.
clair, m. light, clair de lune,
moonlight.
clair, -e {adj.), clear, obvious,
clameur, /. noise.
classe, /. class, salle de — ,
classroom.
cl€, /. key.
clef, /. key.
clerg^, m. clergy,
clou, m. nail.
coeur, m. heart, courage, de
tout mon — , with all my
heart.
coiffeur, m. barber,
coin, m. corner.
colore, /. anger, passion,
colonel, m. colonel.
Ch
English-French
CO
chest, poitrine, /.
child, enfant, m. or f,
chin, menton, m.
China, la Chine.
choice, choix, m.
to choose, cKoisir.
chosen, choisi, -e.
Christmas, Noel, m.
church, ^glise, /.
circus, cirque, m,
city, ^alle, /.
city hall, h6tel de ville, m,
to claim, r^clamer.
class, classe, /.
classroom, salle de classe, /.
clean, adj. net, nette.
to clean, nettoyer.
clever, habile; malin, maligne.
to close, fermer.
closed, ferm^, -e.
cloth, drap, m.
clothes for the wash, linge, m.
coast, bord (m.) de la mer.
coat, habit, m.
coffee, caf4, m.
cold, froid. to be — , avoir
froid. to have a — , ^tre
enrhum^. to take — , s^en-
rhumer.
to collect, ramasser.
collection, collection, /.
color, couleur, /.
to comb, peigner.
to come, venir; (part.), venu, -e.
— back, re venir; (part.), re-
venu, -e. — in, entrer. —
down, descendre; (part,),
descendu, -e.
CO
FraiK^ais- Anglais
ce
combattre, to fight.
combien, how much, how many,
combien de temps, how long.
comedien, m. actor.
comique, comical.
commandant, m. commander.
commande, -e, ordered.
commander, to order, to bid.
comme, as, like, how. — k
Tordinaire, as usual.
commencer, to begin, to com-
mence.
comment, how, what.
commettre, to commit.
commission, /. errand.
compagne, /. comrade.
compagnon, m. companion.
compiet, -pl^te, complete.
complltement, completely.
compose, -e, composed.
comprendre, to understand.
compte, m. account.
compter, to count, to intend.
concevoir, to conceive, to plan.
concourir, to take part.
condition, /. position.
conducteur, m. driver, guide,
conductor.
conduire, to take to; to drive,
se — , to behave.
conduite, /. conduct.
confiance, /. confidence.
confier, to trust, to intrust.
se confondre, to be lost in, to
become confused.
confus, -e, confused.
cong^dier, to dismiss.
connaissance, /. acquaintance,
knowledge.
connaitre, to know, to judge.
conqu^rir, to conquer.
conseil, m. advice; council.
conseiiier, to advise, to recom-
mend.
consentir, to consent.
constamment, constantly.
CO
English-French
come! voyons! allons!
to command, commander.
to commence, commencer, se
mettre a.
to commit, commettre.
committee, comite, m.
common, ordinaire,
company, compagnie, /.
to compel, contraindre.
to complain, se plain dre.
complete, compiet, complete.
to complete, achever, terminer.
completely, completement.
coim'ade, camarade, m. or /.;
ami, m.
CO
370
to conceal, cacher.^
to conceive, concevoir.
to concern, regarder.
to condemn, condamner.
condition, condition, /.
conduct, conduite,/.
to confess, avouer.
conscience, conscience, /.
to consent, consentir (a), vou-
loir bien.
to consider, trouver.
Constantinople, Constantino-
ple, m.
constantly, constajnment.
construction, construction, /.
»
Fran(}ais' Anglais
cm
consulter, to consult,
content, -e, satisfied, pleased,
center, to relate,
continueliement, continually,
continuer, to continue,
contraindre, to compel,
contraire, contrary, reverse.
au — , on the contrary,
contre, against, contrary to.
convaincre, to convince,
convaincu, -e, convinced,
convenable, becoming, proper,
convenablement, properly,
convenir, to agree. 11 con-
vient, it is proper.
convenu, -e, appointed, agreed
upon.
conversation, /. conversation,
corail, m. coral,
corbeau, m. crow.
corbeiile, /. basket,
cordialite, /. cordiality.
Cordoue, /. Cordova,
corps, m. body.
correspondance, /. correspond-
corriger, to correct, improve.
corrompre, to taint.
cote, /. coast.
c6t€, m. side, k — , near, on
one side, de I'autre — , on
the other side.
cou, m. neck,
se coucher, to go to bed, to lie
down.
coude, m. elbow,
couleur, /. color,
coup, rn. shot, blow, stroke.
— de canon, cannon-shot.
— de pied, kick, tout k — »
suddenly.
coupable, guilty.
coupe, -e, cut.
couper, to cut, to cut off
cour, /. court, court-yard,
yard.
courage, m. courage,
courant, m. current, courant
d'air, draught.
courir, to run.
couronner, to crown,
cours, m. course.
CO
English-French
contented, content, -e.
continent, continent, m,
continually, continueliement.
to contradict, contredire.
contrary, contraire, m, on the
— , au contraire.
conversation, conversation, /,
cook, cuisini^re, /.
cool, frais, fraiche.
copper, cuivre, m.
copy-book, cahier, m,
cordiality, cordiality,/.
CO
corner, com, m.
to correct, corriger.
to cost, codter.
to cough, tousser.
to count, compter.
country, pays, m.; {in dis-
tinction from the town), cam*
pagne, /. in the country, k la
campagne.
courage, courage, m., coeur, nu
course, cours, m.
court, cour,/.
371
CO
Frangais-Anglais
de
course, /. errand; race.
court, -e, short.
courtisan, m. courtier.
cousin, m., -e, /. cousin.
couteau, m. knife.
coiiter, to cost.
coutiune, /. habit, avoir — , to
be accustomed.
couturi^re, /. dressmaker,
couvert, -e (de), covered (with),
couvrir, to cover.
craie, /. chalk.
craindre, to fear.
crainte, /. fear.
crayon, m. pencil.
cr^dule, credulous.
cr6er, to create,
crfeme, /. cream,
crever, to burst,
cri, m. cry.
crier, to cry, to cry out, to
shout, s'^crier, to exclaim,
crime, m, crime,
croire, to believe.
cruel, -le, cruel.
cruellement, cruelly.
cueillir, to gather, to harvest.
cuiller, /. spoon.
cuir, m. leather.
cuirasse, /. cuirass.
cuisine, /. kitchen.
cuisini^re, /. cook.
cuivre, m. copper.
curieux, -se, curious.
dame, /. lady.
Danemark, m. Denmark.
dans, in.
danse, /. dance.
date, /. date.
davantage, more.
de, of, from, in, with, by; some,
any; than.
d6, m. thimble.
d^barrasser, to rid.
se d^battre, to struggle,
d^biter, to recite,
debout, standing up.
d^boutonner, to unbutton.
CO
English-French
de
courtier, courtisan, m.
cousin; cousin, m., cousine, /.
cow, vache, /.
cream, cr^me, /.
to crown, couronner.
cruel, cruel, -le.
to cry, crier; {to weep), pleurer.
cunning, malin, maligna.
cup, tasse, /.
to cure, gu6rir.
to curse, maudire.
to cut, couper; cut down,
abattre.
to dance, danser.
to dare, oser.
date, date, /.
daughter, fille, /.
day, jour, m., journ^e,/., every
— , tous les jours, all — , toute
la journ6e. — before yester-
day, avant-hier, m.
to dazzle, ^blouir.
dead, mort, -e.
deaf, sourd, -e.
a great deal, beaucoup, bien.
dear, cher, chere.
372
de
Frmv^ais- Anglais
de
dlcembre, m. December.
d^cevoir, to deceive.
decider, to decide; persuade.
decoration, /. decoration.
decourager, to discourage.
decouvert, -e, discovered.
decouvrir, to uncover, se — ,
to take off one's hat.
d^dire, to contradict.
defaut, m. fault, defect.
d^fendre, to forbid, se — , to
defend one's self or each
other; to deny one's self.
d^fendu, -e, forbidden.
d^finitivement, positively.
d^gofit, m. dislike.
d6j£l, already.
dejeuner, m. breakfast.
dejeuner, v. to breakfast.
de 1', de la, of the; some, any.
d^licieux, -se, delicious, de-
lightful.
domain, m. to-morrow.
demande, /. inquiry.
demander, to ask (for), se — ,
to ask one's self, to wonder.
d-marche, /. step.
d^m^nager, to move.
demeure, /. dwelling.
demeur^, -e, lived.
demeurer, to remain, to live, to
dwell.
demi, -e, k demi, half, demi-
douzaine, /. half-dozen,
demi-livre, /. half-pound.
demoiselle, /. young lady, un-
married lady.
dimontrer, to prove.
dent, /. tooth.
dentelle, /. lace.
dentiste, m, dentist.
depart, m. departure.
d^peche, /. despatch.
depecher, to hasten.
dependre de, to depend upon.
depens, m. pi. expense..
deplaire, to displease.
deposer, to lay down.
depourvu, -e, unprepared.
depuis, since, for, from, de-
puis quand, how long.
d^ranger, to disturb.
dernier, dernifere, last; ut-
most, worst.
derriSre, behind (of place).
des, of the, from the; some, any.
de
French-English
de
death, mort, /.
decanter, carafe,/.
to deceive, tromper, d^cevoir.
December, d^cembre, m.
to decide, se decider.
decidedly, d^cid^ment.
to declare, declarer.
deep, profond, -e.
defect, defaut, m.
to defend, d^fendre.
definite, defini, -e.
to delay, tarder.
delicious, d^licieux, -se.
Denmark, le Danemark.
dentist, dentiste, m.
to depart, partir.
departed, parti, -e.
to depend upon, dependre de.
depth, profondeur, /.
to descend, descendre.
373
de
Frangais'Ajiglais
di
d^sagr^able, disagreeable.
descendre, to come down, to
let out, get out.
deserter, to desert.
d^serteur, m. deserter.
desirer, to wish.
d^sobeir, to disobey.
d^sol^, -e, grieved.
d^sormais, in future, hence-
forth.
dfes que, as soon as.
dessin, m. design, drawing.
dessus, upon, above.
detail, m. detail.
d^taler, to pack up.
determiner, to determine.
ddtester, to detest,
d^truire, to destroy.
deuil, m. mourning.
deux, two.
deuxilme, second.
devant, before (of place),
devenir, to become.
devenu, -e, become.
deviner, to guess.
devoir, m. duty,
devoir, v. to owe, must.
diable, m. devil,
diamant, m. diamond,
dictee, /. dictation,
dictionnaire, m. dictionary.
Dieu, God, the Lord; the
heavens,
different, -e, difiFerent.
difficile, difficult,
difficult^, /. difficulty,
digne, worthy.
dignitaire, m. dignitary,
dimanche, m. Sunday.
dimensions, /. dimensions,
diner, m. dinner,
diner, v. to dine,
dire, to say.
diriger, to direct.
discret, discrete, discreet,
discussion, /. discussion,
disgrace, /. displeasure,
disparaitre, to disappear,
disparu, -e, disapp)eared.
dispose, -e, inclined.
de
English-French
to deserve, m^riter (de).
to desire, d6sirer.
desk, pupitre, m,
detail, detail, m.
to detest, d^tester.
diamond, diamant, m,
dictionary, dictionnaire, m.
did. See do.
to die, mourir.
differently, autrement.
difficult, difficile,
difficulty, difficult^, /.
diligent, appliqu^, -e.
di
dimensions, dimensions, /.
to dine, diner.
dining-room, salle k manger, /.
dinner, diner, m,
dirty, sale.
disapprove, trouver mauvais.
to discover, d^couvrir.
discussion, discussion, /.
to disobey, d^sob^ir (a).
displeasure, deplaisir, m., dis-
grace, /.
disposition, caract^re, m,
distance, distance, /.
S74
di
Frangais-Anglais
dtt
dit, -e, said.
divin, -e, divine.
dix, ten.
dix-huit, eighteen.
dixiSme, tenth.
dix-neuf, nineteen.
dix-sept, seventeen.
docteur, m. doctor.
doigt, m. finger.
domestique, m. or f, servant.
dommage, m. harm, injury.
c'est dommage, that is too
bad.
don, m. gift.
donC; then, so, therefore.
donn^, -e, given,
donner, to give, to ascribe.
donner dans, to come into;
to strike.
donnez, give.
dent, of which, of whom,
whose.
dormi, slept.
dormir, to sleep.
dou6, -e, gifted.
douleur, /. grief, pain.
douloureux, -se, painful.
doute,m. doubt, sans — ^, doubt-
less, of course.
douter, to doubt.
doux, douce, sweet, gentle.
douzaine, /. dozen.
douze, twelve.
douzi^me, twelfth.
drap, m. cloth.
droit, m. right.
droit, -e {adj.), straight.
droite, /. right hand, k droite,
on or to the right.
droiture, /. uprightness.
drdle, m. rogue, scamp.
drdle {adj.), odd, queer.
du, of the, from the; some,
any.
di
English-French
dr
to disturb, d^ranger.
to do, faire, {of one^s health)
se porter. — one's hair, se
coiffer. to do without, se
passer de. {As an auxiliary.)
He knows better than I do,
II le salt mieux que moi.
{In urging, rendered by done
or prier.) Do speak to me I
Parlez-moi done ! {In reply-
ing.) [Did he say so?] He"
did. Mais oui. [He came
yesterday.] Did he? Vrai-
ment?
doctor, m^decin, m.
dog, chien, m.
doll, poup^e, /.
domestic, domestique, m. or A
done, fait, -e.
door, porte, /.
to doubt, douter.
dozen, douzaine,/.
draught, courant d'air, m,
drawer, tiroir, m.
drawing-room, salon, m,
dress, robe, /.
dressed, mis, mise; habill^, -e
dressmaker, couturi^re, /.
to drink, boire.
to drive, aller en voiture.
drunk, bu, -e.
dry, sec, sdche.
375
du
Frangais'A nglais
el
dii, due, due, must, been
obliged.
duel, m. duel.
duquel, de laquelle, desquels,
desquelles, of which,
dur, -e, hard.
durer, to last.
eau, /. water,
echapper, to escape,
^charpe, /. scarf,
echouer, to fail.
eclat, m. brightness, lustre,
^clater, to burst.
6cole,/. school.
ecossais, -e, Scotch, Scotch-
man.
ficosse, /. Scotland.
^couter, to listen,
ecran, m. screen,
s 'Verier to, exclaim.
^crire, to write.
ecrit, -e, written.
ecriture, /. handwriting.
ecrivain, m. writer.
ecurie, /. stable.
edifice, m. building.
Edimbourg, m. Edinburgh.
Edition, /. edition.
effet, effect, fact, deed, en — ,
truly, indeed,
effrayer, to frighten. s'ef-
frayer, to be frightened,
effront^ment, impudently.
^gal, -e, equal, cela m'est
€gal, it is all the same to me.
^garer, to mislay. s'^garer,
to lose one's way.
^glise, /. church,
^gorger, to cut the throat of.
^gratignure, /. scratch,
eh bien! well!
^labor^, ■'e, contrived.
du
in a duel, en duel.
dumb, muet, muette.
during, pendant.
dust, poussi^re, /.
Dutch, hollandais, -e.
duty, devoir, m.
to dwell, demeurer.
dying, mourant, -e.
each, chaque, adj., chacun, yron.
each other. Tun I'autre.
to earn, gagner.
ear-rings, boucles d'oreilles, /.
earth, terre, /.
easily, facilement.
English-French
el
easy, facile; {calm), tranquille.
to eat, manger.
eaten, mange, -e.
edge, bord, m.
Edinburgh, Edimbourg, m.
effect, effet, m, in — {in reality),
en effet.
effort, effort, m,
egg, ceuf, m,
eight, huit.
eighteen, dix-huit.
eighth, huiti^me.
eighty, quatre-vingte.
either. Tun ou Tautre; {aftef
negation), non plus,
elbow, coude, m.
376
el
Frangais'Anglais
en
^l^phant, m. elephant.
^l^ve, m. or f. pupil.
elle, /. she, her, it. elle-m^me,
/. herself, elles, /. they,
them. elles-mSmes, them-
selves.
^loign^, -e, distant.
embarras, m. perplexity.
embrasser, to embrace.
emmener, to lead away.
s'^mouvoir, to be moved.
s'emparer de, to take posses-
sion of.
empdcher, to hinder, to pre-
vent.
empereur, m. emperor.
empire, m. empire.
emplette, /. purchase.
employer, to employ.
emporter, to carry off.
s'empresser, to hasten.
emprimter (^), to borrow
(from).
emprunteur, m., emprunteuse,
/. borrower.
€mu, -e, moved, agitated.
en (pron,), some, any; of it, of
him, of her, of them, for it;
hence, thence.
en (prep.), in, while, at.
enchants, -e, delighted,
encore, still, as yet, again;
too. — im, another,
encourir, to incur,
encre, /. ink.
encrier, m. inkwell,
enfant, m. or/, child,
enfermer, to shut up.
enfin, at last,
enfler, to swell,
enlever, to carry off. s'en-
lever, to rise,
enneml, m. enemy.
s'enqu€rir, to mquire.
s'enrhumer, to catch cold.
^tre enrhum€, -e, to have a
cold.
enseigner, to teach,
ensemble, together,
ensnite, afterwards, next,
s'ensuivre, to follow, to re-
sult.
entendre, to hear; to mean.
— dire, to hear, to learn.
bien entendu, of course.
enthousiasm^, carried away,
entourer, to surround,
entre, between.
entr€, -e, entered, come in.
entreprise, /. undertaking.
el
English-French
elephant, ^l^phant, m,
eleven, onze.
eleventh, onzitoe.
elsewhere, ailleurs.
emperor, empereur, m.
to employ, employer,
empress, imp^ratrice, /.
encourage in, encourager k.
end (conclusion), fin, /.;
tremity), bout, m.
to end, finir, achever.
enemy, ennemi, m.
engaged, occupy, -e.
England, TAngleterre, /.
English, anglais, -e.
engraving, gravure, /.
377
en
(ex-
en
Frangais-Anglais
et
entrer (dans), to go in, to enter.
entretenir, to converse, to
entertain,
envers, towards,
envie, /. desire, fancy; envy,
envier, to envy, to begrudge,
envieux, -se, envious.
environs, m. neighborhood,
envoyer, to send.
epais, epaisse, thick.
epaisseur, /. thickness.
epaule, /. shoulder.
ep^e, /. sword.
^pingle, /. pin.
€poque, /. period,
eprouver, to feel, to experience,
epuise, -e, exhausted,
^reinter, to break the back.
Ernest, m. Ernest.
erreur, /. mistake,
es, art (pres. ind., 2d per. sing.
of etre).
escalier, m. staircase.
espace, m. space.
Espagne, /. Spain.
espagnol, -e, Spanish.
espfece, /. kind, sort,
esp^rer, to hope, to expect,
espion, m. spy.
esprit, m. spirit, wit.
essayer, to try.
essential, -le, essential, ma-
terial.
est, is; belongs, n'est-ce pas?
is it not? is it? il en fut
surpris, n'est-ce pas? he was
surprised at it, wasn't he?
le train n'est pas arrive,
n'est-ce pas? the train isn't
in, is it? je n'ai rien dit,
n'est-ce pas? I didn't say
anything, did I?
est, m. east.
estimer, to esteem, to value
highly.
et, and.
^tablir, to establish, to secure.
6tage, m. stovy (of a house), floor,
6tant, being.
6ta.t, m. condition.
les Etats-Unis, m, the United
States.
6t6, m. summer.
€i€ {part.), been.
^teindre, to put out.
etendard, m. standard.
^tendre, to stretch.
^tinceler, to flash.
^tonner, to astonish.
etourdi, -e, heedless.
etrange, strange.
dtre, m. being.
en
English-French
to enjoy one's self, s'amuser.
enough, assez.
to enter, entrer (dans).
enterprise, entreprise, /.
to entreat, prier, supplier.
equal, 6gal, -e.
equality, ^galit^, /.
Ernest, Ernest, m,
error, faute, /., erreur, /.
essential, essentiel, -elle.
to establish, etablir.
even, meme.
evening, soir, m.
event, ev^nement, vu
378
ev
et
, FrangaiS'Anglais
az
6tre (v.), to be. ^tre k, to
belong to; to be busy about,
en tee. Ou en etes vous?
how far have you got? j'en
suis pour mes peines, I had
my trouble for nothing, il
n'en est rien, it's nothing of
the sort, c'est que. venez-
vous? c'est que nous ne
pouvons pas, are you com-
ing? The fact is we can't.
See est.
€troit, -e, narrow.
^tude, /. study.
^tudier, to study.
eu, had.
Europe,/. Europe.
eux, they, them, eux-m^mes,
themselves.
^v^nement, m. event.
^ventall, m. fan.
Eventuality, /. contingency.
Evident, -e, evident.
exactitude, /. punctuality,
exagerer, to exaggerate,
examiner, to examine,
excepte, except,
excuse, /. excuse,
excuser, to excuse.
exEcuter, to execute.
exemple, m. example, par — ,
for instance; you don't say
so!
exercice, m. exercise, drill,
exiger, to demand, to require,
to insist upon.
expedition, /. expedition,
experience, /. experience,
expliquer, to explain,
s'exposer, to expose one's
self.
exprSs, purposely.
expression, /. expression,
exprimer, to express,
extravagance, /. extravagance,
extreme, extreme.
ev
English'French
ey
ever, jamais.
every, tout, -e, tous, toutes;
chaque.
everybody, tout le monde.
every one, chacun ; tout le
monde.
everything, tout, m.
everywhere, par tout.
evident, Evident, -e.
exactly, prEcisEment.
to exaggerate, exagErer.
example, exemple, m.
excellent, excellent, -e,
to exclaim, s 'Eerier,
excuse, excuse, /.
to excuse, excuser.
exercise, exercice, m., thfeme,
m,
to expect (before a noun), at-
tendre; {before an infin.),
s'attendre k.
expense, dEpens, m. plur,
experience, expErience, /.
to experience, Eprouver.
to explain, expliquer,
to express, exprimer.
to extol, vanter, louer.
extremity, extrEmitE, /, bout,
m.
eye, ceil, m.; pi. yeux.
879
fa
Frangais-Aiiglais
face, /. face, surface, en face
de, opposite.
f^cher, to vex. se — , to get
angry.
facile, easy.
facilement, easily,
fagon, /. fashion, way.
f aim, /. hunger, avoir — , to
be hungry.
faire, to do, to make. — beau
(temps), to be fine (weather).
— le malade, to pretend to
be ill. — dire, to send word.
avoir beau — , to be no use
trying. — faire, to get or
have done; — b^tir, to build.
— savoir, to let know. —
des affaires, to do business.
— de son mieux, to do one's
best, ne — rien, to make
no difference.
faisan, m. pheasant.
fait, m. fact, act.
fait, V. does, makes.
fait (part.), done, made, shaped.
falloir, to be necessary, must,
want.
fameux, -se, famous.
famille, /. family.
farine, /. flour.
fatigant, -e, tiresome.
fatigue, -e, tired, fatigued.
il faut, it is necessary, must.
faute, /. fault, offence, mistake.
fauteuil, m. arm-chair.
faux, fausse, false, artificial,
adulterated.
favori, favorite, favorite.
f eld-mar ^chal, m. field-marshal.
femme, /. woman, wife,
fenetre, /. window.
fer, m. iron, fers, fetters, fer
blanc, m. tin.
ferm6, -e, shut.
fermer, to shut, to close.
fermet€, /. firmness.
f^roce, fierce, ferocious,
festin, m. feast.
Ute, f. birthday.
feu, m. fire.
feuille, /. leaf (of book or tree),
f^vrier, m. February,
fi! fie!
fiddle, faithful,
fier, fi^re, proud,
figure, /. face,
se figurer, to fancy,
fil, m. thread.
fa
English-French
face, visage, m., figure, /.; (a
wry face), grimace, /.
to fail in respect, manquer de
respect.
faitWul, fiddle.
to fall, tomber; — in with,
rencontrer; — out, se
brouiller.
fallen, tomb6, -e.
fa
380
false, faux, fausse.
family, famille, /.
famous, fameux, -se.
fan, 6ventail, m.
to fancy, s'imaginer.
far, loin, by far, de beaucoup,
fast, vite.
fat, gras, grasse.
father, pfere, w.
fil
Francais'Anglais
fiUe, /. daughter, girl.
fils, m. son.
fin, /. end. H la — , after all.
fini, -e, ended, finished.
finir, to finish.
fixer, to fix.
flambeau, m. torch.
flatter, to flatter, se — , to
hope; to flatter one's self,
flatteur, m. flatterer,
flegmatiquement, calmly,
fleur, /. flower.
fleuve, m. river.
flocon, m. flake.
fois,/. time; bien des — , many
a time,
fonction, /. function,
fondre, to melt. — en larmes,
to burst into tears,
font, V. make.
force, /. strength, power,
fordt, /. forest.
fort, -e {adj.), strong, hard;
{adv.), much, very.
fortune, /. fortune.
fou, fol, foUe, mad, foolish,
foudre, /. lightning.
fouiller, to ransack.
fa
English-French
fo
fault {defect), d^faut, m.; {er-
ror), faute, /.
favor, faveur, /.
favorite, favori, favorite.
fear, peur, /. for fear of, de
crainte de, de peur de.
to fear, craindre, avoir peur.
February, fevrier, m,
fellow, gargon, m,
ferocious, f^roce.
few, peu. a few, quelques
{adj.), quelques-uns (pron.).
fewer, moins.
field, champ, m.
fifteen, quinze.
fifth, cinqui^me.
fifty, cinquante.
to fight, se battre.
to fill, remplir.
to find, trouver; (a thing lost),
retrouver.
fine, beau, belle.
finger, doigt, m.
to finish, finir, achever.
fire, feu, m.
first, premier, premiere.
fish, poisson, m,
to fit, aller.
fit of anger, acc^s (m.) de
colore.
five, cinq,
to flatter, flatter,
flatterer, flatteur, m., -euse, /.
flattering, flatteur, -euse.
flock, troupeau, m,
floor, plancher, m,
flour, farine, /.
flower, fleur, /.
fly, mouche, /.
fog, brouillard, m,
to follow, suivre.
foolish, fou, folle; sot, sotte,
foot, pied, m.
for, pour; {during), pendant;
{marking the beginning), de-
puis; {conj.), car.
to forbid, d^fendre.
forenoon, matin, m.
381
fo
Frangais-Anglais
foule, /. crowd.
fourchette, /. fork.
fourmi, /. ant.
fournir, to furnish.
fourrure, /. fur.
frais, fraiche, fresh, cool.
fraise, /. strawberry.
fraisier, m, strawberry plant.
framboise, /. raspberry.
franc, m. franc, 20 sous.
franc, franche, straightforward,
frank,
frangais, -e, French.
France,/. France,
frapper, to strike,
frequenter, to frequent.
frfere, m. brother,
f ripen, m. rogue.
ga
froid, -e, cold, avoir — , to
be cold.
froideur, /. coldness,
fromage, m. cheese.
fruit, m. fruit.
fruitier, -Ire {adj.), fruit,
f umee, /. smoke.
fumer, to smoke.
fureur, /. fury. • en — , wild,
furieux, -se, furious,
fusil, m. gun.
gagner, to reach, to gain,
gai, -e, cheerful, merry,
gaiement, cheerfully.
ganache, /. blockhead.
gant, m. glove.
fo
English-French
g«
to forget, oublier.
to forgive, pardonner.
fork, fourchette, /.
formerly, autrefois.
fortnight, quinze jours, w.,
quinzaine, /.
fortunate, heureux, -se.
fortune, fortune, f.
forty, quarante.
found, trouv^, -e,
four, quatre.
fourteen, quatorze.
fourth, quatri^me, a fourth,
un quart.
franc, franc, m,
frank, franc, franche.
free, libre.
freely, librement,
to freeze, geler.
French, frangais, -e.
Frenchman, Fran^ais, m.
fresh, frais, fraiche.
Friday, vendredi, m.
friend, ami, m., amie,/.
friendship, amiti^, /.
to frighten, effrayer.
frightful, affreux, -euse.
from, de. — me, de ma part.
— him, de sa part,
fruit, fruit, m.
fruit (adj.), fruitier, -hre.
to fulfil, remplir,
full, plein, -e.
fur, fourrure, /.
to furnish, fournir.
game, jeu, m.
garden, jardin, m,
gardener, jardinier, m., -hre, /.
882
gargon, m. boy, bachelor.
garde, 7n. keeper, guard.
garde, /. notice, prendre — , to
look out, to take care,
garder, to keep,
gare, /. railway station,
gdteau, m. cake,
g^ter, to spoil.
gauche , /. left-hand, k gauche,
to or on the left.
geler, to freeze,
g^ner, to inconvenience,
general, m. general,
g^n^reux, -se, generous,
genou, m. knee.
gens, w. or/., people,
gentil, -le, pretty, neat, nice,
amiable.
Fraiigais-Anglais
gr
geographic, /. geography,
giberne, /. cartridge-pouch,
gibier, m. game.
glace, /. ice.
gloire, /. glory.
gorge,/, throat.
goiit, m. taste.
goiiter, to taste, to lunch.
gouvernante, /. governess.
gr^ce, /. charm, favor. — k,
thanks to. de — , pray, I
pray you.
gracieux, -se, graceful,
grammaire, /. grammar,
grand, -e, large, tall, great,
grandir, to grow up.
grand-p^re, m, grandfather,
grange,/, barn.
ge
general, g^n^ral, m.
generous, genereux, -se.
genius, genie, m,
gentle, doux, douce; gentil,
gentille.
gentleman, monsieur, m.
geography, geographic, /.
George, Georges, m,
German, allemand, -e.
Germany, TAllemagne, /.
to get, avoir, recevoir. —
here, arriver. — rid, se d^
faire. — up, se lever,
ghost, revenant, m,
gift, cadeau, w.
girl, fille, /.
to give, donner. — back,
rendre, — me, donnez-moi.
given, donn6, -e. — back, rendu.
glad, bien aise.
English-French
Glasgow, Glasgow, m.
glass, verre, m.
glory, glou-e, /.
glove, gant, m,
to go, aller. — away, s'en
aller, partir. — out, sortir.
— to bed, se coucher. —
without, se passer de.
gold, or, m,
gone, alie, -e, parti, -e.
gone out, sorti, -e.
good, bon, bonne; (in conduct),
sage, to be so good as,
avoir la bont^ de.
governess, gouvernante, /.
government, gouvernement, m,
grammar, grammaire, /.
grand, magnifique.
grandfather, grand-p^re, aleul.
m.
883
gras, grasse, fat.
grave, grave, severe.
gravement, gravely.
gravure, /. engraving.
grec, grecque, Greek.
grele, /. hail.
grelotter, to shiver.
grenade,/, pomegranate.
grenadier, m. grenadier.
grenouille, /. frog.
gronder, to growl, to scold.
groom, m. lackey.
gros, grosse,, stout, big, large,
rough.
grosseur, /. size,
gu^re (ne before verb), scarcely,
hardly.
gu^rir, to cure,
guerre, /. war.
Guillaume, m. William,
Frangais'Anglais
ha
(Aspirate h is indicated by '.)
habile, clever,
habilement, skilfully,
habit, m. coat.
habitant, m. inhabitant.
habitation, /. habitation.
habiter, to dwell in, to live
in.
habitude, /. habit.
habitu^, m, frequenter,
habituer, to accustom,
'hair, to hate.
haleine, /. breath,
'haricots, m. beans,
'hasard, m. chance; par — ,
perchance; I suppose,
'haut, m. height, top.
'haut, -e (adj,), high, tall;
(adv,), loud,
'hauteur, /. height.
gr
grateful, reconnaissant, -€.
great, grand, -e.
greatcoat, paletot, m,
greatness, grandeur, /.
Greek, grec, grecque.
green, vert, -e.
on what ground, a quel litre.
to grow up, grandir.
to guarantee, garantir.
guardian, tuteur, w.
to guess, deviner.
guest, invito, m.
to guide, mener.
guilty, coupable.
habit, habitude, /.
had (part.), eu.
English-French
he
The Hague, La Haye.
hair, cheveu, m,
half, demi, -e, la moiti^.
half -hour, demi-heure, /,
hand, main, /.
handkerchief, mou choir, m,
handsome, beau, belle.
to happen, arriver, se passer.
happy, heureux, -se.
hard, dur, -e: fort, -e; difficile.
hardly, a peine.
harmonious, harmonieux, -se.
hat, chapeau, m,
to have, avoir, will you — ^
voulez-vous?
he, il, lui. he who, celui qui.
head, t^te, /.
health, sant^, /.
384
ha
Frangais-Ancjlais
ho
La 'Haye, The Hague.
*Henri, m. Henry
h^riter, to inherit.
heure, /. hour, o'clock; tout k
rheure, just now.
heureusement, happily,
heureux, -se, happy, fortunate,
'hibou, m. owl.
hier, yesterday. — soir, last
night.
histoire, /. history, story,
hiver, w. winter.
*hoIland£us, -e, Dutch.
hommage, m. homage.
homme, vi. man.
honn^te, honest, civil, respect-
able.
honn6tet6, /, kindness, cour-
tesy.
'honte, /. shame.
'honteux, -se, ashamed,
shameful.
horrible, horrible.
horriblement, dreadfully.
hdte, m, host; occupant.
h6tel, m, hotel, mansion.
he
English-French
ho
to hear, entendre, to hear it
said, entendre dire,
heart, coeur, m. with all my
heart, de tout mon coeur.
heaven, ciel, m,
heavy, lourd, -e.
heedless, ^tourdi, -e.
heedlessness, ^tourderie, /.
height, hauteur,/.
to help, aider.
Henry, Henri, m,
her Ipron.), elle, la. to her,
lui. (ad]\), son, sa, ses.
here, ici.
here is, or here are, voici.
herself, se, elle-m^me.
hesitation, hesitation, /.
to hide, cachcr. to — one's
self, se cacher,
high, haut, -e.
him, le, lui. to him, luf.
himself, se, lui-m^me.
his (adj.), son, sa, ses; (pron.),
le sien, la sienne, les siens, les
siennes.
historian, historien, m,
history, histoire,/.
hold! tenez!
holiday, cong^, m.; Jour de
cong6, m,
Holland, la Hollande.
at home, k la maison; chez . , ,
honey, miel, m,
honor, honneur, m,
to hope (before a future), es-
p6rer; (before a pres. or
past), aimer k croire, aimer
k penser.
horse, cheval, chevaux, m.
on horseback, k cheval.
horse-shoe, fer k cheval, m,
hot, chaud, -e.
hotel, h6tel, m,
hour, heure, /.
house, maison, /. at the — of,
chez.
how, comment, comme, que.
— long? combien de temps?
depuis quand? — many?
— much? combien?
385
ho
Fran^ais'Anglais
m
hdtel de ville, city hall,
'huit, eight,
'huitiSme, eighth,
humeur, /. temper,
humide, damp, moist.
ici, here.
ignorer, to be ignorant of.
11, he, it.
il y a, there is, there are.
fle, /. island.
illustre, famous.
lis, they.
s'imaginer, to fancy.
imiter, to imitate.
immense, immense.
impatient, -e, impatient.
imp^ratrice, /. empress.
impertinence, /. impertinence,
impertinent, m. impertinent
fellow.
impitoyable, pitiless,
important, -e, important,
il importe, it is important.
impossible, impossible,
impm", -e, impure.
inattendu, -e, unexpected,
incliner, to bend, s'incliner,
to bow.
incroyable, incredible,
indiquer, to indicate,
indiscretion, /. indiscretion,
indispensable, indispensable,
indispose, -e, indisposed,
infime, infamous, disgraceful,
inf^rieur, -e, lower,
infiniment, infinitely.
ho
English-French
in
however, pourtant, cependant.
humanity, humanity, /.
hundred, cent,
hundredth, centi^me.
hunger, faim, /. to be hungry,
avoir faim.
hurry, to be in a, ^tre press^.
I, je; moi.
ice, glace, /.
idle, paresseux, -se.
if, si.
ill {adj.), malade; {adv.), mal.
to be — , ^tre malade, se
porter mal.
illness, maladie, /.
illustrated, illustr^, -e.
illustrious, illustre.
imaginary, imaginaire.
immediately, tout de suite,
impertinent, impertinent, -e.
important, important, -e.
to be important, importer,
impossible, impossible.
impudence, impudence,/,
in, k, dans; en.
inch, pouce, m.
incredible, incroyable.
indeed, bien.
indefinite, indefini, -e.
indifference, indifference, /.
indispensable, indispensable.
indisposed, indispose, -e.
indisputable, incontestable,
to induce, engager {k),
industrious, laborieux, -ee.
infinite, infini, -e.
Fran^ais-Anglais
ja
infortune, /. misfortune,
ingrat, -e, ungrateful,
injustement, unjustly,
inquiet, -^te, uneasy, troubled.
inqui^ter, to annoy, s'inquie-
ter, to trouble one's self, to
be uneasy.
inscrire, to write down,
insecte, m. insect,
instant, m. moment,
instruire, to teach, s'instruire,
to learn,
instruit, -e, wise,
insulter, to insult.
intelligence, /. intelligence,
intention, /. meaning.
interdire, to forbid,
int^ressant, -e, interesting.
int^resser, to interest.
inter dt, m. interest.
interpeller, to speak to.
interrompre, to interrupt.
inutile, useless,
invitation, /. invitation,
invito, m. guest,
inviter, to invite.
Irlande, /. Ireland,
irresolu, -e, irresolute.
Italic,/. Italy.
Italien, -ne, Italian.
j' stands for je.
Jacques, m. James.
jalousie, /. jealousy; blind.
jaloux, -se, jealous.
jamais, ever, ne . . . jamais,
never.
jambe, /. leg. k toutes — , at
full speed.
Janvier, m. January.
Japon, m. Japan.
jar din, m. garden. — des
Plantes, public garden.
in
English-French
ja
inhabitants, les habitants, w.
ink, encre, /.
inkwell, en crier, m,
innocence, innocence,/,
insect, insecte, m,
to insist, exiger.
insolence, insolence,/,
instant, instant, m,
instead of, au lieu de.
to insult, insulter.
to intend, compter,
interest, int^r^t, m.
interesting, int^ressant, -e.
to interfere, se m^ler de.
to intimidate, intimider.
into, dans.
to invite, inviter.
iron, fer, m,
it, il, le, la, lui. of it, en. to it,
y. it is the tenth, c^est
le dix. it is I, c'est moi;
it is they, ce sont eux. it is
said, on dit. that's it, c'est 9a.
Italian, italien, -ne.
Italy, ritalie,/.
its, son, sa, ses.
James, Jacques, m,
Jane, Jeanne, /.
January, Janvier, tti,
Japan, Japon, m,
387
ja
FrangaiS'Anglais
la
jardinier, m. gardener,
jaune, yellow.
je,l.
Jean, m. John.
Jeanne, /. Jane.
Jeter, to cast, to throw,
jeu, m. game, play.
jeudi, m. Thursday.
jeune, young.
jeiiner, to fast.
jeunesse, /. youth.
joie, /. joy.
joindre, to join, to meet.
joli, -e, pretty.
joue, /. cheek.
jou6, -e, played.
jouer, to play.
jouir de, to enjoy.
joujou, m. toy.
jour, m. day.
journal, -aux, m. newspaper.
journ€e,/. day.
jovial, -e, jovial.
joyeux, -se, cheerful.
juillet, m. July.
juin, m. June.
jtuneau, m., jumelle, /., twin.
jurer, to swear.
jusqu'i, as far as, till.
juste, just, tout — , exactly.
justement, just, exactly.
kilogramme, m. kilogram,
kilometre, m, kilometer.
V stands for le or la.
la, the; her, it.
1^, there.
laborieux, -se, industrious.
liche, cowardly.
laconisme, m. conciseness.
laid, -e, ugly.
]e
English-French
la
jealous, jaloux, -se.
jest, plaisanterie, /.
jewel, bijou, m.
John, Jean, m.
journey, voyage, m.
July, juillet, m.
June, juin, m.
just (adj.), juste; (adv.), juste-
ment. to have — , venir de.
— now, tout a I'heure.
justice, justice, /.
to keep, garder,
key, clef,/.
to kill, tuer.
kilogram, kilogramme, m.
kind, bon, bonne.
to kindle, allumer.
kindness, bont6, /.
king, roi, m.
to kiss each other, s'embrasser.
kitchen, cuisine, /.
knife, couteau, m.
to knock, frapper.
to know, connaitre, savoir.
to labor, travailler.
labor, travail, m.
laborious, laborieux, -se,
lace, dentelle, /.
388
la
Frangais'Anglais
le
laine, /. wool.
laisser, to let, to allow, to
leave, to let alone. — tran-
quille, to let alone. —
tomber, to drop.
lait, m. milk.
lampe. /. lamp.
lancer, to throw.
langue,/. tongue, language.
languor, to languish.
lapin, m. rabbit.
laquelle, which.
large, broad.
largeur, /. breadth.
larme, /. tear.
las, lasse, tired.
latin, -e, Latin.
laver, to wash.
le, the; him, it.
leffon, /. lesson.
lecture, /. reading.
l^ger, l^g^re {adj.), light.
legume, m. vegetable.
lendemain, m. next day.
lentement, slowly.
leopard, m. leopard.
lequei, laquelle, lesquels, les-
quelles, which.
les, the, them,
lest, m. ballast.
la
English-French
le
ladder, ^chelle, /.
lady, dame, /. young lady,
■jeune fille, jeune personne,
demoiselle, /.
lamb, agneau, m,
lamp, lampe, /.
land, terre, /.
landlord, propri^taire, m.
language, langue,/., langage, m.
large, grand, -e; gros, -se.
last, dernier, derni^re. —
month, le mois dernier. —
evening, hier soir. — night,
cette nuit. at last, enfin.
late, tard, -e. to be — in,
tarder k.
Latin, latin, -e.
to laugh, rire.
laughed {'part.), ri.
law, loi, /.
lawyer, avocat, m.
laziness, paresse, /.
lazy, paresseux, -se.
389
to lead, mener. — to, araener.
— back, ramener. — away,
emmener.
leaf, feuille^/.
to learn, apprendre.
learned, instruit, -e.
learnt, appris, -e.
at least, du moins. at the — ,
au moins.
leather, cuir, m.
to leave {go away), partir;
{leave behind) , laisser; quitter,
left {adj.), gauche,
leg, jambe, /.
to lend, prdter.
length, longueur,/,
lent, pr6t^, -e.
leopard, leopard, m,
less adj., moindre; otiv., moins.
lesson, legon, /.
lest, de peur que, de crainte
que; {after verba expressing
fear), que.
le
Francais'Anglais
lo
lettre, /. letter.
leur (pron.), to them, {adj.),
their, le — , la — , les
leurs, theirs, their.
lever, to raise, se — , to
rise, to get up.
Ifevre, /. lip.
libraire, m. bookseller.
libre free, disengaged, at liberty.
lieu, m. place, au — de, in-
stead of.
lleue,/. league.
lieutenant, m. lieutenant.
ligne,/. line.
linge, m. linen.
lion, m. lion, lionne,/. lioness.
lire, to read.
lisi^re, /. verge, border.
lit, m, bed.
litre, m. liter = 1 J pints.
livre, m. book.
livre, /. pound.
livree, /. livery.
loger, to lodge.
loi, /. law.
Ton stands for on, one, people.
loin, far. — de, far from, de
— , from afar.
loisir, m. leisure.
Londres, m. London.
long, longue, long, le — de,
through, along.
longtemps, a long time, long.
longueur, /. length.
lor s que, when, while.
louer, to praise.
louer, to hire, to rent.
loueur de chevaux, m, stable-
keeper.
Louis, w. Louis.
le
English-French
lu
to let, laisser; (a house) ^ louer.
letter, lettre, /.
liberty, liberty,/, at — , libre.
library, bibliothfeque, /,
life, vie, /.
light {adj.), l^ger, l%^re.
light {noun^, lumi^re,/.
to light, allumer.
like (adj,), pareil, -le; (adv,),
comme.
to like, aimer.
to be like, ressembler (k).
likely, probable, vraisemblable.
lily-of-the-valley, muguet, m,
linen, linge, m.
lion, lion, m., lionne,/.
lip, l^vre, /.
to listen, ^couter.
little (ac?/.), petit, -e; (adv.), pen,
to live, demeurer; vivre. live
in, habiter.
lively, vif, vive.
living, vie,/,
to lock, fermer k clef,
London, Londres, m.
long, long, longue. a — time,
longtemps.
no longer, ne . . . plus,
to look, avoir Tair. — at,
regarder. — for, chercher.
to lose, perdre.
lost, perdu, -e.
Louis, Louis, m,
to love, aimer.
low, bas, basse.
luck, chance,/.
300
lo
FrangaiS'Anglais
ma
louis, m. louis, twenty francs.
Louise,/. Louise.
loup, in, wolf.
lourd, -e, heavy.
lu, -e, read.
lucratif, -ve, lucrative.
lueur, /. gleam, flash, light.
lui, he, to him, to her, to it.
Iui-m6me, himself, de lui-
meme, of his own accord.
luire, to shine, to glitter.
lumilre, /. light.
lundi, 771, Monday.
lune, /, moon.
lunettes, /. spectacles.
lutte, /. struggle.
lutter, to struggle, to fight.
m' stands for me.
M. stands for Monsieur, Sir, Mr.
ma, my.
Madame, /. Madam, Mrs.
Mademoiselle,/. Miss.
magasin, m. shop, store.
magnanime, magnanimous.
magnifique, magnificent.
mai, m. May.
main,/, hand; donner la — ,
to shake hands.
maint, -e, many, many a.
maintenant, now, by this time.
— que, now that.
mais, but, why I
maison, /. house, k la — ,
at home.
maitre, m. teacher, master.
maitresse,/. mistress.
majeste, /. majesty.
mal, m. harm, evil.
mal (adv.), ill, badly. * de — en
pis, from bad to worse, se
porter — , to be sick.
malade, ill, sick; (n.), patient,
maladie, / illness.
malentendu, m. misunder-
standing.
malgr^, in spite of.
malheur, m. misfortune.
malheureusement, unfortu-
nately.
malheureux, -se, unhappy, un-
fortunate.
malin, maligne, cunning, clever,
sly.
malle, /. trunk.
maman, /. mamma.
manchon, 7n. muff.
mange, -e, eaten.
manger, to eat.
maniere, /. way, manner; —
de voir, point of view.
ma
English'French
ma
mad, fou, folle.
made, fait, -e.
magnanimity, magnanimity, /.
magnificent, magnifique.
maid-servant, bonne, /.
to make, faire. — haste, se d6-
p^cher.
malignant, malin, maligne.
mamma, maman,/.
man, homme, m.
manners, mani^res,/. plur,
many, beaucoup. as — as, au-
tant que. too — , trop.
many a, maint, -e.
391
ma
Frangais'Anglais
me
manquer, to miss, to fail. —
de, to lack, to be in need of.
marbre, m. marble.
marchand, m, dealer, mer-
chant.
marchander, to bargain for.
marche, /. step.
marcher, to walk, to march ; to
go to work.
mardi, m, Tuesday.
marechal, m. marshal.
le Maroc, Morocco.
mars, m. March.
matin, m. morning.
mauvais, bad. — sujet, bad
boy, bad fellow.
me, me, to me, myself, to myself.
mechant, -e, naughty, wicked.
mecontent, -e, displeased.
micontenter, to displease.
m^decin, m. doctor.
meilleur, -e, better (adj.).
meler, to mix; se — de, to
meddle with.
mdme, same, even, de — ,
likewise.
m^moire, /. memory, remem-
brance.
menace, /. threat.
menacer, to threaten.
manager, to save, to spare.
menagerie, /. menagerie.
mener, to take to, to lead.
mensonge, w. deceit, lie,
mentir, to lie, speak falsely.
menton, m. chin.
mer,/. sea.
merci, thank you.
mercredi, m. Wednesday.
m^re, /. mother.
m^riter, to merit.
mes, my.
Mesdames, /. ladies, Mesdames.
Mesdemoiselles, /. Misses, the
Misses.
message, m, message.
Messieurs, m, sirs, gentle-
men.
mesure, /. measure.
m^tal, m. metal.
metier, m. trade, profession.
m^tre, m, meter.
ma
English-French
me
marble, marbre, m.
March, mars, m.
to march, marcher. *
market, marche, m.
to marry, ^pouser.
Mary, Marie,/,
master, maitre, m.
match, allumette,/.
May, mai, m.
it may be, il se peut, il est
sible.
me, me, moi.
meadow, pr^, m., prairie,/,
to mean, vouloir dire,
meaning, intention, /.
meat, viande, /.
to meddle with, se meler de.
to meet, rencontrer. to go to
— , aller au devant de.
to mend, raccommoder.
merchant, n^gociant, m.
pos- merry, gai, -e.
metal, m^tal, m.
meter, m^tre, m.
392
me
Frangais-Anglais
mo
mettre, to put, to put on. se
— k, to go to, to set about.
le Mexique, Mexico,
midi, m. noon; south.
miel, m. honey.
le mien, la mienne, les miens,
les miennes, mine,
mieux, better {adv,). faire de
son — , to do one's best,
mil, one thousand (used in
dates only).
milieu, m. middle, au — de,
in the middle of, among.
militaire, m. soldier.
mille, m. thousand; mile,
milliard, m. a billion,
million, m. million.
Miltiade, m, Miltiades.
ministre, m. minister,
minuit, m. midnight,
minute, /. minute.
miroir, m, mirror.
mis, mise, put, dressed,
miserable, miserable; wretch.
mis^re, /. misery.
MUe. stands for Mademoiselle,
Miss.
Miles, stands for Mesdemoi-
selles, Misses, the Misses.
MM. stands for Messieurs, gen-
tlemen, Messrs.
Mme. stands for Madame,
Madam, Mrs.
Mmes. stands for Mesdames,
ladies.
modMe, m. model.
moderne, modern.
modiste, /. or m., milliner.
moeurs, /. manners, customs.
moi, I, me, to me, as for me.
k moi! help! moi-m#me,
myself.
moindre, less, le — , least.
moins, less, fewer, k — que,
unless, au — , at the least,
du — , at least.
mois, m. month. le — der-
nier, last month.
me
Mexico, le Mexique.
Middle Ages, moyen ^e, m,
midnight, minuit, m,
mile, mille, m.
milk, lait, m.
milliner, modiste, m, orf.
million, million, m,
mine, le mien, la mienne, les
miens, les miennes.
minister, ministre, m,
minute, minute, /.
mirror, miroir, m.
misery, mis^re, /.
misfortune, malheur, m.
English-French mo
to mislay, ^garer.
Miss, Mademoiselle or MUe., /.
mistake, faute, /.
to be mistaken, se tromper.
mistress, maitresse, /.
to mock, se moquer de.
modem, moderne.
moment, moment, w.
Monday, lundi, m,
money, argent, m.
monkey, singe, m.
Mont Blanc, le Mont Blanc,
month, mois, m, in the — of,
au mois de.
393
mo
Frangais'Anglais
mu
moitiC; a moitie, /. half.
moment, m. moment, mo-
ments perdus, spare mo-
ments.
mon, ma, mes, my.
monde, m, world, beaucoup
de — , many people, per-
sonne au — , nobody in the
world, tout le — , every-
body.
Monsieur, Sir, Mr., gentleman.
mont, m, hill.
les monts Rocheux, Rocky
Mountains.
montagne, /. mountain.
monter, to go up, to carry up;
to ride.
montre, /. watch.
montrer, to show, to point to.
se moquer de, to sneer at,
laugh at.
morceau, m. piece.
mordre, to bite.
morsure, /. bite.
mort, /. death.
mort, -e (part.), dead,
mot, m. word,
mou, (mol), mo lie, soft,
mouche, /. fly.
mouchoir, m. handkerchief,
mourant, -e, dying.
mourir, to die.
mousseline, /. muslin,
moutarde, /. mustard,
mouton, m. sheep.
mouvement, m, movement.
mouvoir, to move, to stir,
moyen, m. means, way. -
^ge, m. Middle Ages,
muet, -ette, mute, silent,
mugir, to bellow, to roar,
muguet, m. lily-of -the- valley,
mur, m. wall,
mtir, -e, ripe,
miirir, to ripen,
musee, m. museum,
musicien, m, musician.
musique, /. music.
mo
English-French
moon, lune,/.
more, plus, davantage.
more, ne . . . plus,
morning, matin, m.
mortal, mortel, mortelle.
the most, plupart, /.
mother, m^re, /.
mountain, montagne,/.
mouse, souris, /.
mouth, bouche,/.
movement, mouvement, m.
Mr., Monsieur or M., m.
Mrs., Madame or Mme., /.
my
much, beaucoup; fort, so — ,
ao autant. too — , trop.
muff, manchon, m.
museum, mus^e, m,
music, musique, /.
musician, musicien, m
muslin, mousseline,/.
must, il faut que; devoir.
mute, muet, -ette.
mutton, mouton, m.
my, mon, ma, mes.
myself, moi-m^me.
mystery, myst^re, m.
394
na
Fran<}ais'Anglais
n^
naitre, to be born, faire — ,
to produce, to give rise to.
Napoleon, m. Napoleon.
nature, /. nature.
naturel, -le, natural.
naufrage, m. shipwreck, faire
— , to be wrecked.
n'est-ce pas. See 6tre.
ne . . . pas, not.
ne . . . personne, nobody, no
one.
ne . , . plus, no longer.
ne , . . que, only, nothing but.
n6, n^e, born.
n^cessaire, necessary.
n^gociant, m. merchant,
neige, /. snow.
net, nette, clean.
nettoyer^ to clean.
neuf, nine.
neuf , neuve, new-made,
neuvi^me, ninth.
neveu, m, nephew.
nez, m. nose.
ni . . . ni, neither \ . . nor.
ni^ce, /. niece.
noir, -e, black.
nom, m. name.
nombre, m. number.
nombreux, -se, numerous.
nommer, to name.
non, no. ni moi — plus, nor
I either.
nord-ouest, northwest,
nos, our.
notre (adj.), our.
le notre, la — , les n6tres
(pron.), ours.
se nourrir de, to live on.
nous, we, us, to us; ourselves,
to ourselves. nous-m§mes,
ourselves.
nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle,
new, de — , again.
na
English-French
nx
nail, clou, m.
name, nom, m.
to name, nommer.
napkin, serviette,/.
Napoleon, Napoleon, m.
naughty, m^chant, -e.
near, pr^s de.
nearly, presque.
necessary, n^cessaire.
to be necessary, falloir,
neck, cou, m.
to need, avoir besoin de; falloir
de.
needle, aiguille, /.
to neglect, n^gliger.
neighbor, voisin, wi.; voisine,/.
neither , . , nor, ni . . . ni.
nephew, neveu, m,
Nero, Neron, m,
never, ne . , , jamais.
new (another), nouveau, nou-
velle.
new-made, neuf, neuve.
news, nouvelles, /. plur,
newspaper, journal, m.
next, prochain, -e.
nice, gen til, gentiUe.
niece, ni^ce, /.
night, nuit, /. at — , le soir.
last — , cette nuit.
nine, neuf.
nineteen, dix-neuf.
395
no
Fra7igais-Anglais
of
nouvelle,/. report ; (jplur.), news.
novembre, m. November.
nu, nue, bare.
nuire, to injure.
nuit, /. night, cette — , last
night {from 12 till this morn-
ing),
nul, nulla (adj.), no.
nulla part, nowhere.
ob^ir, to obey,
objat, m. object,
oblige, -a, obliged,
obligar, to oblige.
obscur, -a, obscure, dark.
obsarvar, to observe, to keep.
obtanir, to obtain.
occasion, /. opportunity.
occupe, -a, busy, engaged.
occupar, to occupy.
octobra, m. October.
odaur, /. smell.
ceil, m. (pi. yaux), eye.
oeuf, m. egg.
offansar, to offend.
offer t, -a, offered.
office, m. office, duty, bons
offices, kind offices,
officiar, m. officer,
offra, /. offer,
offrir, to offer.
nl
English-French
ol
ninety, quatre-vingt-dix.
ninth, neuvi^me.
no, non, ne . . . pas, ne . . .
point. — longer, — more,
ne . . . plus. — one, per-
sonne . . . ne. — money,
pas d 'argent.
no (adj.), nul, nulle.
nobody, personne . , . ne.
noise, bruit, w.
noon, midi, m.
nor, ni. — I either, ni moi
non plus.
north, nord, m.
nose, nez, m.
not, ne . . . pas. — at all.
pas du tout, point.
p)as encore.
note, billet, m.
note-book, cahier, m,
nothing, ne . . . rien.
to notice, remarquer.
— yet,
novel, roman, m,
November, novembre, m.
now, k present, maintenant.
nowhere, nulle part,
number, chiffre, m.; nombre, m,
numerous, nombreux, -se.
oath, serment, m,
to obey, obeir (a),
to oblige, obliger.
obstinate, obstin^, -e.
to obtain, obtenir.
October, octobre, m.
of, de; du; de la; des.
offence, faute, /.
offer, offre, /.
offered, offert, -e.
office, bureau, m,
officer, officier, m,
often, souvent.
old, vieux, vieil, vieilie.
396
oi
FranQais'Anglais
ou
oiseau, m. bird.
ombrelle, /. parasol.
omettre, to omit.
omnibus, m. omnibus.
on, one, people, we, you, they.
oncle, m. uncle.
ont, have {third 'person pL).
onze, eleven.
onzi^me, eleventh.
opera, m. opera.
operation, /. operation.
s'opposer (k), to object to.
or, 7n. gold.
oracle, m. oracle.
orageux, -se, stormy.
orange, /. orange.
ordinaire, common, k V — ,
as usual.
ordonner, to order.
ordre, m, order.
oreille, /. ear. boucle d, — ,
/. ear-ring,
orphelin, m. orphan.
oser, to dare.
6ter, to take off or awaJ^
ou, or.
oil, where, par — , which way ?
oublier, to forget.
oui, yes. je crois que — , I
think so.
ours, m. bear,
outre, beyond, besides,
ouvert, -e (adj.), open; (part.),
opened,
ouverture, /. opening,
ouvrage, m. work, book.
ouvrier, m. workman,
ouvrir, to open.
om
English-French
ox
to omit, omettre.
omnibus, omnibus, m,
on, sur. on before a day or date
is not translated,
once, une fois. at — , tout
de suite.
one (adj.), un, une; (pron.), on,
Ton. no one, personne . . .
ne. the one, celui, celle.
one's self, se, soi.
only (adj.), seul, -e; (adv,),
seulement, ne . . . que.
to open, ouvrir.
opened, ouvert, -e.
opera, op^ra, m.
opportunity, occasion, /.
to oppose, opposer.
or, ou.
orange, orange,/.
order, ordre, m,
to order, ordonner, commander.
ordered, command^, -e.
in order that, afin que, pour
que.
other (different), autre; (ad"
ditional), encore un(e).
otherwise, autrement.
our, notre, nos.
ours, le n6tre, la n6tre, les
ndtres.
ourselves, nous, nous-mtoes.
out, hors. to go — , sortir;
to set — , partir.
to owe (ought), devoir,
owl, hibou, m.
own, my own, le mien,
overcoat, pardessus, m.
ox, boeuf, m.
S07
pa
page, /. page.
paille, /. straw.
pain, m. bread.
paire, /. pair.
paix, /. peace.
palais, m. palace; palate.
pMe, pale.
panier, m. basket.
pantoufle, /, slipper.
papier, m. paper. — k lettres,
note paper,
paquet, m. parcel, bundle,
par, by, through; before words
expressing time, a or an. —
ici, this way, in this direction.
paraitre, to appear, vient de — ,
just published,
parapluie, m. umbrella,
parbleu ! upon my word I
pare, m. park.
parce que, because.
parcourir, to go over, to run
through,
par-dessous, under,
par-dessus, over,
pardessus, m. overcoat.
Fraiigais-Anglais
pa
pardon, m. pardon; excuse me!
pardonner, to forgive.
pareil, -le, like, alike, such.
parent, m. parent, relative.
paresseux, -se, lazy, idle.
parfaitement, perfectly, quite.
par ici, this way.
parier, to wager.
Parisian, -enne, Parisian.
parle, -e, spoken.
parlement, m. parliament.
parier, to speak.
parmi, among.
parole, /. word.
part, /. part, share, de ma (ta,
sa) — , from me (thee, him,
her), quel que — , some-
where, nulle — , nowhere.
parti, -e, gone away, departed,
set out, left.
particularity, /. peculiarity.
en particulier, privately.
partie,/. part; party, excursion.
partir, to set out, to leave.
partout, everyivhere.
parvenir, to reach, succeed.
pa
English-French
pa
to pack, emballer.
package, paquet, m.
pain, douleur, /.
painful, douleureux, -se
paint, couleur, /. —
pinceau, m.
to paint, peindre.
painter, peintre, m.
painting, tableau
ture, /.
pair, paire, /.
palace, palais, m.
pamphlet, brochure, /.
paper, papier, m.; journal, m,
parasol, ombrelle, /.
parcel, paquet, m.
brush, pardon, pardon, m. to ask — ,
demander pardon,
to pardon, pardonner.
parents, parents, m.
m.; pein- Parisian, parisien, -enne.
park, pare, m.
parlor, salon, m.
part, partie,/.
398
pa
Fran^ais'Anglais
pas (adv.), not, not any. See
ne.
pas, m. step.
passage, m. passage,
passer, to spend; to hand; to
escape, to go, to pass, se
— , to take place, occur.
se — de, to do without. —
chez, to call on.
pasteur, m. pastor.
patiner, to skate.
pauvre, poor.
payer, to pay (for),
pays, 771. country.
paysan, ???. peasant.
pecore, /. sillj^ goose.
peigne, m. comb,
peigner, to comb,
peine, /. trouble, labor, grief.
k — , scarcely, just, don-
nez-vous la — , prenez la — ,
please,
peintre, m. painter,
pendant, during, for. — que,
during, while.
p^nible, painful.
pens^e, /. thought.
penser, to think.
pension, /. boarding-school.
percher, to perch.
perdre, to lose.
perdu, -e, lost.
pere, ?/i. father.
permettre, to permit.
permission, /. permission.
Perses, 7n. Persians.
personnage, m. personage.
personne,/. person, people, any
one. jeune — , /. young
lady, ne . . . personne, m.
nobody, no one. — an
monde, nobody in the world,
persuader, to persuade,
petit, -e, little, small, short,
peu, m. few, a little, avant — ,
before long.
peu, little, few, not very. — It
— , by degrees, gradually.
k — prds, about, nearly,
peuple, m. people, nation.
pa
English-French
pe
to part, s6parer. — from each pen-knife, canif, m
other, se s^parer.
to pass, passer, to come to-
se passer,
passage, passage, m.
patience, patience,/,
to pay for, payer.
peace, paix,/.
pear, poire, /.
peasant, paysan, m.
pen, plume, /.
pencil, crayon, m.
pen-holder, porte-plume, m.
people, gens; on, I'on.
many — , tant de monde.
pepper, poivre, m.
to perceive, apercevoir.
perfectly, parfaitement.
perhaps, peut-^tre.
perishable, p^rissable.
permission, permission, /.
to permit, permettre.
person, personne, /.
personage, personnage, m,
to persuade to, decider k»
a99
pe
peur, /. fear, avoir — , to be
afraid, de — de, for fear
of.
peut-etre, perhaps.
philosophic, /, philosophy,
phosphorique, phosphorescent,
photographic,/, photograph,
phrase, /. sentence,
pilce, /. piece; (theat.), play,
pied, m. foot, k — , on foot.
picrrc, /. stone,
picrrcux, -sc, stony.
pieton, m. pedestrian,
sc piqucr de, to pride one's self,
pire, worse.
pis (adv.), worse,
pitie, /. pity.
place,/, place, situation; seat,
placer, to place.
plaie, /. wound.
plaindre, to pity, se — , to
complain.
plairc, to please, se — , to
enjoy, s'il vous plait, if you
please,
plaisir, m. pleasure.
Frangais-Anglais
po
plancher, m. floor.
plante, / plant.
planter, to plant.
plcin, -e, full, open.
pleure, -c, wept, cried.
pleurer, to weep.
pleuvoir, to rain.
pluie, /. rain.
plume, / feather, pen.
la plupart, most.
plus, more, nc . . . plus, not
again, no more, no longer.
de — en — , more and more.
— t6t, sooner.
plusieurs, several,
plutot, rather.
pluvieux, -se, rainy,
poche, /. pocket.
poids, m. weight,
poignet, m. wrist.
point, m. point.
ne . . . point, not, not at all.
poire, /. pear,
poisson, m. fish,
poitrine, /. chest, breast,
poivre, m. pepper.
ph
English-French
po
philosophy, philosophic, /
photograph, photographic, /.
physician, medecin, m,
to pick up, ramasser.
picture, tableau, m.
piece, morceau, m.; pi^ce, /.
pin, ^pingle, /.
to pinch, serrer; blesser.
pine-apple, ananas, m.
to pity, plaindre.
place, place,/; lieu, m.
to place, placer.
plate, assiette, /.
play, jeu, m.
to play, jouer.
plaything, joujou, m.
pleasant, agreable, aimable.
please, veuillez {with infin.).
to please, plaire, faire plaisir k.
if you — , s'il vous plait.
pleased with, content (-e) de.
pleasure, plaisir, m.
plenty, beau coup.
pocket, poche, /.
400
po
poll, -e (adj.), polite.
poliment, politely,
politesse, /. politeness,
pomme, /. apple. — de terre,
/. potato,
pent, m. bridge,
bien portant, well,
porta, /. door.
port€, -e, carried,
porte-monnaie, m. purse,
porte-plume, m. pen-holder.
porter, to carry, to bear, to
wear, to put. — k, to take
to. se — , to be.
portiere, /. door,
portrait, m. portrait,
poser, to place, to put down,
poss^der, to possess,
possible, possible,
poste, m. post, station,
poste, /. post-office.
pot, m. pot, jug. — de terre,
earthen pot.
pouce, m. thumb, inch,
poup^e, /. doll,
pour, for, to, in order to.
Fran^ais'Anglais
pr
pourquoi, why.
poursuivre, to pursue,
pourtant, yet, however,
pourvoir, to provide,
pourvu que, provided,
pousser, to push; to utter,
poussi^re,/. dust.
pouvoir, to be able.
pr6, m. meadow.
pr^cieux, -se, precious,
prlcis^ment, exactly,
preferable, preferable,
pr^f^rer, to prefer,
premier, -^re, first, former,
prendre, to take, catch. —
garde, to beware, take care,
prenez, take,
preparer, to prepare,
pr^s de, near, beside, closely,
on the point of.
presence, /. presence,
present, m. present, k — ,
now.
presenter, to show, to present,
president, w. president,
pr^sider, to preside over.
po
English-French
pocket-book, porte-monnaie, m.
policeman, sergent (m.) de ville.
polite, poli, -e.
politely, poliment.
poor, pauvre; (6ad), mauvais,
-e.
pope, pape, m.
portrait, portrait, m.
positively, d^finitivement.
to possess, poss^der.
possible, possible,
post, poste, m.
pr
posterity, post^rit^, /.
post-ofl5ce, poste, /.
potato, pomme de terre, /.
pound, livre, /.
to praise, louer.
precious, pr^cieux, -euse.
to predict, pr^dire.
to prefer, pr^f^rer, aimer mieux.
preferable, pr^f^rahle.
to prepare, preparer,
present, cadeau, present, m,
president, president, m.
401
Fran(^ais'Anglais
pr
presque, almost.
pret, prete, ready.
prete, lent.
pr^tendre, to pretend.
preter, to lend.
preteur, m. preteuse, /. lender.
pretre, m. priest.
prevenir, to warn.
pr^venu, -e, warned.
pr^voir, to foresee.
prier, to pray, to beg.
priere, /. prayer, entreaty.
prince, m, prince.
princesse, /. princess.
principal, principaux, principal.
printemps, m. spring.
pris, -e, taken.
prison, /. prison.
prisonnier, m. prisoner.
prix, VI, prize; price, value.
prochain, -e, next, le mois
■ — , next month,
prodigieusement, greatly.
professeur, m, professor.
profit, m, benefit,
profond, -e (adj.), deep,
profondeur, /. depth,
proie, /. prey,
promenade, /. walk; ride,
promener, to take out to walk
se — , to take a walk,
promesse, /. promise,
promettre, to promise,
promis, -e, promised,
promptement, quickly,
prononcer, to pronounce,
utter.
propos, r??. talk.
proposition,/, proposal,
propre k, fit for.
proprietaire, rn, landlord,
propri^te,/. property,
protection, /. patronage,
protlger, to protect,
prouver, to prove.
proverbe, m. proverb,
provoquer, to provoke,
prudence,/, prudence.
pr
IJnglisli'French
to pretend, pr6tendre.
pretty {adj,), joli, -e.
price, prix, m.
priest, prdtre, m.
prince, prince, m.
princess, princesse, /.
principal, principal, -e.
principle, principe, m,
prize, prix, m, to gain a
gagner or remporter
prix.
probity, probity, /.
professor, professeur, m,
to promise, promettre.
pi
promised, promis, -e.
to pronounce, prononcer.
proof, preuve, /.
proper, convenable.
to be proper, convenir.
property, propri^te,/.
in proportion as, a mesure que.
proposal, proposition, /.
to propose, proposer.
to protect, proteger.
protection, protection,/,
proud, fier, fiere.
to prove, prouver.
proverb, proverbe, w.
402
la Prusse, Prussia,
prussien, -ne, Prussian,
pu, been able,
public, publique, public.
puis, then,
puisque, since, as.
puissant, -e, mighty,
punir, to punish,
punition, /. punishment,
pupitre, m, desk.
qu' stands for que.
quand, when, depuis — , how
long.
quant k, as for.
quarante, forty.
quart, quarter, fourth. —
d'heure, quarter of an hour.
quartier, m, quarter. Quar-
tier Latin, the Latin Quarter,
a 'part of Paris in which
many colleges and schools
are situated,
quatorze, fourteen.
quatre, four.
quatre-vingts, eighty.
quatre-vingt-dix, ninety.
Frani^ais'Anglais
quatri^me, fourth.
que ipron.), whom, which,
that; (interr.), what,
que (conj.), than, as, since;
how; let.
quel, quels, quelle, quelles,
what, which.
quelconque (after the noun),
whatever.
quel que (adj.), some, any.
— • chose, something. —
part, somewhere. — temps,
sometime.
quelque (adv.), however, what-
ever,
quelqu'un, somebody, quel-
ques-uns, a few.
quelquefois, sometimes,
se quereller, to quarrel,
qu'est-ce que ; . .? what?
question,/, question,
queue, /. tail, faire — , to
stand in line,
qui, who, which, that; (interr,
or after prep.), who, whom,
quinzaine,/. fortnight,
quinze, fifteen,
quitter, to leave.
Pr
English-French
provided that, pourvu que.
to provide for, pourvoir k,
province, province,/.
Prussia, la Prusse.
Prussian, prussien, -ne.
public, public, publique.
punctuality, exactitude, /.
to punish, punlr.
punishment, punition, /.
pupil, 61^ ve, m. or f.
qu
purse, porte-monnaie,^ m,
to pursue, poursuivre.
put, mis, -e, plac6, -e.
to put, placer, mettre; — up
(at a hotel), descendre.
to quarrel, se quereller.
quarter {the 4th part), quart, wi.
quarter (district), quartier, m.
403
qu
quoi, which, what.
wherewith.
quoique, alftiough.
Frmi^ais- Anglais
re
de quoi,
raconter, to relate, to tell.
rafraichir, to refresh.
rageur, -se, passionate.
raide, stiff.
raison, /. reason, avoir — , to
be right.
raisonnable, reasonable, sensi-
ble.
ramage, m. warbling.
ramasser, to pick up.
ramener, to bring back.
rang, m. rank.
ranger, to range, to arrange.
rapidement, quickly.
rappeler, to remind, to recall.
rare, rare.
rat, m. rat.
recevoir, to receive.
recherche, -e, sought after,
reciproquement, reciprocally.
reclamer, to claim,
recogner, to draw back,
recommander, to recommend,
to order.
recommencer, to begin again,
recompense, /. reward,
rlcompenser, to reward,
reconnaissant, -e, grateful,
reconnaitre, to recognize.
se recoucher, to go to bed
again.
re^u, -e, received,
recueillir, to harvest,
reculer, to go back,
redemander, to ask back or
again.
r^dulre, to reduce,
r^fl^chir, to reflect,
r^forme, /. reform,
refuser, to refuse,
regagner, to get back to.
qu
queen, reine, /.
question, question, /.
quite, tout k fait, tout.
rabbit, lapin, m.
railroad, chemin de fer, m.
railway-carriage, wagon, m,
railway station, gare, /.
rain, pluie, /.
to rain, pleuvoir.
rainy, pluvieux, -se.
rare, rare.
raspberry, framboise, /.
rat, rat, m.
English-French
re
to read, lire.
read, lu, -e.
ready, pr^t, pr6te.
really, vraiment.
reason, raison, /.
reasonable, raisonnable.
to receive, recevoir.
received, regu, -e.
reciprocally, reciproquement.
to reckon, compter.
to recommend, conseiller.
red, rouge ; of hair, roux,
rousse.
to reflect, r^fl^chir.
to refuse, refuser.
404
re
Fran^ais'Anglais
re
rlgal, m. treat.
regard, m. look; (plur.), glances,
eyes,
regarder, to look at; to concern,
regiment, m. regiment,
r^gle, /. rule,
regler, to settle,
r^gner, to reign,
regretter, to regret,
r^guiier, -%re, regular,
reine, /. queen,
rejouir, to rejoice,
relever, to lift up, to push up.
relire, to read again,
reluire, to shine, glitter,
remarquable, remarkable,
remarquer, to notice,
remercier, to thank,
remettre, to put on again; to
send.
remords, m. remorse.
remplir, to fill, to fulfil,
remporter , to carry back; to win .
remuer, to move.
renard, m. fox.
se rencogner, to get into a
corner.
rencontrer, to meet.
rendre, to render, to make, to
return, to restore, to yield.
— visite, to pay a visit, se
— , to surrender one's self.
rendu, -e, given back; returned.
renoncer, to renounce.
rentes, /. pi. income, property.
rentrer, to enter, to return; to
come home again.
r^pandre, to spread.
repartir, to set off again; to
answer.
repas, m. meal.
se repentir, to repent.
r^p^ter, to repeat.
r^plique, /. reply, sans — ,
without replying, at once.
r^pondre, to answer.
r^ponse, /. answer.
se reposer, to rest one's self.
reprendre, to resume; to re-
ply.
representation, /. representa-
tion, show.
r^primer, to repress, to curb.
reprocher, to reproach.
re
English-French
re
to regret, regretter.
regular, r^gulier, r^guli^re.
to reign, r^gner.
to relate, raconter.
relative, parent, m.
to remain, rester.
remained, rest6, -e.
remarkable, remarquable.
remedy, remfede, m.
to remember, se souvenir (d
remembrance, souvenir, m.
to remind, rappeler.
to remit, remettre.
to renounce, renoncer ik).
to repeat, r^p^ter.
reply, r^ponse, /.
to reply, r^pondre.
report, bruit, m.
representation, representation
/•
e). to reproach for, reprocher k.
to resign, se d^mettre.
405
re
Francais'Anglais
ro
republique, /. republic.
respect, m, respect, manquer
de — , to be disrespectful.
respectueusement, respect-
fully.
ressemblant, -e, a good likeness.
ressembier, to resemble.
ressortir, to go out again.
reste, m. remainder, du — ,
however, after all.
reste, -e, remained, stayed.
r ester, to remain, to stay.
r^suiter, to follow.
retabli, -e, recovered.
se r^tablir, to be restored to
health.
retenir, to engage, to keep.
retentir, to resound.
retirer, to withdraw, draw
back.
retour, m. return, de — , re-
turned, back again.
retourner, to return, to go back.
retrouver, to find, to find again.
reussir, to succeed, to be suc-
cessful.
reveiller, to awaken.
revenant, m. ghost.
revenir, to come back.
revenu, -e, come back, re-
turned.
re voir, to see again.
le Rhin, the Rhine.
rhume, m. cold.
ri, laughed.
riant, -e, laughing.
riche, rich.
richement, richly.
rien, nothing.
lire, m. laughter.
rire {v.), to laugh.
rive, /. bank, shore.
riviere,/, river.
robe, /. dress, robe.
roi, m. king.
r61e, m. character, part.
roman, m. novel, romance.
rompre, to break.
re
English-French
resistance, resistance, /.
respect, respect, m. to fail in
— , manquer de respect a.
rest {remainder), reste, m,
to rest, se reposer.
to resume, reprendre.
to return {to give back), rendre;
{to come back), revenir; {to
go back), retourner.
returned {come back), revenu,
-e; {given back), rendu, -e.
revolution, revolution, /.
reward, recompense, /.
to reward, r6compenser.
Rhine, le Rhin.
ribbon, ruban, m.
rich, riche.
to ride, monter. — horse-
back, monter a cheval. to
go riding, aller a cheval.
right, droit, -e, juste, to be
— , avoir raison.
ring, bague, /.
to ring, sonner.
ripe, mAr, -e.
to ripen, mt!irir.
to rise, se lever.
river, riviere, /.; fleuve, m.
406
ro
Frangais-Anglais
sa
rond, -e, round,
rose, /. rose,
rouge, red.
rougir, to blush,
rouler, to roll,
route, /. road, way.
roux, rousse, red,
royal, -e, royal,
royaume, m. kingdom,
ruban, m. ribbon,
rue, /. street,
ruine, /. ruin,
ruisseau, m. stream,
ruse, /. cunning, trick,
la Russie, Russia.
s^ stands for se; before il or ils,
for si.
sa, his, her, its.
sable, m. sand.
sac, m. bag. sac de nuit, m.
travelling-bag.
sacrifier, to sacrifice.
sage, wise, good.
saint, -e, holy.
saisir, to seize.
saison, /. season.
sale, dirty.
salir, to soil.
salle, /. hall, room. — k
manger, dining-room. — de
classe, /. classroom,
salon, rn. drawing-room, parlor,
samedi, m. Saturday,
sang, m. blood,
sanglant, -e, bloody,
sans, without, but for.
sant6, /. health.
sauf , except,
sauvage, wild,
sauver, to save,
savamment, cunningly,
savant, -e, learned,
savoir, to know,
savon, m. soap.
ro
English-French
road, route, /. ; chemin, m.
roasted, roti, -e.
Rome, Rome,/.
roof, toit, m.
room, chambre, /.; salle,/.
rose, rose, /.
round, rond, -e.
rule, ruler, r6gle, /.
to sacrifice, sacrifier.
sad, triste; chagrin, -e.
safely, sans accident,
.said, dit.
salad, salade, /.
8C
salt, sel, m.
same, m^me.
sand, sable, m.
satisfied, content, -e.
Saturday, samedi, m.
savage, sauvage, m.
Savoy, la Savoie.
scandal, scandale, m.
scarcely, k peine, ne . . .
gu^re.
scarf, ^charpe, /.
scenery, paysage, m.
school, ^cole, /. at — , k
r^coie. boarding- — , pen-
sion,/.
407
sa
Frangais'Anglais
se
la Saxe, Saxony.
scandaleux, -se, scandalous.
scelerat, m. scoundrel.
sc^ne, /. scene, incident.
science, /. science.
sculpture, /. sculpture.
se, himself, to himself; her-
self, to herself; one's self,
to one's self; themselves,
to themselves.
sec, s^che, dry.
s^cher, to dry up.
second, -e (adj.), second.
seconde, /. second (of time).
secouer, to shake.
secourir, to assist.
secret, m. secret.
secret, secrete (adj.), secret,
hidden.
secrdtement, secretly.
seigneur, m. lord.
la Seine, the Seine.
seize, sixteen.
sel, m. salt.
selon, according to.
semaine, /. week.
semblant, m. appearance.
sembler, to appear, to seem.
ce me semble, it seems to me.
sens, m. sense, meaning,
sentier, m. path,
sentiment, 7n. feeling,
sentir, to feel; to smell,
separer, to separate, se — ,
to part.
sept, seven.
septembre, m. September,
septifeme, seventh,
sergent, m. sergeant.
serieux, -se, serious,
serment, m. oath,
serpent, m. serpent,
serrure, /. lock.
service, m. service.
SC
English-French
science, science, /.
scissors, ciseaux, m. pi.
to scold, gronder.
Scotland, I'Ecosse, /.
scoundrel, scelerat, m.
sculpture, sculpture, /.
sea, mer, /.
seashore, at the, au bord de la
mer.
season, saison, /.
seated, assis, -e.
second, second, -e; deuxi^me.
second (of time), seconde,/.
secret, secret, m.
secret (adj.), secret, secrete.
to see, voir.
see! tenez!
to seek, chercher.
to seem, sembler.
seen, vu, -e.
to seize, saisir.
selfish, 6goiste.
to sell, vendre.
to send, envoyer.
sentence, phrase,/.
September, septembre, m.
seriously, serieusement.
serpent, serpent, m.
servant, bonne, /.; dornes-
tique, m. or f
to serve, servir.
service, service, m.
408
se
Frangais-Aiifflais
so
serviette, /. napkin, towel.
servir, to serve, se — de, to
use.
ses, his, her, its.
seul, -e, alone.
seulement, only.
s^v^re, severe.
s^v^rement, severely.
si, if, so; yes. si fait, yes, in-
deed !
si^ge, m. seat; siege.
le sien, les siens, la sienne, les
siennes, his, hers, its.
siffler, to whistle.
sifflet, m, a whistle.
signe, m. sign, signal.
signer, to sign.
sillons, m. plur. plains, fields.
simple, simple, foolish.
simplement, simply, merely.
sincere (adj.), sincere.
singe, m. monkey.
sire, m. sire.
sitot, so soon.
six, six.
sixi^me, sixth.
soeur, /. sister.
soi, one's self, himself, herself.
se
.English-French
SI
to set out, partir.
seven, sept.
seventeen, dix-sept.
seventh, septi^me.
seventy, soixante-dix.
several, plusieurs.
severely, s6v6rement.
shall. I — buy it, je Tach^terai.
He — do it, je veux qii'il
le fasse. — I buy some?
faut-il en acheter? I —
come at once, je vais venir
tout de suite.
shame, honte, /.
sharp, aigu, -e.
she, elle. she who, celle qui.
sheep, mouton, m.; brebis, /.
to be shipwrecked, faire nau-
frage.
shoe, Soulier, m.
shop, magasin, m.
to go shopping, faire des em-
plettes.
shore, bord, m.
short, court, -e, petit, -e.
shoulder, ^paule, /.
to show, montrer. — me,
montrez-moi.
shut, ferm^, -e.
to shut, fermer.
sick, malade.
silent, muet, muette.
silk, soie, /.
silver, argent, m.
simple, simple,
simply, simplement.
since, depuis; puisque.
sincere, sincere.
to sing, chanter.
sir, monsieur, m.
sister, soeur, /.
sister-in-law, belle-soeur, /.
to sit, s'asseoir.
sitting, assis, -e.
situation, place, /.
six, six.
sixteen, seize,
sixth, sixi^me.
409
so
Fran^ais-Anglais
so
sole, /. silk.
soif , /. thirst, avoir — , to be
thirsty.
soigner, to nurse.
soir, m. evening, ce — , this
evening, to-night, hier — ,
last evening.
soiree, /. evening; evening
party.
soixante, sixty,
soixante-dix, seventy.
soldat, m. soldier.
soleil, m. sun.
soimne, /. sum.
sommeil, m. sleep, avoir — ,
to be sleepy.
son, m. sound,
son, sa, ses, his, her, its.
sonder, to probe.
songer, to think.
sonnette, /. bell,
sont, are, belong, sont k, be-
long to.
sort, m. fate.
sortant, -e, going out, retiring,
sorti, -e, gone out.
sortir, to go out, to issue,
sot, sotte, foolish, stupid,
sou, m. cent; sou, five centimes,
soudain, suddenly,
souffler, to blow,
souffrir, to suffer; to allow.
SI
English-French
so
sixty, soixante.
to skate, patiner.
sky, ciel, m.
to slander, calomnier, m^dire
de.
slate, ardoise, /.
slave, esclave, m. or f.
to sleep, dormir. to be sleepy,
avoir sommeil.
sleepless night, une nuit
blanche.
slept, dorjni.
slice, tranche, /.
slipper, pantoufle,/.
small, petit, -e.
to smell, sentir.
to smoke, fumer.
snake, serpent, m.
snow, neige, /.
so, si; {after a transitive verb),
le; {after an intransitive),
ainsi. — many, — much,
410
tant. — soon, sit6t. — ■
long as, tant que. — do I,
moi aussi.
soap, savon, m,
soft, mou, moUe.
to soil, salir.
sold, Vendu, -e.
soldier, soldat, m.
some, du, de la, de V, des;
en; quelque, quelques-uns.
somebody, quelqu'un.
something, quelque chose.
— else, autre chose,
sometime, quelque temps,
sometimes, quelquefois.
somewhat, un peu, assez.
somewhere, quelque part.
son, fils, m.
song, chanson, /.
soon, bientdt.
sooner, plus t6t.
sorrowful, chagrin, -e.
so
Frangais^Anglaid
su
souhaiter, to wish; to hope.
Soulier, m. shoe.
soupgon, m. suspicion.
soupe, /. soup.
souper (v.), to sup.
souper, 7n. supper.
sourd, -e (adj.), deaf.
sourire, m. smile.
sourire (v.), to smile.
souris, /. mouse.
sous, under, below, beneath.
sous-officier, non-commis-
sioned officer.
soutenir, to bear, to maintain,
to uphold.
se souvenir, to remember,
souvenir, m. token.
sou vent, often. '
spectacle, m. sight, play,
splendeur, /. splendor, bright-
ness.
station, /. station,
studieux, -se, studious,
stupide, stupid,
subitement, suddenly.
subtilit6,/. subtlety,
succ^s, m. success.
Sucre, m. sugar,
sud, m. south,
suffire, to suflSce.
SO
English-French
8t
sorry, f4ch6, triste, chagrin, -e.
to be — , ^tre f4ch6 de.
soul, ^me, /.
soup, soupe, /.
south, midi, m., sud, m.
Spain, TEspagne, /.
Spanish, espagnol, -e.
to speak, parler.
to spend, passer.
in spite of, malgr^.
splendid, magnifique, superbe.
spoken, parl(§, -e.
spoon, cuiller, /.
spring, pr in temps, m.
to sprain, d^mettre.
square {adj.), carr^, -e.
staircase, escalier, m.
stake, to be at stake, y aller de.
to stand still, ne pas bouger.
standing, debout.
to start for, partir pour,
station, gare, /.
to stay, rester.
stayed, rest^, -e.
in his stead, k sa place.
steamboat, bateau (m.) ^ va-
peur.
steel, acier, m.
stick, canne, /.
still, encore,
store, magasin, m.
stormy, orageux, -se.
story, histoire, /. {of a hoiLse),
^tage, m.
stout, gros, grosse.
straight, droit, -e.
strange, strange,
stranger, stranger, m,
straw, paille, /.
strawberry, f raise, /.
stream, ruisseau, m.
street, rue, /.
strength, force, /.
to strike, frapper.
strong, fort, -e.
studious, studieux, -se.
411
i
811
Frangais'A7iglais
la Suisse, Switzerland.
suite, /. train; what follows.
tout de * — , at once, di-
rectly.
suivant, -e, following.
suivre, to follow.
sujet, sujette, subject.
super cherie, /. deceit, swindle.
superieur, -e, superior.
supplier, to implore.
supporter, to support.
supposer, to suppose.
sur, on, upon.
siir, -e, sure, certain.
surpris, -e, surprised.
sursaut, m, start, en — , with
a start.
surtout, above all.
ta, thy.
table, /. table.
tableau, m. picture.
tablette, /. tablet.
tocher, to try.
taille, /. figure, build.
taire, to say nothing about, to
be silent, se — , to hold
one's tongue, keep quiet.
talent, m. talent.
tandis que, while.
tant, so much, so many. —
soit peu, however little.
tante,/. aunt.
tantdt, by and by; sometimes.
tard, -e, late.
tarder k, to be late in, to delay.
tasse, /. cup.
St
English-French
te
to study, ^tudier.
subject, sujet, m.
subject {adj.), sujet, sujette.
to submit, soumettre.
to succeed, r6ussir.
such, pareil, -le; tel, telle.
to suffer, souffrir.
suffering, souffrant, -e.
sugar, Sucre, m.
sum, somme, /.
summer, et^, w.
sun, soleil, w.
Sunday, dimanche, m.
support, appui, m.
to support, appuyer.
to suppose, supposer.
sure, sHv, -e, certain, -e.
to surprise, surprendre.
to surrender, se rendre.
to sweep, balayer.
sweet, doux, douce; parfum6, -e.
Switzerland, la Suisse.
sword, 6p6e, /.
table, table, /.
tailor, tailleur, m,
to take, prendre. — to, m©-
ner, conduire. — a walk, se
promener. — after, tenir de.
— away, enlever. — off,
6ter.
taken, pris, prise,
talent, talent, m.
to talk, parler.
talkative, causeur, -euse.
tall, grand, -e.
tea, th6, m.
to teach, enseigner (A,), ap-
prendre.
412
te
I
FrauQaiS'Anglcds
to
te, thee, to thee; thyself, to
thyself.
tel, telle, such, un — , such a.
tenement, so much so.
t^moigncr, to show, to ex-
press.
tempete, /. tempest, storm.
temps, m. time; weather, k
— , in or on time, combien
de — , how long, de — en — ,
now and then.
tendre (?;.), to hold out, to
stretch.
tenez! see here! I say I stop a
moment.
tenir, to hold, to keep. —
compte, to take into con-
sideration.
tenter, to attempt; to tempt.
terme, m. term, expression;
end.
terminer, to end.
terrain, m. soil, ground.
terre, /. land, earth; par — ,
on the floor,
terrible, awful; enfant — ,
plague of a child, nuisance,
territoire, m. territory,
tes, thy.
t^te, /. head,
th^, m. tea.
th^dtre, m. scene, theatre,
thteie, m. exercise.
Th^r^se, /. Theresa.
le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les
tlennes, thine,
tiens! there! I say! indeed!
tiers, m. a third,
tigre, m. tiger.
timide, timid, modest.
tir€, -e, drawn; shot,
tirer, to draw; to fire, se
tirer, to get out.
tiroir, m. drawer,
toi, thou, thee, to thee. M-
m^me, thyself.
te
Englisii'French
th
teacher, maitre,w.; maltresse,/. that {adj.), ce, cet, cette. {de-
to tear, dechirer.
to tear out, arracher.
to tell, raconter, dire a.
temper, humeur, /.
temple, temple, m.
ten, dix.
tender, tendre, d61icat, -e.
tenth, dixieme.
Thames, the, la Tamise.
than, que; (before a number),
de.
to thank, remercier. thank
you, merci. thanks to, grA,ce
k.
mon. pron.), celui, celle;
celui-1^, celle-1^; cela. (rel.
pron.), qui (nam.), que (ace.),
{conj.), que. that's* all, voili
tout,
the, le, la, les.
theatre, th^4tre, m.
thee, te, toi.
theft, vol, m.
their, Icur, leurs.
theirs, le leur, la leur, les leurs.
them, les; eux,elles. to — , leur.
themselves, se; eux-m6me9,
elles-m^mes.
413
to
toit, m. roof.
Tol^de, /. Toledo,
tombe, -e, fallen,
tomber, to fall.
ton, ta, tes, thy.
ton, m. tone.
tonnerre, m. thunder.
Frangais-Anglais
to
tort, m. wrong, avoir — , to
be wrong.
t6t, soon, early.
toujours, always, still.
tour, m. turn, faire un — ,
to take a turn.
tour, /. tower.
th
English-French
to
then (afterwards), ensuite,
alors, puis; (therefore), done.
there, 1^, y. — is, are, il y a,
voil^. — was, were, il y
avait.
therefore, done.
these (oidj.), ces. (pron.),
ceux-ci, celles-ci.
they, ils, on. — who, eeux
qui, celles qui.
thick, 6pais, -se.
thickness, ^paisseur, /.
thimble, d^, m.
thine, le tien, la tienne, les
tiens, les tiennes.
thing, chose, /.
to think, penser; trouver.
third, troisi^me. a — , un
tiers,
thirst, soif. to be thirsty,
avoir soif.
thirteen, treize.
thirty, trente.
this (adj.), ce, cet, cette;
(pron.), celui-ci, celle-ci;
ceci.
those (adj.), ces. (pron.), ceux,
celles; ceux-la, celles-1^.
thou, tu, toi.
though, quoique, cependant.
thousand, mille (mil, in dates).
thousandth, milli^me.
thread, fil, m.
to threaten, menacer.
three, trois.
throat, gorge, /.
to throw, Jeter.
thumb, pouce, m.
thunder, tonnerre, m.
Thursday, jeudi, m.
thus, ainsi; at the beginning oj
a sentence, aussi.
thy, ton, ta, tes.
thyself, te, toi-m/ime.
tiger, tigre, m.
till, jusqu'^; (conj.), jusqu^4
ce que (vn'th subj.).
time, temps, m.; fois, /. a
long — , longtemps. by this
— , maintenant. from —
to — , de temps en temps.
in time, k temps.
tin, fer-blanc, m.
tipsy, gris, grise.
tired, las, lasse ; f atigu6, -e ;
(bored), ennuy^, -e.
to, a, jusqu'4.
to-day, aujourd'hui.
together, ensemble.
told, dit, dite, racont^, -e.
to-morrow, demain.
tongue, langue, /.
414
to
FrangaiS'Anglais
tounnent, m. torment,
lourmenter, to tease,
tourner, to turn round,
tousser, to cough.
tout, -e, tous, toutes, all, whole,
every, everything.
tout (adv.), quite. — k coup,
suddenly. — k fait, quite.
— k rheure, a little while
ago, just now. — au moins,
at the very least. — de
suite, at once. — en, while.
— juste, exactly,
traduire, to translate,
tragedie, /. tragedy,
tragi que, tragic,
trahir, to betray.
trahison, /. treason, treachery,
train, m. train; style, toe en
— de, to be in the act of.
traineau, m. sledge.
trainer, to drag, se — , to
creep along, to trudge.
traiter, to treat, to serve. —
de, to treat as or like.
tranche, /. slice.
tranquille, easy, calm, tranquil,
in peace,
transporter, to carry, to take,
travail, travaux, m. work,
travail!^, -e, worked,
travailler, to work.
k travers, through, across,
traverser, to cross, to go across,
treize, thirteen,
tremblant, -e, trembling,
trembler, to shake, to shiver,
trente, thirty,
tr^s, very; very much (before a
past part.).
tressaillir, to tremble, to start,
tribune, /. gallery,
triste, sad, sorry,
trois, three.
troisi^me, third,
tromp^, -e, mistaken, deceived,
tromper, to deceive, se — ,
to be mistaken.
trop, too much, too many, too.
de trop, in the way.
to
English-French
to-night, ce soir.
too (aZso),aussi; (before adj\
adv.), trop. — many,
much, trop.
tooth, dent,/.
toward, vers,
town, ville, /.
toy, joujou, m.
trade, metier, m.
train, train, m.
to transmit, transmettre.
to travel, voyager.
treason, trahison,/.
to treat, traiter.
tree, arbre, m.
to tremble, trembler.
trembling, tremblant, -e.
trial, proems, m.
trifle, mis^re,/; rien, m.
to trouble, d^ranger.
troubled (adj.), inquiet, -6te.
troublesome, fatigant, -e; en-
nuyeux, -se.
true, vrai, -e.
trunk, malle, /.
to trust, se fier k,
415
Frmicais'Anglais
va
troupeau, m. flock.
trousses, /., k mes — , at my
heels.
trouv^, -e, found.
trouver, to find; to think; to
like, se — , to be; to hap-
pen. — bon, approve, think
fit. — mauvais, disapprove.
tu, thou.
tuer, to kill, se tuer, to kill
one's self or each other.
tulipe, /. tulip.
tumulte, m, uproar.
turbot, m. turbo t.
turc, turque, Turkish.
tuteur, m. guardian.
un, una, a, an/ one. Tun et
1 'autre, both. Tun I'autre,
each other.
uniforme, m. uniform.
univers, m. universe.
urgent, -e, urgent, pressing.
utile, useful.
utilement, usefully.
vaccine, /. vaccination,
vache, /. cow.
vague, /. wave,
en vain, in vain,
vaincre, to overcome, to con-
quer.
tr
English-French
ve
truth, v^rit6, /.
to try, essayer, tocher de.
Tuesday, mardi, m.
tulip, tulipe,/.
Turkish, turc, turque.
turn, tour, m.
tutor, pr^cepteur, m,
twelve, douze.
twenty, vingt.
twice, deux fois.
twin, jumeau, m., jumelle, /.
two, deux.
ugly, vilain, -e.
umbrella, parapluie, w.
uncle, oncle, m.
under, sous.
uneasy, inquiet, inquire,
unfortunate, malheureux, -se.
imfortunately, malheureuse-
ment.
ungrateful, ingrat, -e.
unhappy, malheureux, -se; m^-
content, -e.
United States, les fitats-Unis,
m.
unjustly, injustement.
unless, a moins que.
until, jusqu'^ ce que.
unwell, malade.
upon, sur.
us, to us, nous.
use, usage, m.
useful, utile,
useless, inutile,
as usual, comme h, Tordinaire.
various, divers, -e, different, -e.
vegetable, legume, m.
very, trfes, bien. — much, beau-
coup. — well! eh bien I
to vex, facher.
416
TA
FranQaiS'Anglais
▼•
vaincu, -«, vanquished, con-
quered.
vainqueur, m. conqueror.
Talet, m. valet.
valeur,/. bravery; value.
valoir, to be worth- — xnieuz,
to be better.
se vanter, to extol one^B self or
each other.
vaste, vast.
veiller, to watch; to lie awake.
veiours, m. velvet.
vendre, to sell, se — , to be
sold; to fetch (a 'price).
vendredi, m, Friday.
vendu, -e, sold.
vengeance, / vengeance.
venir, to come. — de, to have
just.
vent, m. wind.
venu, -#, come.
vlrit€, /. truth.
vermisseau, m. little worm.
verre, m. glass.
vers (j)rep.), towards.
vers, 7n. verse, line.
vert, -e, green.
vertu, /. virtue.
veuve, /. widow.
viande, /. meat.
victoire, /. victory.
victorieux, -se, victorious.
vider, to empty.
vie, /. life, living; 'good time.
de ma vie, as long as I live.
Vienne,/. Vienna,
vieux, vieil, vieille, old.
vif, Vive, lively, quick, keen,
alive.
vigne,/. vine.
vihdn, -e, ugly, bad, wretched*
village, m. village.
ville,/. town, city,
vin, m. wine,
vingt, twenty.
vingtiSme, twentieth,
vioier, to violate,
visage, m. face, look.
viser, to aim.
visite,/. visit,
visits, -«, visited,
visiter, to visit,
vite, quickly, quick,
vivement, sharply, eagerly,
keenly,
vivre, to live.
voici, here is, here are.
voil^, there is, there are.
voir, to see.
voisin, m., voisine, /. neighbor,
voisin, -e (adj.), next, near,
voiture, /. carriage,
voix, /. voice,
voler, to fly; to steal,
volontiers, willingly,
votre, vos, your.
VI
victory, victoire,/.
Vienna, Vienne,/.
village, village, m.
to violate, trahir.
virtue, vertu, /.
English-French
vo
visit, visite, /. to pay a
rendre visite.
to visit, visiter, alier chez.
voice, voix, /.
voyage, voyage, m.
417
vo
F7^angais'Anglais
wh
le v6tre, la — , les v6tres,
yours.
voulez-vous, will you have?
do you wish?
vouloir, to like, to wish, to will.
— bien, to consent, to permit.
en — k, to have a grudge
against. — dire, to mean,
vous, you, to you; yourself,
to yourself; yourselves, to
yourselves. vous-meme,
yourself.
voyage, m. voyage, journey,
voyager, to travel,
voyageur, m. traveller,
vrai, -e, true, c'est — , it is
true.
vraiment, truly, really,
vu, -e, seen.
vue, /. sight.
wagon, m. railway carriage,
whist, m, whist.
wa
English-French
wh
to wait for, attendre.
walk, promenade, /. to take
a — , se promener. to go
out for a — , aller faire une
promenade.
to walk, aller k pied. —
lame, boiter.
want, besoin, m. to be in — ,
avoir besoin; falloir. to — ,
vouloir.
war, guerre, /.
warm, chaud, -e. to be — ,
avoir chaud.
to wash, laver.
to waste, perdre.
watch, montre, /.
to watch, regarder.
water, eau, /.
to water, arroser.
way, chemin, rn,
we, nous; on.
to wear, porter,
weather, temps, m. in this cold
— , par le froid qu'il fait.
Wednesday, mercredi, m.
week, semaine, /.
to weep, pleurer.
to welcome, accueillir.
well, bien. to be — , se porter
bien.
what, quel, quelle; quels,
quelles; ce qui, ce que.
whatever, quelconque {after
the noun).
when, quand, lorsque; (interr.),
quand.
where, oil.
which, rel, pron, (nom.) qui,
(ace.) que; (interr. pron. after
prep, or followed by of),
lequel, laquelle; lesquels,
lesquelles. from — , of
— , duquel, de laquelle;
desquels, desquelles; dont.
to — , auquel, a laquelle;
auxquels, auxquelles. (in-
terr. adj.), quel.
while, en (luith pres. part.),
pendant que, tandis que.
whist, whist, m.
to whistle, siffler.
whistle, siffler, m.
418
Fran^ais- Anglais
ze
y, there; to it, to them; to
him, to her; in it, in them.
yeux, m. {plur. of oeil), eyes.
z€to, m. zero, nought.
wh
English-French
ze
white, blanc, blanche.
who, qui.
whoever, qui que.
whole, tout, -e; tous, toutes.
whom, que; {after prep.), qui.
why? pourquoi?
why! mais!
wicked, m^chant, -e.
wide, large.
width, largeur, /.
wife, femme, /.
wild, f^roce, sauvage.
William, Guillaume, m.
to be willing, vouloir (bien).
willingly, volontiers.
will you have? voulez-vous?
to win, gagner; remporter.
wind, vent, m.
window, fen^tre, /.
wine, vin, m.
winter, hiver, m.
wise, sage.
to wish, d^sirer, souhaiter,
vouloir.
with, avec.
without, sans.
wolf, loup, m.
woman, femme,/.
wonderful, merveilleux, -se.
wood, bois, m.
wooden, de bois.
wool, laine, /.
word, mot, m. in a — , en
un mot.
work, ouvrage, m.; travail, m.
to work, travailler.
workman, ouvrier.
world, monde, w.
worse, plus mauvais, pire.
to be worth, valoir.
worthy, digne.
to wound one's self or each
other, se blesser.
wrist, poignet, m.
to write, 6crire.
writer, 6crivain.
written, ^crit, -e.
to be wrong, avoir tort,
wrought, travaill^, -e.
yard, cour, /.
year, a^, m.; ann^e, /. last
— , Tann^e dernifere, /,
yellow, jaune.
yes, oui; si.
yesterday, hier.
yet (again, still), encore; {how-
ever), pourtant.
you, vous; on.
young, jeune. — lady, jeune
fille, demoiselle, /.
your, votre, vos. yours, le
v6tre, la vAtre, les vdtres^.
yourself, vous, vous-m6me.
yourselves, vous, vous-m6mes.
youth, jeunesse, /.
zero, 2}(5ro, m.
419
^
INDEX.
ITumbere refer to pages.
&, contraction with definite arti-
cle, 35; repetition, 32; denoting
use, 2G4; other uses, 268; with
the infinitive alter certain verbs,
225.
accents, 1, 2.
acqu^rir, conjugation, 334.
active voice, 330.
adjectives, agreement in gender,
24; in number, 29; qualifying
two or more nouns, 30; forma-
tion of feminine, 24, 125-129 ; of
plural, 29, 67; comparison, 41,
94, 253; demonstrative, 43, 44,
46; numeral, 48, 51; possessive,
27, 28 ; interrogative, 107 ; indefi-
nite, 248; position, 47, 87, 92,
134, 251; list of those which
change their meaning with their
position, 351 ; verbal, 230.
adverbs, formation, 252, 353;
comparison, 253; position, 130,
253; of quantity, 76.
agre, ways of expressing, 114.
ago, 54, 109.
aller, conjugation, 110; idiomatic
uses, 153, 220, 237.
s'en aller, conjugation, 237.
alphabet, 1.
ann^e, contrasted with an, 235.
another, how expressed, 68, note.
any, before a noun, 80; excep-
tional uses of, 85, 87 ; without a
noun, 80.
apercevoir and s'apercevoir,
152.
apostrophe, use, 2.
article, definite : contraction with
a, 35 ; with de, 37 ; before proper
names, 166, 167; before nouns
of weight, measure, or number,
170; in general statement, 71,
166; omission, 166, 167; repeti-
tion, 32; used as possessive ad-
jectives, 134, 169; with titles,
etc., 170; with adjectives osed
as nouns, 170; partitive article,
80, 85, 87, 171; indefinite, 21,
171.
as, in a comparison, 58.
assaillir, conjugation, 334.
s'asseoir, conjugation, 254.
as soon as, with the future, 104.
aussi, in comparisons, 94.
aussitdt que, with future, 104.
autre and encore, 58.
auxiliary verbs, conjugation,
,'i08-319.
avant, distinguished from devant,
56.
avoir, conjugation in full, 308;
idiomatic use, 133, 134.
battre, conjugation, 244.
better, translation, adjective, 41 ;
adverb, 117, 253.
bien, followed by des, 76; posi-
tion, 130, 253; comparison, 117.
boire, conjugation, 270.
bon, different meanings, 351;
comparison, 94.
bougrer, without pas or pointy
256.
brave, different meanings, 351.
421
422
Index
Numbers refer to pages.
capital letters, use of, 15, 16;
with days and months, 53.
cardinal, see numbers.
ce, cet, cette, ces, 43.
ceci, cela, 47.
cedilla, 2.
celui, celle, ceux, celles, 45, 46.
cent, use of, 49.
-cer, verbs ending in, 184.
certain, different meanings, 351.
cesser, used without pas, 256.
c'est and ce sont, 96, 97, 122.
Chez, oi'i.
-ci, 46.
cinq, pronunciation, 33.
collective nouns, with singular
or plural verb, 234.
colleg'e examinations, selected
sentences, 279.
color, adjectives of, 47.
commun, different meanings, 351.
comparison of adjectives, 41,
94 ; of adverbs, 253.
compound tenses, 157.
conditional, formation and use,
i;3(), 137; after si, 215.
conduire, conjugation, 244.
conjugation, 59 ; first, 60 ; second,
69; third, 74; fourth, 82; pecul-
iarities in first, 180-185; table of
formation of tenses, 242; table
of terminations, 320; of regular
verbs in full, 322-329; of irregu-
lar verbs, 334-347.
conjunctions, used with the sub-
junctive, 204; may be changed
to a preposition to avoid the use
of the subjunctive, 228.
conjunctive pronouns, 143.
connaitre, conjugation, 202; dis-
tinguished from savoir, 207.
consonants, 7.
countries, names of, with or with-
out the article, 166, 167.
courir, conjugation, 229.
craindre, conjugation, 200; with
or without ne before the sub-
junctive, 200.
de crainte que requires ne with
the subjunctive, 205.
croire, conjugation, 195, 336;
when used with subjunctive, 194.
croitre, conjugation, 336.
cueillir, conjugation, 336.
dans, with names of places, 167 ;
in expressions of time, 269.
dates, 52, 108.
davantage, when to be used, 212.
days of the week, 53.
de, repetition, 32 ; contraction with
definite article, 35, 37; after
words of quantity, 72, 76; for
some or any, 80, 85, 87, 171;
after partitive expressions, 171;
after plus in comparisons, 94;
with the infinitive after certain
verbs, 222; meaning "by," 260;
meaning "with," 261; other
uses, 261.
definite article, see article.
demi, agreement, 52, 109 (e).
demonstrative adjectives, 43,
44, 4(); pronouns, 45, 46, 47.
depuis, meaning, 174; distin-
guished from pendant, pour,
and des, 269.
dernier, after the noun, 53; dif-
ferent meanings, 351.
d6s, meaning, 269.
d6s que, with future, 104.
devant, distinguished from
avaiit, 56.
devoir, conjugation, 75; transla-
tion, 238.
diaeresis, 2.
dimensions, 114.
diphthong's, 5.
dire, conjugation, 116.
disjunctive pronouns, 66, 96,
142.
dix, pronunciation, 33.
Index
423
Numher% r^er to pages.
do, as an auxiliary, 31.
dont, use, 120.
dormir, conjugation, 243.
du, contraction of de and le, 37.
dCl, past participle of devoir^ 75.
6crire, conjugation of, 226.
elision, 2.
emp^cher, used with or without
lie, 200.
en (pronoun), meaning and posi-
tion, 78, 80, 160, 163.
en (preposition), use with names
of places, 166; with present par-
ticiple, 231; in expressions of
time, 269.
encore and autre, 58.
envoyer, future and conditional,
185.
et, used with numerals, 48.
6tre, present indicative, 24, 25, 29,
30; conjugation in full, 314;
auxiliary use, 54, 158.
exercises for revie-w, 272.
expressions for class room
aise, 17-19.
faire, conjugation, 112; idiomatic
uses, 112,239; meaning" to get"
or ** to have done," 238.
fallolr, conjugation, 212; used in
the sense of "must," 188, 228;
in the sense of ** need," 228.
faux, different meanings, 351.
fear, verbs expressing, followed
by the subjunctive, with or with-
out UP, 200.
feminine, of adjectives, 24, 125,
128; of nouns, 305.
se flatter, conjugation, 332.
formation of tenses, 242.
fractions, 51.
from, before names of places, 167.
f\iir, conjugation, 340.
furieux, different meanings, 351.
future tense, formation and con-
jugation, 102 ; use, 104, 137 •,
after quand, etc., 104; when not
to be used after si, 137; ex-
pressed by alter to indicate
immediate action, 237.
firalant, different meanings, 351.
grender, 21 ; rule for determining^
2<^.
firentil, different meanings, 352.
-firer, verbs ending in, 184.
grrand, different meanings, 352.
haut, different meanings, 352.
have, when translated by /atre»
238 ; by devoir , 238 ; by venir de,
226.
her, as adjective, 27; as pronoun »
56, 62, 142, 143.
hers (pronoun), 39.
heure, used to express time, 108.
his, as adjective ,27 ; as pronoun, 39.
honndte, different meanings, 352.
how, how many, how much,
when rendered by que, 252.
how long", ways of translating,
174.
huit, pronunciation of, 33; no eli-
sion of preceding vowel, 2.
hyphen, 2; in numbers, 48; in
verbs, 22.
I final, elision of, 2.
II s'en faut, 257.
11 y a, distinguished from voila,
40; ago, 54, 109; duration of
time, 257.
imperative, formation, 61 ; posi-
tion of personal pronoun with,
62, 144, 146.
Imperfect indicative, formation
and conjugation, 89; use, 89, 177,
178.
imperfect subjunctive, fo-ma-
tion, 210; conjugation, 210; use,
209.
424
Index
Nvmbera refer to pages.
impersonal verbs, used with
the subjunctive, 189; with the
infinitive, 223.
in, before names of places or coun-
tries, 166 ; after a superlative, 95.
indefinite adjectives, 248.
indefinite article, see article.
indefinite pronouns, 248.
infinitive mood, 219; compared
with the subjunctive, 227 ; com-
pared with the present participle,
231 ; used without a preposition,
219, 220 ; used with the preposi-
tion a, 225 ; used with the prepo-
sition c?e, 222.
interrogative adjectives, 107.
interrogative adverbs, order
after, 140.
interrogative pronouns, 99, 116,
123, 247.
irregular verbs, table of con-
jugations, 334.
it, as subject, 25, 96, 97; as object,
62, 143, 160.
jamais, 85 ; with infinitive, 253.
jour, distinguished from journ^e^
235.
knoT^, savoir and connaStre com-
pared, 207.
le, la, les, see aj:ticle.
le (pronoun), 62, 143; meaning
*'so,"148, 149.
lequel, 116, 119.
leur, as adjective, 27 ; as pronoun,
39, 143.
liaison, 14, 15,
linking of words, see liaison,
lire, conjugation, 231.
I'on, use, 83, note 2.
lorsque, with future, 104 ; lorsque
and quand, 104.
lui, after a preposition, 56, 143 ;
after a verb, 144.
luire, conjugation, 244,
malgr^, 56.
matin, distinguished from matU
nee, 235.
mauvais, different meanings, 352 ;
comparison, 94.
may, translation, 220.
m^cbant, different meanings, 352,
mettre, conjugation, 223.
mien, 39.
mil, 49.
mille, use of, 49.
moi, use, 143.
^ moins que, with the subjunc-
tive, 205.
mon, before a feminine beginning
with a vowel or h mute, 28.
monsieur, madame, mademoL
selle, as mark of respect, 141,
258.
months, names of, 53.
more, translation, 41, 212.
mortel, different meanings, 352.
mourir, conjugation, 229.
mouvoir, conjugation, 342.
multiplication tables, 50.
must, implying supposition, 238;
meaning necessity or obligation,
228, meaning *' must have," 228.
naitre, conjugation, 244.
names of places, with or with-
out the article, 166, 167.
nasal vowels, 6.
ne, 26, without pas or pointy 256;
with ni . . . wi, 86; ne , . . que,
86, 258; after verbs of fearing
or preventing, 200.
negation, 256; see ne.
neither, 86.
neuf, pronunciation, 33; distin-
guished from nouveaUj 129.
ni . . . ni, 86.
not, see ne.
notre, 27.
Index
425
nOtre, 39.
nouns, collective, 234; formation
of plural, 26, 67; plural of com-
pound nouns, 304; gender of,
299; nouns of quantity, 72; of
material, 74; used in a general
sense, 71, 106.
nouveau, distinguished from
neuf, 129.
nuire, conjugation, 2^.
numbers, cardinal, 48; forma-
tion of ordinal, 34, 61 ; with et,
48 ; with a hyphen, 48.
ob^ir, object, 71.
offrir, conjugation, 243.
on, use of, 83, 244 ; when changed
to Von, 83, note 2.
on, omitted in French, 53.
only, translation, 258.
onze, no elision before, 2.
ordinals, see numbers,
oser, without paa or pointy 256.
ou, relative use, 119.
oui and si, 258.
ouvrir, conjugation, 243.
participle, past, as adjective,
233; agreement after etre, 54,
158, 2,*53 ; agreement after avoir j
65, 233: of reflexive verbs, 158.
participle, present, 59, 230; com-
pared with infinitive, 231.
partir, conjugation, ^3.
partitive article, 80, 86, 87.
paa, omission, 256; precedes the
infinitive, 2.'')3.
passive form, translation, 244;
conjugation, 330.
past anterior, conjugation, 178,
243; use, 178.
past definite, 177; use, 17«.
past indefinite, exercises on, 31 ;
distinguished from pest definite,
177.
pa»t participle, see participle.
pauvre, different meanings, 362.
pendant, distinguished from ds-
puU and pour, 174, 2*)9.
personal pronouns, see pro-
nouns.
personne, position, 131 ; in parti-
tive sense, with cte, 248.
petit, different meanings, 852;
comparison, 94.
peu s'en faut, 267.
peur {avoir , followed by the
subjunctive with or without 7i«,
200; de peur que, 205,
piece, morceau, and piece, 73.
places, names of, with or with-
out the article, l()(i, 167.
plaindre, conjugation, IMS.
plaire, conjugation, 244.
plaisant, different meanings, 863.
pleuvoir, conjugation, 212.
plupart (la), with plural verb,
inU; followed by des, 72.
pluperfect indicative, 167; sub-
junctive, 215.
plural: nouns, 26, 67; compound
nouns, 304; adjectives, 29, 67;
article, 26.
plus with infinitive, 263.
possessive adjectives, 27; repe-
tition of, 32.
possessive case, 29.
possessive pronouns, 89.
pour, distinguisbetl from depuia
and pendant, 269; with the
infinitive, 220.
pouvoir, conjugation, 220; with-
out pas, 256; distinguished from
savoir, 237.
premier, with names of rnlefs
and with dates, 62.
prendre, conjugation, 243.
prendre grarde, followed byiiie
subjunctive with or without ne,
2(X).
prepositions, a, de, depuis, des,
en, dans, pour, etc., 260-269. •
426
Index
ITvmbers refer to pages.
pr6s de, 56.
present indicative, first conju-
gation, 60; second conjugation,
69 ; third conjugation, 74 ; fourth
conjugation, 82; use, 59, 174.
present participle, see parti-
ciple.
present subjunctive, forma-
tion, 191; use, 188-217.
preterite, see past definite.
primitive tenses, 242.
pronominal verbs, 151, 155;
conjugation, 151, 331; used with
etre in compound tenses, 158;
used instead of English passive,
244.
pronoun, conjunctive, 143; de-
monstrative, 45, 4(), 47; dis-
junctive, 56, 96, 142; indefinite,
248; interrogative, 99, 116, 123,
247; personal, 142-1()5; posses-
sive, 39; relative, 42, 99, 119,
120, 122, 247.
pronunciation, 3-12; syllables,
12; words for practice, 12-14;
linking of words, 14, 15.
propre, different meanings, 353.
punctuation, 16.
quand, with the future, 104;
quand and lorsque^ 104.
que, elision of e, 41, 42; cannot
be omitted, 42 ; used to avoid
the repetition of other conjunc-
tions, 217; with the subjunctive,
217; used for** how!," "how
much ! , " 252 ; used f or " why ! , "
257.
quel, 107.
question, form of, 22 ; first singu-
lar, 60 ; noun subject, 25.
qui, does not admit elision , 42. See
pronoun, interrogative and
relative.
quoique, with the subjunctive,
204.
reciprocal verbs, conjugation,
332; definition, 155.
reflexive verbs, conjugation and
definition, 151, 331.
relative pronoun, 42, 99, 119,
120, 247.
review exercises, 272.
rien, position of, 131 ; in partitive
sense with de, 248.
rire, conjugation of, 232.
savoir, conjugation, 115; used
negatively without pas, 256;
subjunctive of softened asser-
tion, 215; distinguished from
pouvoir, 237 ; distinguished from
connaitre, 207.
se, 143, 158.
seasons, 112.
sentir, conjugation, 243.
sept, pronunciation of, 33.
seul, different meanings, 353;
with the subjunctive, 202.
si (.90), 42; in comparisons, 94;
meaning ** yes," 258. ^
si, conjunction, 137, 204; elision of
I, 137.
sien, 39.
six, pronunciation of, 33.
so, translation, 42.
soi, 249.
soir, distinguished from soiree,
235.
some, before a noun, 80; excep-
tional uses, 85, 87; without a
noun, 80.
son, before a feminine beginning
with a vowel or h mute, 28.
subject, repeated when of dif-
ferent persons, 140 ; in interroga-
tive sentences, 25.
subjunctive mood, 188 ; forma-
tion and conjugation of the pres-
ent, 191 ; after impersonal verbs,
189 ; after negative or interroga-
tive verbs, 194; after verbs
Index
427
NumhtrM refer to pages.
of emotion, 197; in adjective
clauses and after superlatives,
202; after certain conjunctions,
204; compared with the indica-
tive, 188; compared with the in-
finitive, 227; formation and
conjugation of the imperfect,
210; sequence of tenses, 20i);
subjunctive in independent
clauses, 214; used for impera-
tive, 215; pluperfect as a past
conditional, 215.
sulvre, conjugation, 242.
superlative, formation, 94; with
c'est or ce sonty 9() ; when placed
after its noun requires the arti-
cle to be repeated, 94 ; with the
subjunctive, 202.
syllables, division of, 12.
t, euphonic, 22.
tenir, conjugation, 217.
tenses, primitive, 242; derivation,
242; compound, 157.
tl/^n, 41 ; when translated by de,
9i; by que . . . ne, 254; or by
que de, 220.
that, relative pronoun, 42 ; demon-
strative adjective, 43; demon-
strative pronoun, 45, 47; con-
junction, 217; must always be
expressed, 42.
them, 56, 62, 143.
they, 142, 143.
this, demonstrative adjective, 43 ;
demonstrative pronoun, 46,
47.
tien, 39.
time, translation of time of day,
108.
titles of sovereigrns, 52.
ton, before a feminine beginning
with a vowel or h mute, 28.
tout, position, 68, 131 ; variable as
an adverb, 249 ; used with en and
present participle, 231.
triste, different meanings, 353.
trouver, meanings, 61, 198.
union of -words, 14, 16.
vaincre, conjugation, 346.
valoir, conjugation, 346.
venir, conjugation, 217; idiomatic
use of, 226.
verbal adjectives, 230.
verbs, conjugation: auxiliary,
308; irregular, 334; reciproi^al,
332; reflexive, 331; regular, 320.
vfitir, conjugation, ^46.
vilain, different meanings, 363.
vingrt, final f, 49.
vivre, conjugation, 244.
voilA, distinguished from il y a, 40.
voir, conjugation, 120.
votre, 27.
vOtre, 39.
vouloir, conjugation, 197; with
bien, 198.
vous, use, 22; agreement of ad-
jective and past participle, 26.
vo"wel8, simple, 3; compound, 6;
nasal, 6.
we, used indefinitely, 83.
weather, ways of expressing, 112,
239.
week, days of the, 63.
what, adjective, 107; interroga-
tive pronoun, 123, 247; relative
pronoun, 122.
which, adjective, 107 ; interroga-
tive pronoun, 116; relative pro-
noun, 42, 247.
who, relative pronoun, 42, 99, 247 ;
interrogative pronoun, 99, 247.
Whom, 42, <)9, 247.
whose, interrogative, 100; rela-
tive, 120.
y, meaning, 160; position, 161, 163
-yer, verbs ending in, 184.
FRENCH
First French Course
By C. A. Chardenal. z6mo, cloth, 474 pages. Price, 60 cents.
Second French Course
French Syntax and Reader, by C. A. Chardenal. i6mo, cloth, 250
pages. Price, 60 cents.
French Exercises for Advanced Pupils
By C. A. Chardenal. Revised by the late Professor Delphine
Duval, of Smith College. i6mo, cloth, 258 pages. Price, 90 cents.
THIS revision of Chardenars French Exercises contains all
the essential rules of French Syntax, in clear, concise form,
and a valuable list of idiomatic verbs and phrases, in which
English idioms are rendered by the corresponding French idioms.
Readings from French History
Edited by Professor O. B. Super, Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa.
i6mo, cloth, 324 pages. Price, ;JJi.oa
THE choice of the selections has been determined by their
suitableness to the reading ability of pupils in high schools
and colleges. In order that the selections may be interesting,
complete episodes have, so far as possible, been given. The
extracts will furnish the student a good idea of the style and
manner of the best French historians. With but one exception
the selections are arranged in (Chronological order.
The selections are as follows : —
Thierry, Conqu6te de I'Angleterre.
Barante, Jeanne Dare.
Louis Blanc, Situation du Peuple avant la Revolutioil.
Michelet, Prise de la Bastille.
Lamartine, Discouts de Vergniaud.
Mignet, Chute de Robespierre.
Lanfrey, Le Decret de Berlin ct PEntrevue de TiWt
Segur, Napoleon h Moscou.
Thiers, Napoleon h. Sainte-Helene.
Guizot, Histoire de la Civilisation en Europe.
53
FRENCH
Preparatory French Reader
With Notes and Vocabulary. By the late GEORGE W. ROLLINS,
of the Public Latin School, Boston. i6mo, cloth, 314 pages. Price,
90 cents.
THIS reader is intended to follow the selections ordinarily
found in the beginning book. It includes stories by Ortoli,
Laboulaye, Jules Lemaitre, Julie Lavergne, and others, and
among the poems are selections from La Fontaine, Victor Hugo,
Beranger, Casimir Delavigne, and Th^ophile Gautier. The his-
torical pieces, with Napoleon, Louis XVI, and Marie Antoinette
as dominant figures, will interest young pupils in a fascinating
period of French History. They are La Retraite de Moscou by
Marbot, Le Mart de Louis XVI by Duruy, Les Premiers Jours du
R^gne de Louis XVI and V Echafaud by Imbert de St. Amand.
The Drama is represented by Le Voyage de M. Perrichon.
The reader contains a table of the irregular verbs.
The Qa Ira Series of French Plays
Edited by Professor B. W. Wells. 6 volumes, i6mo, cloth. Each,
36 cents.
THIS series contains plays adapted to advanced classes in high
schools and to college students. The introductions give brief
biographies of the authors and helpful comment on their work.
The notes explain peculiarities of idiom, allusions to social and
political customs, to literature, and to history. The books are
particularly convenient in form and excellent in typography and
binding. The series contains the following plays : —
Moi, par Labiche at Martin.
Gringoire, par Theodore de Banville, et L'Et6 de la Saint-
Martin, par Meilhac et Halevy.
La Question d' Argent, par Alexandre Dumas, ^/j.
La Camaraderie, par Eugene Scribe.
Le Luthier de Cr6mone, et Le Tr^sor, par Fran9ois Copp6e«
Le Fils de Giboyer, par Emile Augier.
64
GERMAN
A German Grammar for Beginners
By Paul V. Bacon. Revised Edition. i2mo, cloth, 448 pages.
Price, ^1.25.
THIS is a beginning book which introduces easy reading from
the first, along with the usual drill in grammar. The object
is to stimulate interest, to economize vocabulary, and to give
unity to the first year work.
Distinguishing features of the Grammar are : —
I. Complete stories, full of interest, connected with the gram-
matical exercises and using the same words. The first is about
the school, the second about the home, and so many cognates
are used that reading may be begun as soon as the alphabet is
learned. There are 105 pages of this reading matter, including
poems from Goethe, Heine, and Uhland. The stories are sim-
ple and delightful and make use of every-day words. They will
attract the young pupil and enliven the grammar drill. The cor-
relation of stories and grammar makes possible a small working
vocabulary.
II. Systematic drill on grammar, each topic being treated ia
a group of five lessons. The language of the rules is especially
simple.
III. Every fifth lesson is a review, and in addition three com-
plete lessons are devoted to a review of the first half of the book
and seven to the. whole book. These reviews are twenty-three
in number.
IV. Attractive material for memorizing. Each lesson begins
with a proverb, idiom, or short poem, to be committed to mem-
ory. These include selections from Goethe, Schiller, Heine,
RUckert, Scheffel, Muller, and many others.
The New Edition contains at the back of the book a complete
Summary of Inflections arranged for ready reference. This, with
the Index to Syntax, makes the book suitable for a reference
grammar as well as for a beginning book.
66
GERMAN
Im Vaterland: A Reader for Pupils in their First or
Second Year of German
By Paul V. Bacon. i2mo, cloth, 430 pages. Price ^^1.25,
^'T^O give the American student a better understanding and
1 appreciation of Germany and the Germans ; to furnish him
with an adequate vocabulary of colloquial idioms ; to point out
and explain differences between German and American customs ;
in short, to broaden and deepen the Americanos knowledge and
love of the German language, music, poetry, and people ; these
are the aims of l7n Vaterland.'*'^
Distinctive features of this remarkable book are :
I. Dialogues on thirty-six different subjects (such as the Ger-
man Empire, The Imperial Family, In School, At a Store, Berlin
University, The Army, The Hotel, In a Theatre, At a Station, In
a Train, etc.). These give the pupil a knowledge of German
customs and prepare him for appreciative and intelligent travel in
Germany.
II. Illustrations from photographs of German scenes, build-
ings, paintings, churches, and castles. Besides forty-nine of
these illustrations there are six maps, including a two-page
colored map of the German Empire.
III. Songs, with music arranged for high school pupils.
There are twenty-seven characteristic German songs from sixteen
different composers.
IV. Poems — thirty-six of them — ranging from the thirteenth
to the twentieth century, especially adapted for memorizing.
V. Notes on all idioms and grammatical difficulties. They
serve also to supplement the text. For example, they contain a
complete list of the German States, an outline of a gymnasial
course of study, biographies of the authors mentioned in the
book, and kindred matters.
VI. Composition exercises on each chapter of the dialogues.
VII. A vocabulary made with unusual care, and including all
the idioms used in the book.
VIII. A full, practical index of persons and of topics.
57
GERMAN
AUyn and Bacon's Series of German Texts
THIS is the most attractive and convenient series of German
texts on the market. Each book contains complete notes and
vocabulary, together with exercises for retranslation into Ger-
man. These exercises are based on the text and afford excellent
material for review as well as practice in composition. The prices
will seem reasonable when the general excellence is considered.
The following volumes are now ready : —
GRIECHISCHE HEROENGESCHICHTEN.
By Barthold Georg Niebuhr. Edited by George E. Merkley.
i6mo, cloth, 128 pages. Price, 50 cents.
MARCHEN.
By Jakob and Wilhelm Grimm. Edited by George E. Merkley.
i6mo, cloth, 140 pages. Price, 50 cents.
L'ARRABBIATA.
By Paul Heyse. Edited by Paul V. Bacon. i6mo, cloth, 126 pages.
Price, 50 cents.
HOHER ALS DIE KIRCHE.
By Wilhelmine von Hillern. Edited by J. B. E. Jonas, of Brown
University, Providence, R.I. i6mo, cloth, 150 pages. Price, 50 cents.
IMMENSEE.
By Theodore Storm. Edited by E. A. Whitenack, of the State
Normal School, Peru, Neb. i6mo, cloth, 116 pages. Price, 50 cents.
GERMELSHAUSEN.
By Friedrich GeRSTACKER. Edited by R. A. VON MINCKWITZ.
i6mo, cloth, 122 pages. Price, 50 cents.
DER NEFPE ALS ONKEL.
By Friedrich von Schiller. Edited by Professor C. F. Raddatz,
of the Baltimore City College. i6mo, cloth, 147 pages. Price, 50 cents.
58
GERMAN
AUyn and Bacon's German Texts — Continued
DIE JOURNALISTEN.
By GusTAV Freytag. Edited by Edward Manley, of ihe Engle-
wood High School, Chicago. i6mo, cloth, 272 pages. Price, 60 cents.
DER ZERBROCHENE KRUG and DAS WIRTSHAUS ZU CRANSAC.
By JOHANN Heinrich Daniel Zschokke. Edited by Edward
Manley, of the Englewood High School, Chicago. i6mo, cloth, 169
pages. Price, 50 cents.
DER SCHWIEGERSOHN.
By Rudolf Baumbach. Edited by W. W. Florer and E. H.
Lauer, of Ann Arbor, Mich. i6mo, cloth, 262 pages. Price, 60 cents.
DAS EDLE BLUT and DER LETZTE.
By Ernst von Wildenbruch. Edited by W. W. Florer, of Ann
Arbor, Mich., and M. R. SHELLY. i6mo, cloth, 238 pages. Price, 60
cents.
WILHELM TELL
By Friedrich von Schiller. Edited by Professor Carl
SCHLENKER, of the University of Minnesota. i6mo, cloth, 000 pages.
Price, 00 cents.
NO pains have been spared to make this the most useful and
attractive edition of Wilhelm Tell now on the market. The
illustrations are numerous enough to give an excellent idea of the
picturesque Tell country. The book has a life of Schiller, full
notes, and an historical commentary. There are citations from
parallel passages in other famous literary works. An appendix is
devoted to notes on poetic diction ; another gives the lines of
the play most often quoted. Exercises based on the text furnish
a systematic study of German grammar. Questions in German
are given as a basis for conversation.
59
SCIENCE
First Principles of Physics
By Professor HENRY S. Carhart, of the University of Michigan, and
H. N. Chute, of the Ann Arbor High School. i2nio, cloth, 422 pages.
Price, ^1.25.
THE present volume is more than a revision of the authors'
popular High School Physics. It is a new book from cover
to cover. No pains have been spared to make it mechanically
the attractive volume which the increasing interest in the applica-
tions of this practical subject deserves. The cuts number 457
and will be found to constitute a prominent feature of the book.
Especial attention has been given to the language, which has
been made unusually simple and direct. The problems are nu-
merous and interesting, and in them the difficulty of the actual
arithmetical performance is reduced to a minimum, since it is
recognized that the purpose of problems is the concrete illustra-
tion of principles rather than practice in arithmetic.
Although in keeping abreast of the times the authors have in-
troduced many new features, they have been careful to retain the
general scheme of presentation, and the just proportions, which
made their former books so popular. The space given to the
various topics is such as logical presentation demands. No topic
is unduly emphasized in an effort at novelty of presentation. Each
subject is treated concisely and is divided into numerous brief
paragraphs with sub-headings, in order to aid the pupil in con-
centrating his mind on the points of fundamental importance.
It has been felt that many recent text-books in physics have
sacrificed scientific and logical presentation in the effort to inter-
est pupils by over-emphasis of some aspect of the science which
has been considered attractive. The result of the use of such
books has been a one-sided preparation and a consequent failure
to meet college requirements. The authors of First Principles of
Physics have shown that it is possible to produce a book which
is as successful as their former texts in preparing pupils for col-
lege and at the same time yields to no competing text-book of
physics in attractiveness.
61
MATHEMATICS
First Principles of Algebra
By H. E. Slaught, Associate Professor of Mathematics in the Univer-
sity of Chicago, and N. J. Lennes, Instructor in Mathematics in
Columbia University, New York City. ELEMENTARY COURSE, i2mo,
cloth, 288 pages. Price, ^i.oo. ADVANCED COURSE and COM-
PLETE Course, At Press.
THIS book embodies the methods of what might be called the
new school of Algebra teaching, but at the same time has
kept the valuable features of the books which preceded this
movement.
In writing the First Principles of Algebra the authors have been
governed by two main purposes: (i) to provide a gradual and
natural introduction to the symbols and processes of algebra;
(2) to give purpose to the subject of algebra by a constant use of
it in doing interesting and valuable things. Each of these pur-
poses leads to the same order of topics, which, however, differs in
minor features from the conventional order. In the Introduction
the authors offer a full explanation of their reasons for adopting
the present order, which will be found to be logical and
systematic.
The study of equations and their uses is regarded as the main
topic for the first year's work. It is recognized that abstract equa-
tions will appear of little or no value to the pupil unless he finds
uses for them ; hence frequent lists of problems are provided for
translation into equations and for solution. Many of these prob-
lems involve valuable mathematical concepts, so that during the
first half year algebra is made to appeal to the higher and more
useful types of interest, and not merely to the instinct for solv-
ing puzzles, which must be the case if the greater part of this time
is spent on factoring and in manipulating complicated fractions.
The principles of algebra used in the Elementary Course are
stated in a small number of short rules, eighteen in all. The
purpose of these rules is to furnish in simple form a codifi-
cation of those operations of algebra which require special em-
phasis.
70
HISTORY
Readings in Ancient History : A Selection of Illus-
trative Extracts from the Sources
By Professor William Stearns Davis, of the University of Minne-
sota; Introduction by Professor WiLLis Mason West, of the Univer-
sity of Minnesota.
Volume I : Greece and the East. i2mo, cloth, ooo pages. Price, $0.00.
Volume II : Rome and the West. i2mo, cloth, coo pages. Price, ^0.00.
THIS book sets before the student beginning the study of
Ancient History a sufficient amount of source material to
illustrate the important or typical historical facts which will be
mentioned in his text-book. The volumes are not designed for
hard study, to be tested scrupulously by minute questioning;
they are meant for readmg, — a daily companion to any standard
text in Ancient History, — and the boy or girl so using them is
sure to breathe in more of the atmosphere of the ancient world,
and to get more taste of the notable literary flavor pervading
Greek and Roman history, than would be possible from the study
of a conventional text-book.
Volume I contains 125 different selections, of which the follow-
ing are typical : The Ethics of an Egyptian Nobleman, Ijtscrip-
tion; An Assyrian Palace, Maspero; The Shield of Achilles, The
Iliad; How Glaucus tried to tempt the Delphic Oracle, Herodo-
tus ; The Ring of Poly crates, Herodotus ; How Leonidas held the
Pass of Thermopylae, Herodotus ; The Last Fight in the Harbor
of Syracuse, Thucydides ; Anecdotes about Socrates, Diogenes
Laertius ; How Lysias escaped from the " Thirty," Lysias ; How
Elephants fought in Hellenistic Armies, Polybius.
Volume II contains 148 selections, including: Brutus condemns
his own Sons to Death, Livy ; How the Plebeians won the Con-
sulship, Livy ; The Honesty of Roman Officials, Polybius ; The
Reign of Terror under Sulla, Plutarch ; The Wealth and Habits
of Crassus the Millionaire, Plutarch; The Personal Traits of
Julius Caesar, Suetoni?is ; A Business Panic in Rome, Tacitus;
The Bill of Fare of a Great Roman Banquet, Macrobius ; How a
Stoic met Calamity in the Days of Nero, Epictetus ; The Precepts
of Marcus Aurelius, Marcus Aurelius,
78
HISTORY
A Short History of England
By Charles M, Andrews, of Yale University. With Maps, Tables,
and numerous Illustrations. i2mo, half leather, 473 pages. Price,
^1.40.
THIS history of England aims to present within the compass
of about 400 pages the main features of England^s story from
earliest times to the present day. The book traces in rapid sur-
vey the development of the people and institutions of England
from Anglo-Saxon times to the close of the year 191 1, and shows
by what steps the primitiv-e organization of a semi-tribal people has
been transformed into the highly complicated political and social
structure of the United Kingdom and the British Empire. It re-
tains on a smaller scale the essential characteristics of the larger
work by the same author, with many omissions of details, and
some additions, chiefly of a geographical and biographical char-
acter.
The author tells a clear and simple story, avoiding technical
expressions and yet passing over no important feature of the
history that is necessary for the proper understanding of the
subject.
The aim of the book is to be instructive as well as interesting.
The narrative is made as continuous as possible, that the pupil
may follow in unbroken sequence the thread of the story. It is
accompanied with a large number of newly selected illustrations
and an ample supply of maps and chronological tables. The
elaborate bibliographies contained in the larger work have been
omitted and only a small but selective list of the best books in
brief form has been retained. The history has been brought
down to date in matters of scholarship as well as chronology, and
contains many views and statements not to be found in the larger
work. It is designed as a text-book for half-year, or elementary
courses, but it might well be used by any reader desiring a
brief and suggestive account of the main features of England's
history.
81
o
V
■^'^O^'^'i.X^kJ
^
cUa
(7^o^